Release Date: Dec. 2017 / Manual Revision:1.00
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
USER’S MANUAL
ENTEC
ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Copyright © 2009 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved.
Forerunner Distribution & Automation
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Release Note:
[Dec. 2017] Ver1.00
New user manual for ETR300-R-600
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
i
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Summary of Features........................................................................................................... 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 7
2.1. Inputs and Outputs............................................................................................................... 7
2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 9
2.3. Metering Accuracy ............................................................................................................ 10
2.4. Recloser Mode Funtions .................................................................................................... 11
2.5. Sectionalizer Mode Functions ........................................................................................... 20
2.6. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 21
2.7. Loop Control ..................................................................................................................... 26
2.8. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 27
2.9. Communications................................................................................................................ 33
3. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................. 34
4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 35
5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 36
5.1. Communication Port.......................................................................................................... 37
5.2. SCADA Connector (Option) ............................................................................................ 39
5.3. Current Input Connector .................................................................................................... 39
5.4. Voltage Input Connector .................................................................................................... 40
5.5. Monitor Connector ............................................................................................................ 40
5.6. Trip/Close Connector ........................................................................................................ 41
5.7. Outputs Connector ............................................................................................................. 41
5.8. Status Inputs Connector..................................................................................................... 42
5.9. DC Inputs Connector (Option) .......................................................................................... 42
5.10. NTC Connector ............................................................................................................... 43
5.11. Power Input / Battery Input Connector............................................................................ 43
5.12. Power Output Connector ................................................................................................. 43
5.13. IRIG-B Connector ........................................................................................................... 44
5.14. External I/O Unit ETIO10 (Option) ................................................................................ 44
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
ii
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 46
6.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 47
6.1.1. Operation Section ................................................................................................... 47
6.1.2. Local Control Section............................................................................................. 48
6.1.3. Menu Control Section ............................................................................................ 53
6.1.4. Fault Indication Section ......................................................................................... 55
6.1.5. Voltage Element Section......................................................................................... 55
6.1.6. Reclosing Sequence Status Section ........................................................................ 56
6.1.7. System Diagnostic Section ..................................................................................... 56
6.1.8. Battery Status Section ............................................................................................ 56
6.1.9. User LED Section................................................................................................... 57
6.1.10. SetGroup Status Section ....................................................................................... 58
6.1.11. Other Status Section ............................................................................................. 58
6.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 59
6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree ............................................................................................... 59
6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting ................................................................................................... 62
6.2.3. GROUP Setting ...................................................................................................... 63
6.2.4. Event ...................................................................................................................... 64
6.2.5. Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 64
6.2.6. Time........................................................................................................................ 64
6.2.7. Status ...................................................................................................................... 64
6.2.8. Metering ................................................................................................................. 64
6.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 65
6.3.1. Initial Screen .......................................................................................................... 65
6.3.2. Main Menu ............................................................................................................. 70
6.3.3. Setting Example ..................................................................................................... 70
6.3.4. Setting Save ............................................................................................................ 71
7. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 72
7.1. General Setting .................................................................................................................. 72
7.1.1. System .................................................................................................................... 73
7.1.2. Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 83
7.1.3. Loop Control ........................................................................................................ 102
7.1.4. Passcode ............................................................................................................... 123
7.1.5. PLC ...................................................................................................................... 123
7.1.6. Device .................................................................................................................. 132
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
iii
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 142
7.2. Communication ............................................................................................................... 143
7.2.1. Protocol Setup ...................................................................................................... 143
7.2.2. Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 168
7.2.3. Dialup Modem Setup............................................................................................ 176
7.2.4. FTP-SSL ............................................................................................................... 179
7.2.5. Wifi ....................................................................................................................... 179
7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup ................................................................................................ 180
7.2.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 184
8. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 185
8.1. Recloser ........................................................................................................................... 186
8.1.1. Auto Reclosing (79).............................................................................................. 190
8.1.2. Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51P) ........................................................... 200
8.1.3. Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51G)........................................................ 205
8.1.4. Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51Q(46)) .............................. 209
8.1.5. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P1).............................................................. 213
8.1.6. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G1) .......................................................... 215
8.1.7. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SG) ................................................................................ 217
8.1.8. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q1(46)) ................................. 219
8.1.9. Phase Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50P2) ............................................... 221
8.1.10. Ground Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50G2) .......................................... 223
8.1.11. Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50Q2(46)) ................................. 225
8.1.12. Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................. 227
8.1.13. Cold Load Pickup ............................................................................................... 236
8.1.14. Harmonic Block (2HB and 5HB) ....................................................................... 239
8.1.15. Directional Controls (67) .................................................................................... 241
8.1.16. Broken Conductor .............................................................................................. 249
8.1.17. Voltage (27/59/64N) ........................................................................................... 251
8.1.18. Frequency (81) ................................................................................................... 259
8.1.19. Power (32) .......................................................................................................... 267
8.1.20. Demand (49) ....................................................................................................... 271
8.1.21. Hotline Tag ......................................................................................................... 274
8.1.22. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves.............................................................. 277
8.1.23. Others ................................................................................................................. 312
8.2. Sectionalizer .................................................................................................................... 314
8.2.1. FI Pickup Current ................................................................................................. 314
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
iv
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.2.2. Inrush Time .......................................................................................................... 315
8.2.3. Auto Setction ........................................................................................................ 316
8.3. Monitoring....................................................................................................................... 331
8.3.1. Phase Difference................................................................................................... 331
8.3.2. Synchro’ Check (25) ............................................................................................. 333
8.3.3. Open Phase ........................................................................................................... 337
8.3.4. Live Line Block.................................................................................................... 338
8.3.5. Fault Locator ........................................................................................................ 339
8.3.6. Load Current Alarm ............................................................................................. 342
8.3.7. Power Factor (55) ................................................................................................. 344
8.4. Save Setting ..................................................................................................................... 345
9. EVENT RECORDER.................................................................................................. 346
9.1. Operation Event............................................................................................................... 346
9.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 347
9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary ................................................................................................... 349
9.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 351
9.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 352
9.6. Load & Energy Event ...................................................................................................... 353
9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event .................................................................................. 353
9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event ................................................................................. 355
9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day ............................................................................................. 356
9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration..................................................................... 358
9.7. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 359
9.8. PQM Event ...................................................................................................................... 360
9.9. Load Current Alarm Event .............................................................................................. 362
9.10. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 363
10. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 364
10.1. Count ............................................................................................................................. 364
10.1.1. ETR300-R Count............................................................................................... 364
10.1.2. Fault Count ......................................................................................................... 365
10.1.3. PQM Count ........................................................................................................ 367
10.1.4. Communication Count ....................................................................................... 371
10.1.5. User Count.......................................................................................................... 373
10.2. Interrupt Time ................................................................................................................ 375
10.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................. 375
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
v
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.4. Data Reset...................................................................................................................... 376
10.5. Controller Information .................................................................................................. 376
10.6. Mechanism Scale ........................................................................................................... 377
11. TIME........................................................................................................................... 378
12. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 379
12.1. Recloser ......................................................................................................................... 379
12.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 381
12.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 381
12.4. GOOSE Single Input ..................................................................................................... 382
12.5. GOOSE Double Input ................................................................................................... 382
12.6. GOOSE Output.............................................................................................................. 383
12.7. Fault ............................................................................................................................... 383
12.8. Diagonosic ..................................................................................................................... 384
13. METERING ............................................................................................................... 385
13.1. Current ........................................................................................................................... 385
13.2. Voltage ........................................................................................................................... 386
13.3. Frequency ...................................................................................................................... 387
13.4. Power ............................................................................................................................. 388
13.5. Energy ........................................................................................................................... 389
13.6. Demand Current and Power .......................................................................................... 390
13.7. Unbalance ...................................................................................................................... 392
13.8. Harmonics ..................................................................................................................... 393
13.9. True R.M.S .................................................................................................................... 393
13.10. TD Monitoring............................................................................................................. 394
13.11. Controller Reference.................................................................................................... 395
14. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 396
14.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 396
14.2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 397
14.3. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 399
14.4. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 400
14.5. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 401
14.6. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 401
14.7. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................... 402
14.8. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 403
14.9. VD Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................................... 404
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
vi
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.10. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 405
14.11. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 406
14.12. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling ............................................................... 407
14.13. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 408
14.14. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 408
14.15. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 408
14.16. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 409
14.17. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 410
14.18. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 410
14.19. Communication Cables ................................................................................................411
14.20. Hardware Block Diagram............................................................................................ 412
14.21. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 413
14.22. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 415
14.23. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 416
14.24. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram.................................................................................... 417
14.25. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 418
14.26. CT Protection Circuit .................................................................................................. 418
14.27. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) ................................................................................... 419
14.28. Voltage Transducer ...................................................................................................... 420
14.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 421
14.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 422
14.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil ...................................................................................... 422
14.32. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 423
15. MAINTANANCE....................................................................................................... 424
15.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 424
16. PLC function .............................................................................................................. 427
17. Function of File Transfer Protocol ........................................................................... 428
17.1. Patching firmware to upgrade ....................................................................................... 428
17.2. Import/Export CSV files ............................................................................................... 429
17.2.1. Access ETR300-R to import and export CSV files ............................................ 429
17.2.2. Export CSV files ................................................................................................ 429
17.2.3. Import CSV files ................................................................................................ 429
17.3. COMFEDE .................................................................................................................... 430
17.4. COMTRADE ................................................................................................................ 431
17.4.1. File format and Name ......................................................................................... 431
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
vii
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
17.4.2. Releated Setting Items ........................................................................................ 431
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
viii
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Description
ETR300-R with microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide protective
coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for continuous best quality of electric
service.
Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option) which
fundamentally installed.
ETR300-R provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote. It
also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters.
Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy metering is
also performed.
Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control ETR300-R with key buttons on the user
interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled, Control
Locked, Remote enabled, GROUP settings, Loop control Enabled, Loop control auto restore, Hot
line tag and so on.
Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of settings,
acquisition of event data, and management of operation history.
To provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best quality of electric distribution,
ETR300-R contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3,
McGraw Edison, and KEPCO and so on. Users can select any time of current curve simply by
programming and modifying.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1.2. Summary of Features
PROTECTION ( RECLOSER MODE)

Automatic Reclosing(Up To 5 Shots)

Two Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element

Two Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element

Sensitive Earth Fault Element

Two Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element

Inrush Restraint and Cold Load Pickup

2nd and 5th Harmonic Block Elements

Phase Directional Control

Ground Directional Control

Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control

Negative Sequence Directional Control

Sequence Coordination Control

Broken Conduct Element

Two Under Voltage Elements

Two Over Voltage Elements

Neutral Over Voltage Elements

Voltage Auto Restoration

Two Under Frequency Elements

Two Over Frequency Elements

Frequency Decay Element

Frequency Auto Restoration

Two Forward Power Elements

Two Directional Power Elements

Phase Current, Grount Current, Negative Sequency Current, Active Power and Reactive Power
Demand Elements

Hotline Tag Element
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
FAULT INDICATION (SECTIONALIZER MODE)

Phase Fault Indication

Ground Fault Indication

Sensitive Earth Fault Indication

Negative Sequence Fault Indication

Inrush Restraint

Auto Sectionalizer
MONITORING (COMMON)

Phase Difference

Synchro’ Check

Open Phase

Live Line Block

Fault Locator (applies to Recloser mode only)

Load Current Alarm

Power Factor (Lead and Lag)

Live Line

Operation Count

Conact Wear per Phase

Battery Automatic Load Test & Battery Management

Power Quality
-
Interrupt
-
Sag
-
Swell
-
Harmonics
-
Current Unbalance
-
Voltage Unbalance
-
Under Voltage
-
Over Voltage
-
Under Frequency

Transdurer(TD) Monitor

Recloser Trip/Close Coil

Breaker Failure with Current Supervision

Recloser Gas Over/Under Pressure
NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
EVENT RECORDER

S/W Operation Recorder - last 30,000 events

Fault Event Recorder - last 10,000 events

Fault Waveform(60 cycles× 64 samples) - last 32 events

System Event Recorder - last 30,000 events

Setting Change Event Recorder - last 30,000 events

Load&Energy Recorder
-
Average Load & Energy – last 27,500 events (Max 1,145 days)
-
Peak Load & Energy in every hour – last 27,500 events
-
Peak Load & Energy in every day – last 27,500 events

Diagnostic Event Recorder - last 30,000 events

PQM Detection Event Recorder - last 10,000 events

Load Current Alarm Event Recorder - last 10,000 events
NOTE : According to stting, all events can support COMFEDE format.
According to stting, waveform can support COTRADE format.
MAINTENANCE

Restart, Diagnostic and Operation counters

Fault Trip and Fault counters

PQM counters

Communication counters

User counters

Interrupt Time

Contact Wear per Phase
METERING

Each Phase Current and Angle : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef

Each Phase Pick Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq

Each Phase and Line to Line Voltage and Angle : Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs,
Vst, Vtr

Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component : I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0

Source and Load side Frequency, Frequency Change Rate, Slip Frequency and Slip Angle

Single Phase and Three Phase Power : Active Power(kW), Rective Power(kVar), Apparent
Power(kVA), Power Factor(%)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
4
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr

Positive and Negative Energy : Active Eenergy(kWh), Reactive Energy(kVarh)

Present and Positive/Negative Maximum Demand
-
Demand Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq
-
Single Phase and Three Phase Active Power(kW) and Reactive Poer(kVar)

Source/Load side Voltage and Current Unbalance

Voltage and Current Harmonics (THD, 2nd ~ 31th order)

Voltage and Current True R.M.S

Tranducers Input (TD1~4, ETD1~4) – Option

ETR300-R Condition Reference
-
Battery Voltage, Charger Voltage and Charger Current
-
Battery Capacity
-
ETR300-R Internal Temperature
-
ETR300-R External Temperature - Option
-
Gas Pressure – Option
-
System Power : +12V, -12V, Reference Voltage
COMMUNICATIONS

Side panel PORT 1 and 2 RS232 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol

Side panel PORT 3 RS485 Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol

Side panel PORT 4 and 5 RJ-45 or Fiber Optic(Option) Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC61850
and IEC60870-5-104 Protocol

Side panel PORT SPI-1, -2 (Option) : I/O expendable communication(RJ-45, RS-422
communication method used)

Front Panel PORT USB-B Type Port : ETR300-R Interface Software
USER INTERFACE

Fault Indicators

Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage

Dual Functional Keypads

20×8 Character LCD Display

59 LED indicators - Fault indications, Sequence status, Battery status, etc

Setting Range Help Messages

Access Security(3 Passwords with Different Authorites)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
OTHERS

Loop Control (applies to Recloser mode only)

Programmable Logic Control(PLC)

Time Synchronism Device (IRIG) – Option

Wifi – Option
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS

8 Opto-isolated Programmable Outputs – Option

8 Opto-isolated Programmable External Outputs - Option
AUXILIARY INPUTS

12 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs – Option

8 Opto-isolated Programmable External Inputs - Option
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
SYSTEMS

3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum
FREQUENCY

50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation
CONTROL VOLTAGE INPUT

AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (±20%)

Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
USER AVAILABLE DC POWER OUTPUT - Option

DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc

DC Power Continuous : 60W
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Standard

Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10

Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <6V

Burden: 0.002VA(4V)
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Option

Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10

Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V

Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS (CT)

Current Inputs I01, I02, I03, IN and Ise

I01, I02, I03, IN Input Current Range

1A Nominal

2A continuous

25A 1 second

Burden : 0.38VA(1A)

SEF Input Current Range

0.05A Nominal

0.16A Continuous

0.6A 1 second

Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
CONTROL INPUTS - Option

Control Inputs 4 Channel

Nominal Voltages and Operating Range

250Vdc(-15%,+20%)

125Vdc(-15%,+20%)

48Vdc(-15%,+20%)

24Vdc(-15%,+20%)

12Vdc(-10%,+30%)

Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
CONTROL OUTPUT CONTACTS - Option

Control Outputs 4 Channel

300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection

Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)

Maximum operating power
Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts
(L/R=7ms)
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vdc
48Vdc
24Vdc
250Vac
125Vac
0.1A
0.8A
3A
3A
5A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.2. Type Withstand Tests
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH

CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs

2㎸(60㎐) for 1 minute
IMPULSE VOLTAGE

IEEE C62.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic
Interference Transceivers, 6㎸(1.2×50㎲), 3㎄(8×20㎲)
SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITY

IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems
(3㎸ oscillatory 1㎒ to 1.5㎒, 5㎸ fast transient 1.2×50㎲)

IEEE C37.90.2 - 1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers, 10 V/m
(150㎒ and 450㎒, 5 W transmitter 10㎝)
VIBRATIONS TEST

IEC 255-21-1 - 1988 Electrical relays, Part 21 : Vibration, shock, bump, and seismic tests on
measuring relays and protection equipment, Section One - Vibration tests (sinusoidal), Class 1

Control Operating Temperature

Operating range : -25℃∼+70℃(-13℉∼+158℉)

LCD : -20℃∼+70℃(-4℉∼+158℉) - standard

VFD : -40℃∼+85℃(-40℉∼+185℉) - option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
9
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.3. Metering Accuracy
The quantity of electricity used in metering and protection is based on fundamental content which
harmonic is removed in input voltage and current parameters.
VOLTAGE METERING

Rated voltage : AC effective value voltage 4 V

Phase A, B, C : ±0.5%( 50 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±0.5˚

V1, V2, 3V0 : ±0.6 %( 50 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±1˚
CURRENT METERING

Rated current : AC 0.6 Arms

IA, IB, IC, IN : ±0.5 mA ± 0.5 % of reading(0.03~1.5 A), ±0.5˚

ISEF : ±0.005 mA + ±0.5 % of reading(0.5~16.0 mA), ±1˚

I1, I2, 3I0 : ±0.01 A ± 3 % of reading(0.003~1.5A ), ±1˚
POWER METERING

Apparent Power : ±1.2 %( Rated Voltage >80 %, Rated Current >0.03)

Active Power : ±0.7 % PF=1, ±1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)

Reactive Power : ±0.7 % PF=0, ±1% PF<0.5(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
FREQUENCY METERING

Source/Load Voltage Frequency : ±0.01 Hz
HARMONIC METERING : ±5%
The above measurement accuracy is applied only for ETR300-R controller. The measurement
accuracy of voltage and current including recloser is about ±1 %.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
10
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.4. Recloser Mode Funtions
Auto Reclosing
Function..................................................................... ENABLE/DISABLE
Operations to Lockout – Phase.................................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Ground ............................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - SEF ..................................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq’ ..................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - phase..... NO/YES
Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - ground .. NO/YES
Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - NEQ ..... NO/YES
Reclose interval 1 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 0.10 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reclose interval 2 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 0.10 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reclose interval 3 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 0.10 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reclose interval 4 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 0.10 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle ........................... 0.10 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset time from lockout ............................................ 0.10 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reclose Wait Time..................................................... 1.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Overcurrent Protection (+/-)
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary
according to H/W option.
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves

ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely

IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse

EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse

Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s

Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4

User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4

McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)
Time Dial................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE
Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Sensitive Earth Fault Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM
Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.0 in steps of 0.01s
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Inst’ Overcurrent Lockout Protection(+/-)
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
12
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Inrush Restraint
Phase/Ground/SEF/Neq Seq’ Function….………..DISABLE/ ENABLE
Fault Pickup Level at Inrush Restraint Duration

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ……….10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A

SEF Pickup Level…………………….……….0.1 to 2,000.0A in steps of 0.1A
 Dropout Level…………………………………5%
Restore Minimum Time

Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function…………..DISABLE/ ENABLE
 Restore Minimum Time……………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Inrush Restraint Reset

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Rest Current…….…..10 ~ 1600A in steps of 1A

SEF Rest Current…….………………………..0.1 ~ 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
 Reset Time…………………………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Curves

Curve Type…………………………………….Total 62 Curves
-
ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely
-
IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse
-
EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
-
Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
-
Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
-
User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4
-
McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
-
Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)

Time Dial……………………………………..0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01

Time Adder……………………………………0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Response Time…………………….0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Type…………………………………….INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Outage Time .............................................................. 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Outage Current .......................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Cold Load Pickup
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE
Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES
Multiple of Cold Load….………………………….1.0 to 5.0 xMTC in steps of 0.1 xMTC
Cold Load Interval Time ........................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
2nd and 5th Harmonic Blocking
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE
Pickup Level .............................................................. OFF, 5 to 100% in steps of 1%
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Reset Time ................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Minimum Current ...................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Phase Directional Control
Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Ground/Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control
Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (–3V0)
For voltage element polarizing the source
VTs must be connected in Wye
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
14
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Negative Directional Control
Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(-V2)
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Broken Conduct Protection
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Pickup Level(I2/I1) ................................................... 1 to 100% in steps of 1%
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Minimun Normal Current.......................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Maximun Normal Current ......................................... OFF, 10 to 630A in steps of 1A
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Voltage Protection
Under Voltage 1,2

Function………………………………………..DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM

Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Normal Voltage……………………..0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
Under Voltage Auto Restoration

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE

Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Time……………………………………..1 to 100 min. in steps of 1 min.

Retoration Source Side………………………...VS/VL/VS&VL

Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
15
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Over Voltage 1,2

Function………………………………………..DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM

Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
Neutral Over Voltage 1,2

Function………………………………………..DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM

Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Over Voltage Auto Restoration

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE

Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Time……………………………………..1 to 100 min. in steps of 1 min.

Retoration Source Side………………………...VS/VL/VS&VL

Active Voltage Type……………………………Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when Over Voltage
102 to 105% of Pickup when Under Voltage
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Frequency Protection
Under Frequency 1,2

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE

Pickup Level …………………………………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Minimun Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Over Frequency 1,2

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE

Pickup Level …………………………………... 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Minimun Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
16
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Frequency Decay

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE

Pickup Level(Hz/sec) ………………………… 0.01 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01㎐/sec

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Normal Frequency…..……………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐

Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Minimun Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
 Active Type………….…………………………INCREASE/DECREASE/ABSOLUTE
Frequency Auto Restoration

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE

Pickup Level …………………………………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Minimun Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02㎐ when Under Frequency
at CVD Pickup+0.05㎐ when Under Frequency
at VT Pickup - 0.02㎐ when Over Frequency
at CVD Pickup -0.05㎐ when Over Frequency
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
17
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Power Protection
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM
Fuction Bloke Time After Close ............................... 0.02 to 300.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Forward Power 1,2

Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.00 to 300.00MW in steps of 0.01MW

Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power
Directional Power 1,2

Active Minimum Powr Level..………………. OFF, -300.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01MW

Angle………………………………………….0.00 to 359.99° in steps 0.01°

Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power and Reactive Power
Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase, Ground, Negative Sequence Demand Protection
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Pickup Level

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’………………………10A to 1600A in steps of 1A

Active Power………………………………….0.01 to 300.00 MW in step of 0.01 MW
 Reactive Power………………………………..0.01 to 300.00 Mvar in step of 0.01 Mvar
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Demand Type ............................................................ THERMAL/BLOCK
Thermal Interval Time .............................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min
Block Interval Time .................................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
18
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Hot Line Tag
Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves

ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely

IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse

EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse

Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s

Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4

User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4

McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)
Time Dial................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Sequence Coordination Control
Sequence Coordination ............................................. ON/ OFF
Lockout Priority
Lockout Priority ........................................................ PHASE/ GROUND
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
19
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.5. Sectionalizer Mode Functions
Fault Indication
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
Sensitive Earth Fault Pickup Level ........................... 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary
according to H/W option.
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Inrush Duration Time
Phase/Ground/S.E.F/Neg Seq’ .................................. 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Auto Section
Type Select ................................................................ OFF/AUTO SETCTION/TIE POINT
Auto Sectionalizer Control

Auto Sectionalizer Operate Count ...…………..1 to 5 Count in steps of 1 Count

Auto Sectionalizer Operate Time Delay…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Auto Sectionalizer Reset Time Delay……….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Tie Point Switch Control

Tie Point Switch Operate Count ......…………..1 to 5 Count in steps of 1 Count

Tie Point Switch Close Time Delay…..…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Tie Point Switch Open Time Delay.…..…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Tie Point Switch Reset Time Delay…...…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Dead Line Time Delay at Source Side…...….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
 Dead Line Time Delay at Load Side..…...….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ open/close time delay
5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
20
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.6. Monitoring
Phase Difference
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Dead Voltage Maximum Level.................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Angle Difference...................................... 1° to 100° in steps of 1°
Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.01 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Difference Check Phase ............................................ ALL/A/B/C
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................ 5%
Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°
Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
Syncro’ Check
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Dead Voltage Maximum Level.................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Angle Difference...................................... OFF, 20.0° to 80.0° in steps of 0.1°
Maximum Frequency Difference(Slip Freq.) ............ 0.5 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Syncro’ Check Phase ................................................. A/B/C/AB/BC/CA
Compensation Angle ................................................. 0° to 330° in steps of 30°
Load Side Voltage Compensation Factor .................. 0.50 to 2.00 in steps of 0.01
Recloser Closing Time .............................................. 0.00 to 600.0msec in steps 0.1msec
Closing Wait Time ..................................................... 1 to 600sec in steps 1sec
Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................ 5%
Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°
Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
21
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Open Phase
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
On Level .................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Off Level ................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
Live Line Block
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Live Line Block ......................................................... RECLOSE/CLOSE/BOTH BLOCK
Live Level ................................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Line Check Source ............................................ VS/VL/VS&VL
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
Fault Locator
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km
Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Load Current Alarm
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Delay ......................... 0.00 to 600.00s in steps 0.01s
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
22
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Power Factor 1,2
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Pickup Level for Lag ................................................. OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level for Lead ............................................... OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
Time Delay ................................................................ 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Fuction Block Time After Close................................ 0.05 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
Live Line
Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
Operation Counter
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Alarm Count .............................................................. 1 to 20000 in steps of 1
Reset Count ............................................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Recloser Contact Wear
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Alarm Pickup Level .................................................. 0.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00s in steps 0.01s
Interruption Current at Point 1(Max. Operation) ...... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA
Number of Operation at Point 1(Max. Operation) .... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1
Interruption Current at Point 2(Min. Operation) ....... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA
Number of Operation at Point 2(Min. Operation) ..... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1
Set Phase A Wear....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
Set Phase B Wear ...................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
Set Phase C Wear ...................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
23
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Battery Automatic Load Test
Test Period ................................................................. OFF, 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour
Battery Management
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Charge Time .............................................................. 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.
Discharge Time.......................................................... 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.
Alarm Pickup Level................................................... 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%
Reset Battery Capacity .............................................. 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%
Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Interrupt

Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.10 to 0.49xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Sag

Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.50 to 0.99xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Swell

Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 1.01 to 1.50xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Harmonics

Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%

Voltage Total Harmonics Time Delay………..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Current Total Harmonics Delay Time…….…..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Current Unbalance

Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Voltage Unbalance

Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Under Voltage

Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
24
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Over Voltage

Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Under Frequency

Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec
Over Frequency

Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
or ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
TD Monitor
TD1 Rate ................................................................... 1 to 200 in steps of 1
TD1 Ratio .................................................................. 1 to 3000 in steps of 1
TD1 Offset................................................................. -10000 to +10000 in steps of 1
TD1-1 Type ............................................................... UNDER/OVER
TD1-1 PU ................................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1
TD1-1 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec
TD1-2 Type ............................................................... UNDER/OVER
TD1-2 PU ................................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1
TD1-2 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
Dropout Level ........................................................... 90% of Pickup when Over Type
110% of Pickup when Under Type
※. NOTE : There is 4 more channels(TD2 ~ TD4, ETD1 ~ ETD4) the same as above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
25
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.7. Loop Control
Loop Control
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Type Select ................................................................ NONE/SEC/MID/TIE
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID ....................... VS/VL/VS&VL
Voltage Response Side to TIE ................................... VS/VL/VS&VL
VS Wiring Type ......................................................... 3PN/3PP/1PN(A)/1PN(B)/1PN(C)/1PP(AB)/
1PP(BC)/1PP(CA)
VL Wiring Type ......................................................... 3PN/3PP/1PN(A)/1PN(B)/1PN(C)/1PP(AB)/
1PP(BC)/1PP(CA)
Primary Setting Group............................................... GROUP1/2/3/4/5/6
Alternate Setting Group............................................. GROUP1/2/3/4/5/6
Change Alternate Setting at MID .............................. OFF/ON
Change Alternate Setting at TIE ................................ OFF/ON
Loop Control Auto Enable after Manual Close ......... DISABLE/ENABLE
Loop Control Auto Enable after Manual Open ......... DISABLE/ENABLE
Open Time on Both Dead Line at TIE....................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Auto Restoration Time at SEC/MID ......................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Dead Line Level ........................................................ 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Line Level ......................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Dead Line Time Delay .............................................. 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Live Line Time Delay................................................ 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Dead Line Reset Time ............................................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Reclosing Block Time after LC Operation ................ 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
26
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.8. Recorder
OPERATION EVENT RECORDER


Trigger Source

Recloser Closed(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control CLOSE)

Recloser Opened(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control OPEN)
Storage Capacity : Total 30,000 Events
FAULT EVENT RECORDER


Trigger Source

Fault Pickup

Fault Timeout Elements
Data Channels


Analoge 14 Channels (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef, I1, I2, 3I0, Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)
Storage capacity : 10,000 events
FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE


Trigger Source

Fault Pickup

Fault Timeout Elements
Data Channels

Current 5 Channels(Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef)

Voltage 6 Channels(Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)

Digital Input Port Status 36 Channels (IN101~112, IN201~216, IN301~308)

Digial Output Relay 32 Channels (OUT101~108, OUT201~216, OUT301~308)

Digital Logic Channels

Sample Rate : 16/32/64 per cycle

Trigger Position : 1 to 20cycles(64 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes)

Storage capacity : 16 events with max 240cycles(Cycle is dependent on Sample Rate)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
27
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source

Protection Elements

52A Contact

Sequence status

Front panel control

AC supply

External control

Fail operation

External input status

System alarm, etc.

Trigger Time : every 5 msec

Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout

Storage Capacity : Last 30,000 Events
SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER


Trigger Source

Global Setting Change

Group Setting Change – Group 1/2/3/4/5/6
Storage Capacity : Total 30,000 Events
LOAD & ENERGY
1) Average Load/ Minute

Trigger Source

Demand Current – A, B, C, N

Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф

Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф

Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф),
Negative Varhour(3ф)

Trigger Time : every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes

Storage Capacity : Total 27,500 Events
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
28
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2) Peak Load/ Hour

Trigger Source

Demand Current – A, B, C, N

Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф

Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф

Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф),
Negative Varhour(3ф)

Trigger Time : every 1 hour

Storage Capacity : Total 27,500 Events, 1145days
3) Peak Load/ Day

Trigger Source

Demand Current – A, B, C, N

Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф

Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф

Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф),
Negative Varhour(3ф)

Trigger Time : every 1 day

Storage Capacity : Total 27,500 Events, 27500 days
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
29
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source

System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V)

A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)

Power Down Mode

Gas Status

DSP Fail

RTC Fail

Memory Fail

Flash-Rom Fail

Circuit Voltage Fail

Event Fail

Count Fail

DO Fail

Close Fail

Open Fail, etc.

Trigger Time : every 5 msec

Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout

Storage Capacity : Last 30,000 Events
PQM EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source

Interrupt Dectect

Voltage Sag Detect

Voltage Swell Detect

Voltage/Current Harnonics Detect

Voltage/Current Unbalance Detect

Under/Over Voltage Detect

Under/Over Frequency Detect

Trigger type : Pick up

Storage Capacity : Last 10,000 Events
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
30
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
LOAD CURRENT ALARM EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source

Phase A, B, C Load Current Alarm

S.E.F Load Current Alarm

Negative Sequence Load Current Alarm

Trigger type : Pick up

Storage Capacity : Last 10,000 Events
COUNTER

System Restart Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

Diagnostic Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

Operation Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

Fault Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

PQM Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

Communication Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

User Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each counter is applied
differently.

When the setting is OFF, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value
exceeds 1,000,000

When the setting is ON, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value
exceeds 65,534
INTERRUPT TIME

Total, Phase A, B and C Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

Momentary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

Temporary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

Sustained Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each interrupt time is
applied differently.
 When the setting is OFF, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the
interrupt time exceeds 1,000,000 secs
 When the setting is ON, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the
interrupt time exceeds 65,534
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
31
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
RECLOSER CONTACT WEAR

Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
PEAK CURRENT

Phase A, B, C, N Peak Current and Negative Sequence Peak Current

Trigger Source

Load Current Alarm Detect
ENERGY

Positive Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh

Positive Rective Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh

Negative Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh

Negative Rective Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh
NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Ener’ Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each energy value is
applied differently.

When the setting is OFF, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy
value exceeds 999,999,999

When the setting is ON, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy value
exceeds 60,000
DEMAND

Demand Current – A, B, C, N, Negative Sequence

Demand Positive Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Positive Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Negative Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Negative Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
32
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2.9. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications
RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8
Side panel RS232-1
Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8
Side panel RS232-2
Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RS485,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8
Side panel RS485
Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RJ-45 or Fiber Optic(Option),10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Side panel EN1, EN2
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC61850 and IEC60870-5-104
Protocol
Side panel SPI-1, SPI-2
RJ-45, RS-422 communication method used
(* Option)
I/O expendable communication port
Front Panel USB
USB- B Type
ETR300-R interface software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
33
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3. APPLICATION
ETR300-R has two control types(Recloser type(default) and Sectionalizer type). Control Type
setting is available in the menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE /
CONTROL TYPE”. The control type must be selected according to the installed body. The
Recloser function(fault trip) is active on Recloser type, and when the recloser body, Recloser type
must be selected. But, The Sectionalizer(fault indication) function is active on Sectionalizer type,
and when the swich body or sectionalizer body, Sectionalizer type must be selected. If the selected
control type and the body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.
Depending on the control type, different setting menus are applied. Applied setting menus are
shown below according to the control type.
Recloser Function
Recloser function is active.
Sectionalizer function is not active.
RECLOSER
(SECMODE= 0)
Auto Reclosing (79)
Broken Conduct (46BC)
Phase Overcurrent (51P/50P)
Voltage Protection (27/59/64N)
Ground Overcurrent (51G/50G)
Frequency Protection (81U/81O/81D)
Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG)
Power Protection (32FP/32P)
Negative Seq＇ Overcurrent (51Q/50Q)
Demand Protection (49)
Inrush Restraint & CLPU
HotLine Tag
2nd/5th Harmonic Block
Loop Control
Direction (67P/67G/67SG/67Q)
Fault Locator
Default Setting
Control Type
SECTIONALIZER
(SECMODE = 1)
Sectionalizer Function
Phase Fault Indication (FI)
Negative Seq’ Fault Indication (FI)
Ground Fault Indication (FI)
FI Inrush Restraint
Sensitive Earth Fault Indication (FI)
Auto Section
Sectionalizer function is active.
Recloser function is not active.
: Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / RECLOSER＂ menu
: Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL＂ menu
: Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / MONITORING＂ menu
: Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SECTIONALIZER＂ menu
*. NOTE ) The remaining functions are applied in common regardless of the Control Type.
Figure 3-1. Control Type Logic Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
34
9
IN
7
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
VT
VN
K01
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VS
6
VB
VC
VA
E01
CLOSE
TRIP
2
3
COM
J01
TRIP/CLOSE
2
3
4
DC +
10
PW
4
VN
PT
VR
5
5
DC -
3
INPUT
7
VC / VT
8
VB / VS
IA
F01
VA / VR
2
2
3
2
D01
OUTPUT
108 107 106 105
4
104
I01
2
3
4
5
7
6
6
5
4
102
3
H01
P
2
N
3
P
C01
OUT101
2
RS232-1
4
N
POWER OUT
103
OUTPUT
8
OUT205 OUT206 OUT207
5
27 UV
OUT IN GND
IB
3
SEF
IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
4
B
L01
IC
5
A
CT
6
50 IOCL
MONITORS
8
RS232-2
G
RS485
C
IRIG-B
50 IOC
SEF
9
81 UF/OF/RF
P
51 TOC
10
25 SYNCHRONISM
N
59 OV
FG
FUN
1
03
7
5
4
3
2
3
4
BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-
G01
2
A01
106 105 104 103 102 IN101
6
POWER IN
INPUT
112 111 110 109 108 IN107
02 B01
2SPEED
04
2L/ACT
05
TX
06
RX
07
1SPEED
DBG
Eth1
1L/ACT
RS232
Eth2
6
- +
2
4
5
3
ENT
2
3
1
ESC
1
2
ETR300-R
NTC
M10
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION
Figure 4-1. Construction and Dimensions(Standard)
35
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION
ETR300-R Side panel construction is as follows.
M10
9
2
1
3
2
1
- +
FG
N
P
RS232
1L/ACT
DBG
1SPEED
RX
NTC
IRIG-B
10
9
8
SEF
7
6
IN
5
IC
4
3
2
IB
F01
IA
8
7
6
5
VN
VT
VS
VR
CT
4
3
2
D01
2
E01
VN
VC
VB
VA
108 107 106 105
TRIP/CLOSE
OUTPUT
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J01
DC -
3
TRIP
2
COM
K01
DC +
PW
2SPEED
RS232-1
8
7
104
6
5
4
103
3
102
2
Eth2
C01
OUT101
07
06
05
04
03
02 B01
OUT205
2
3
4
5
I01
2
OUT206
3
4
Eth1
7
6
112 111 110 109 108 IN107
OUTPUT
CLOSE
3
5
3
IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
2
RS232-2
4
INPUT
OUT IN GND
L01
RS485
PT
MONITORS
2L/ACT
TX
5
4
3
2
A01
106 105 104 103 102 IN101
INPUT
POWER OUT
POWER IN
OUT207
5
6
P
N
P
N
BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-
H01
2
3
4
G01
2
3
4
Figure 5-1. Side Panel(Standard)
Cable standard for connector refers to “Table 5-1. Cable Standard for Connector”.
Table 5-1. Cable Standard for Connector
Item
Standard (mm2)
Length (mm)
Model No.
NTC
0.75(12/0.18)
300
AkZ 950-2P
IRIG-B
”
”
AkZ 950-2P
RS485
”
”
AkZ 950-3P
CT
1.25(50/0.18)
”
AkZ 950-10P
PT
0.75(12/0.18)
”
AkZ 950-8P
OUTPUT(C)
”
”
AkZ 950-8P
OUTPUT(D)
”
”
AkZ 950-5P
INPUT(A)
”
”
AkZ 950-7P
INPUT(B)
”
”
AkZ 950-7P
INPUT(K)
”
”
AkZ 950-10P
TRIP/CLOSE
1.25(50/0.18)
”
AkZ 950-5P
OUTPUT(I)
0.75(12/0.18)
”
AkZ 950-6P
POWER OUT
1.25(50/0.18)
”
AkZ 950-4P
POWER IN
”
”
AkZ 960-4P
MONITORS
0.75(12/0.18)
”
AkZ 950-3P
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Remark
36
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.1. Communication Port
1) RS232 PORT
RS232 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring
Indicator).
Table 5-2.RS232-1/RS2332-2 Pin Description
Pin
Signal
Description
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
2
RXD
Receive Data(IN)
3
TXD
Transmit Data(OUT)
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready(OUT)
5
GND
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready(IN)
7
RTS
Request To Send(OUT)
8
CTS
Clear To Send(IN)
9
N/C
No Connection
Figure 5-2.RS232
2) RS485 PORT
RS485 has 3pins as in ‘Table 5-3. RS485 Pin Description’.
Table 5-3.RS485 Pin Description
Pin
Description
1
RS485+
2
RS485-
3
SG (Cable Shield)
3
2
1
FG
N
P
Figure 5-3.RS485
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
37
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3) ETHERNET PORT
Ethernet1 and 2 are RJ-45 that has 8pins as in ‘Table 5-4.Ehternet(TP) Pin Description’.
Ethernet port can be selected between TP and FX type. If FX type is used, LC type optical
communication will be supported.
Table 5-4.Ethernet(TP) Pin Description
Pin
Wire Color
10Base-T Signal
100Base-TX Signal
1
White/Green
Transmit+
2
Green
Transmit-
3
White/Orange
Receive+
4
Blue
Unused
5
White/Blue
Unused
6
Orange
Receive-
7
White/Brown
Unused
8
Brown
Unused
1L/ACT
1SPEED
2L/ACT
2SPEED
Eth2
Eth1
[ Ethernet TP ]
1L/ACT
1SPEED
2L/ACT
2SPEED
Eth2
Eth1
[ Ethernet FX ]
Figure 5-4.Ethernet Port
4) SPI PORT(Option)
SPI-1 and SPI-2 are RJ-45 and are used for
communication with External I/O Unit ETIO10.
For detailed information on External Unit, refer to
“5.14. External I/O Unit ETIO10 (Option)”.
SPI-2
SPI-1
Figure 5-5.SPI-1(Option)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
38
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2. SCADA Connector (Option)
5
4
3
2
D01
8
108 107 106 105
7
104
6
5
4
103
3
102
2
C01
07
06
OUT101
05
04
03
02 B01
7
112 111 110 109 108 IN107
OUTPUT
6
5
4
3
2
A01
106 105 104 103 102 IN101
INPUT
Figure 5-6.SCADA Input, Output Terminal
Digital output (DO) part is composed of a total of 8 relay outputs. Connector to output commands
from the control part.
Digital input (DI) part receives 12 status signals in total by using electrically insulated contacts.
Connector to as part of the receiving of status inputs from the control element.
5.3. Current Input Connector
Current connector starts from pin number 1(A phse), 2(B phase), 3(C phase), 4(N, ground), 5(SEF)
in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of ETR300-R. Connector
type is STLZ950-10.
10
9
8
SEF
7
IN
6
5
IC
4
3
IB
2
F01
IA
Figure 5-7. Current Input Terminal
Table 5-5. Current Input Pin Description
Pin
IA
IB
IC
IN
SEF
Description
A
phase
B
phase
C
phase
N
phase
SEF
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
39
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.4. Voltage Input Connector
Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T)
voltages. Pin arrangement is as follow table. Connector type is STLZ950-8P.
Table 5-6. Voltage Input Pin Description
Pin
VA
VB
VC
VR
VS
VT
Default LCD
Display
A
B
C
R
S
T
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
E01
VN
VT
VS
VR
VN
VC
VB
VA
Figure 5-8. Voltage Input Terminal
5.5. Monitor Connector
It is input terminal to monitor ETR300-R status and its pin arrangement is as in “Table 5-7.
Monitor Pin Description”.
Table 5-7. Monitor Pin Description
Connector
MONITORS
Pin
Description
OUT
Pressure +12V
IN
Pressure Output
GND
Pressure GND
Figure 5-9. Monitor Terminal
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
40
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.6. Trip/Close Connector
Output terminal to control ETR300-R and its arrange is as in ‘Table 5-8. TRIP/CLOSE Pin
Description’.
CLOSE
2
TRIP
3
COM COSE/TRIP
4
DC +
5
DC -
DC -
1
DC +
Connector
Description
COM
TRIP/CLOSE
Pin
TRIP
Connector
CLOSE
Table 5-8. TRIP / CLOSE Pin Description
J01
2
3
4
5
Figure 5-10. TRIP/ CLOSE Terminal
5.7. Outputs Connector
Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 3 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin
arrangement is as follow.
Table 5-9. Output Pin Description
Connector
Output
OUT205 OUT206 OUT207
Pin
Description
1,2
OUT205
3,4
OUT206
5,6
OUT207
Connector
I01
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 5-11. Output Terminal
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
41
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.8. Status Inputs Connector
8 inputs of status provision.
Table 5-10. Status Input Pin Description
Connector
Pin
Description
9,5,1
Common
10
Open ST’
11
Close ST’
Status
12
Manual Unlock ST’
Input
13
Door ST’
Connector
14
Pressure +12V
15
Pressure GND
16
Pressure Output
2,3,6,7,8
IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
K01
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 5-12. Status Input Terminal
Reserve
5.9. DC Inputs Connector (Option)
4 inputs of status provision.
Table 5-11. DC Input Pin Description
Connector
DC INPUT
Connector
Pin
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
M01
Description
DC01
20mA
DC02
20 mA
DC03
20mA
DC04
20mA
NTC
Thermistor (10k)
NTC
+
DC4
+
DC3
+
DC2
+
DC1
Figure 5-13. DC Input Terminal
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
42
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.10. NTC Connector
A terminal that connects the battery temperature compensation sensor.
(NTC 10 ㏀ B25/85K 3435)
M10
Table 5-12. NTC Pin Description
Connector
Pin
NTC
01
Connector
02
9
Description
NTC Thermistor
NTC
Figure 5-14. NTC Thermistor
5.11. Power Input / Battery Input Connector
Power Input Connector for ETR300-R’s AC24V Power Supply.
It is a battery input connector to charge the battery using inner charger circuit
Table 5-13. Power/Battery Input Pin Description
Connector
Pin
Description
Power/Battery
1,2
AC 24V INPUT
Input Connector
3,4
BATT INPUT
BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-
G01
2
3
4
Figure 5-15. Power & Battery Input
Thermistor
5.12. Power Output Connector
Power output connector for user power, modem power supply and so on, it can supply +12V and
+24V, 40W/continuous , 60W/1Min usage.
Table 5-14. Power Output Pin Description
Connector
Pin
Description
Power Output
1,3
+12V/ +24V(option)
Connector
2,4
GND
P
N
P
N
H01
2
3
4
Figure 5-16. Power Output Thermistor
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
43
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.13. IRIG-B Connector
It is a IRIG-B connector for time synchronization function using GPS module.
2
Table 5-15. IRIG-B Pin Description
Connector
Pin
Description
IRIG-B
1
POSITIVE
Connector
2
NEGATIVE
1
- +
Figure 5-17. IRIG-B
5.14. External I/O Unit ETIO10 (Option)
By using the EXT Port, the number of input and output channels of ETR300-R is expanded.
External I/O Unit ETIO10 is configured following way.
1) COM Port

RJ-45

ETR300-R Communication between
side panel Port A and RS422
2) DC Power Input

DC Power Voltage : 12, 24, 110Vdc

DC Power Continuous : 4W
Figure 5-18. External I/O Unit ETO10
3) Inputs Channels

Input 8 Channels

Nominal Voltages and Operating Range

250Vdc(-15%,+20%)

125Vdc(-15%,+20%)

48Vdc(-15%,+20%)

24Vdc(-15%,+20%)

12Vdc(-10%,+30%)

Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
44
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
4) Output Channels

Output 8 Channels

300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection

Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)

Maximum operating power
Table 5-16. Output Channel Contacts
(L/R=7ms)
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vdc
48Vdc
24Vdc
250Vac
125Vac
0.1A
0.8A
3A
3A
5A
5) Analoge Input Channels

AI 4 Channels

Operating Range

Current type : 4~20mA

Voltage type : 0~10V
*. Channel type (current or voltage) can be selected by purchaser.
DI
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8
TD1 TD2
TD3 TD4
POW
RUN
TX
RX
8
4
12
8
4
A01 02 03 04 05 06
RS422
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
B01 02 03 04 05 06
OUT7
OUT8 ALARM
LAMP
TEST
950
E01 02 03 04
C01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
D01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO,, LTD.
ETIO10
+24V 0V SG FG
07 08 09 10
I/O UNIT
DO
PORT1
Figure 5-19. ETO10’s Side Panel
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
45
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6. USER INTERFACE PANEL
This section describes User Interface Panel based on the front-panel.
User Interface Panel has a LCD(20  8), keypads and LEDs to monitor selected functions and to
indicate selected function and operation status as below.

Directly control the recloser

Verify control status

View system status

View metering value

View information stored in ETR300-R unit

View and change ETR300-R settings
ETR300-R
1
2
3
4
5
6
51 TOC
50 IOC
50 IOCL
A
ESC
FUN
B
C
G
ENT
SEF
27 UV
59 OV
81 UF/OF/RF
VA / VR
VB / VS
VC / VT
Figure 6-1. User Interface Panel
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
46
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1. Construction
Panel consists of eight sections as below;

Operation Section

Local Control Section

Menu Control Section

Other Control Section

Fault Indication Section

Voltage Elements Section

Reclosing Sequence Status Section

System Diagnostic Section

Battery Status Section

User Selected LED Section

Other Status Section
6.1.1. Operation Section
OPEN
Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.
CLOSE
Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser.
ETR300-R has a feature of Manual Close Time Delay. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of
0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the recloser. During the
manual close delay time, if the CLOSE push-button is pressed, it closes immediately without
waiting for the close delay time to be completed.
POSITION LED
Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.
Figure 6-2. Operation Section
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
47
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1.2. Local Control Section
All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the
control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is
DISABLE. The push-button toggles ENABLE/DISABLE.
Figure 6-3. Local Control Section
Protection Enabled
When the LED is illuminated, all protection elements(in case of Reclose mode) and fault indication
elements(in case of Sectionalizer mode) are enabled. The protection can be disabled by pressing the
“PROTECTION ENABLED” push button on the front panel.
NOTE : If “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, all protection elements and fault indcation
are operating, however, Ground fault and Sensitive Earth Fault Elements are
individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
48
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Ground Enabled
GROUND ENABLED LED is ON and OFF by pressing the “GROUND ENABLED” push-button.
When the “PROTECTION ENABLED” and “GROUND ENABLED” LEDs are both ON, ground
overcurrent protection element(in case of Reclose mode) and ground fault indication element(in
case of Sectionalizer mode) operate. However, even if the “GROUND ENABLED” is ON and the
“PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, ground fault elements do not operate. If the
“GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, ground fault
elements do not operate.
When “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time. Also,
when “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON.
SEF Enabled
SEF Enabled LED is ON and OFF by pressing “SEF ENABLED” push-button. When the
“PROTECTION ENABLED” and “SEF ENABLED” LEDs are both ON. Sensitive earth fault
elements operate. However, even if the “SEF ENABLED” is ON and the “PROTECTION
ENABLED” LED is OFF, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate. If the “SEF ENABLED” is
OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate.
When “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON. Also, when “GROUND
ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time.
Reclose Enabled
When the “RECLOSE ENABLED” LED is ON, the auto reclosing(79) element(in case of Reclose
mode) is enabled. The auto reclosing can be disabled by pressing the “RECLOSE ENABLED”
push-button at the front panel.
Control Locked
When the “CONTROL LOCKED” LED is on, all the functions in the operation section and Local
control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the “CONTROL LOCKED” pushbutton at the front panel.
NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Battery Load Test, Trip Test,
Lamp Test and menu control section can be normally operated.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
49
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Remote Enabled
When the “REMOTE ENABLED” LED is ON, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system)
are enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the “REMOTE ENABLED” push-button at the front
panel. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0, MODBUS,
IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and IEC61850, etc.
NOTE : When the “REMOTE ENABLED" LED is ON, depending on user’s request and
option, Push-Button controls on the front panel can be blocked except for
“GROUP SELECT” push-button, LAMP TEST and MENU Control Section.
Group Select
This button is used to change the setting group applied to ETR300-R.
The procedure of changing the active setting group using the "GROUP SELECT" push-button on
the front panel is as follows.

Use the "GROUP SELECT" push-button
to select the setting group you want to
apply.
Setting
group
is
cyclically
selected; GROUP1  GROUP2  …
 GROUP6  GROUP1.

While
controlling
the
GROUP SELECT MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
PRESS <GROUP>: NEXT
<ENT> : SET
<ESC> : ABORT
"GROUP
SELECT" push-button, the LCD display
will be like the “Figure 6-4. Group
Figure 6-4. Group Select Mode LCD Display
Select Mode LCD Display” and the
selected SET GROUP LED will flash.

FUN
At this time, if you press the [ENT] button, the selected setting group will be applied. The
flashing "SET GROUP" LED will light up.

ESC
ENT
If [ESC] button is pressed or if [ENT] button is not pressed for a long time, the setting group
before the "GROUP SELECT" push-button control will be returned.
NOTE : If ‘LOOP CONTROL’ function is activated, selected group is not changed to press
the [GROUP SELECT] button.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
50
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Loop Control Enabled
When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop control function is enabled. LED ON
Control is possible only under the conditions as mentioned in “Table 6-2. “LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions”.
Table 6-1. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions
Loop Control Setting
Recloser Status
Function
Type Select
ENABLE
SEC
CLOSE
ENABLE
MID
CLOSE
ENABLE
TIE
OPEN
Remark
Loop Control Auto Restore
When “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED is ON, auto restoration function is enabled. In
auto restoration function, “Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values
after the loop control operation.
LED ON Control of “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” is only possible when the "LOOP
CONTROL ENABLED" LED is ON in SEC and MID type.
Hot Line Tag
When “HOT LINE TAG” LED is ON, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.
When the "HOT LINE TAG" LED is ON, 1 shot lockout occurs on overcurrent fault even if the
auto reclosing function is activated/enabled. For overcurrent trip operation, T-C Curve set in
“MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / RECLOSER / HOTLINE TAG” menu is applied and
reclosing operation is blocked.
Battery Test
When “BATT’ TEST” push-button is pressed, battery load test is run.
On Test, Battery is disconnected from the
charge circuit and connected the battery with
load resistor and check the battery. Load resistor
shall be connected with AC supply.
[BATTERY TEST MODE]
BATTERY(V) :
CHARGER(V) :
BAT STATUS :
CHG STATUS :
24.00
26.00
OK
OK
1
2
3
4
5
6
LCD displays during Battery Load Testing.

BATTERY(V)
: Display the battery
Figure 6-5. Battery Test Mode LCD Display
voltage.
ESC
FUN
ENT
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
51
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

CHARGER(V) : Display the voltage of charge circuit.

BAT STATUS : Display battery status.

-
OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V
-
HIGH : When the battery voltage is over 28V
-
LOW : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V
-
NO BATT : When the battery voltage is below 15V
http://www.entecene.co.kr
CHG STATUS : Display charge circuit status.
-
OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29.5V
-
HIGH : When the charge circuit is over 29.5V
-
LOW : When the charge circuit is below 25V
Trip Test
By pressing this button, fault simulation is activated like 1500A of fault current flows on phase A,
B, C. Protection function is operated according on the setting.
Lamp Test/ FI Reset
Reset fault indication and run lamp test.
Auxiliary LED 1/2
Depending on user’s request, manufacturer sets a function on the LED. When the LED is on, the
function is operated.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
52
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1.3. Menu Control Section
ETR300-R has 20  8 LCD(Liquid Cristal Display) display.
LCD DISPLAY
8x20 Characters display
CONTROL KEYS
[▲] [▼] [◀] [▶]
Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting
value
[▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode
[◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode
[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode
[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level
[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input
NOTE
If control panel is awaken from sleep mode using [AWAKE] key, it must be set to “KEY”
or “BOTH” in setting menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE
/ PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method”.
ESC
1
2
3
4
5
6
FUN
ENT
Figure 6-6. Menu Control Section
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
53
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
[FUN] Key
Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is
also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display.
[ESC] Key
The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.
[ENT] Key
ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to
accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.
[◀] [▶] Key
Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when
you change display message.
[▲] [▼] Key
Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value
when you are in the data input mode.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
54
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1.4. Fault Indication Section
On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than pickup level.
TRIP TYPE

51 TOC : Shows Time Overcurrent Trip.

50 IOC : Shows Instantaneous Overcurrent trip

50 IOCL : Shows Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout
trip
FAULT INDICATION

A, B, C : Indicates a phase fault has occurred on one
of the phase lines

G (GROUND) : Indicates an ground fault has
occurred

SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on
Figure 6-7. Fault Indication Section
the neutral line
NOTE : Fault Indication LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be turned off by "FI
RESET" command.
6.1.5. Voltage Element Section
Indicates that voltage element is occurred.
27 UV
59 OV

27 UV : Shows Under Voltage elements

59 OV : Shows Over Voltage and Neutral Over Voltage
81 UF/OF/RF
elements

VA / VR
81 UF/OF/RF : Shows Under Frequency, Over
VB / VS
Frequency and Frequency Decay elements

under Synchro’ Check element.

VC / VT
25 SYNCHRONISM : Shows the close waiting status
Figure 6-8. Voltage Elements
VA/VR,VB/VR,VC/VT : Shows Open Pahse Status on
Section
each phase.
NOTE : 27UV, 59OV and 81UF/OF/RF LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be
turned off by "FI RESET" command.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
55
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1.6. Reclosing Sequence Status Section
Indicates the auto reclosing sequence procedure.

79 RESET : Sequence shows resetting

79 CYCLE : Sequence shows running

79 LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout
Figure 6-9. Sequence Status Section
6.1.7. System Diagnostic Section
Indicates Diagnostic status of ETR300-R.

RUN : Status of ETR300-R systems shows
normal

DIAG/ERROR : Status of ETR300-R
systems shows warning

RX : Shows the data receiving status for
remote communication.

Figure 6-10. System Diagnostic Section
TX : Shows the data transferring status for
remote communication.
NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal
6.1.8. Battery Status Section
Indicates the system power status of ETR300-R.
AC SUPPLY indicates ETR300-R has external power
source. CHARGER LED shows ETR300-R charging
status, BATTERY LED shows ETR300-R battery status.

AC SUPPLY : Satus of supplying the external AC
Figure 6-11. Battery Status Section
power.

CHARGER : If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status.

BATTERY : If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status.
NOTE : Battery voltage and charge circuit voltage are always monitored periodically.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
56
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1.9. User LED Section
Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed.
PLC logic is set in “ETR300-R ETIMS Interface
Software”.
Factory default setting is as follows.
Figure 6-12. User LED Section
Table 6-2. Default User LED Function
User LED
PLC Logic
Name
Descrpition
The LED is ON when the negative sequence overcurrent
ULED1
NEQ
ULED2
46 BC
ULED3
32 POWER
The LED is ON when the power fault trip is occurred.
ULED4
49 DEMAND
The LED is ON when the demand fault trip is occurred.
ULED5
MACHANISM LOCK
ULED6
CLOSE BLOCK
ULED7
OPEN BLOCK
ULED8
Not defined
fault is occurred.
The LED is ON when the broken conduct fault trip is
occurred.
The LED is ON when status of ETR300-R is machnism
lock.
The LED is ON when status of ETR300-R is close
block.
The LED is ON when status of ETR300-R is open
block.
The LED is not defined.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
57
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1.10. SetGroup Status Section
GROUP #
It displays the currently applied Set Group to ETR300-R.
Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT”
button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of
1
2
3
4
5
6
changing the set group locally.
Figure 6-13. Set Group Status
Section
6.1.11. Other Status Section
REVER POWER
When reverse current flows, REVERSE POWER LED
becomes On. Reverse power is determined by 3-phase
power factor.
Figure 6-14. Other Status Section
CLPU ON
In the Cold Load Duration, CLPU ON LED becomes On.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
58
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.2. LCD Display
20  8 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and
to check operation status clearly.
[ Initial Logo ]
[ Main Menu ]
FUN
ENT
RECLOSER CONTROL
ETR300-R
[MAIN MENU]
SELF CHECK [ NORMAL]
ACTIVE SET [ GROUP1]
52 CONTACT [ CLOSE]
>1.GLOBAL SETTING
>2.GROUP SETTING
ENTEC E&E CO., LTD.
>3.EVENT
CURRENT(A) / VOLT(KV)
>4.MAINTENANCE
IA: 00000 IB: 00000
IC: 00000 IN: 00000
SEF: 00.00
VA: 00.00 VR: 00.00
VB: 00.00 VS: 00.00
VC: 00.00 VT: 00.00
>5.TIME
>6.STATUS
LOOP CONTROL <NON>
>7.METERING
VS STATUS [
]
VL STATUS [
]
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE
[ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[GR1]
Figure 6-15. Initial Logo and Main Menu
6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree

Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu.

Initial screen and all menus are round robin algorithm.

Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu.

Main menu has 7 sub-menus.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
59
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
[MAIN MENU]
>1.GLOBAL SETTING
>1.GENERAL
>1.SYSTEM
>2.EVENT RECORDER
>1.POWER LINE
2.CURRENT SENSING
3.VOLTAGE SENSING
>3.MONITORING
>1.LIVE LINE
2.OPERATION COUNT
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.BATT LOAD TEST
5.BATT MANAGEMENT
6.POWER QUALITY
7.TD MONITOR
>4.LOOP CONTROL
>5.PASSCODE
>1.PASSCODE 1
2.PASSCODE 2
3.PASSCODE 3
>6.PLC
>7.DEVICE
>*.SAVE SETTINGS
>2.COMMUNICATION
>1.PROTOCOLS
>1.CONTROL TYPE
2.OPERATION TIME
3.H/W OPTION
4.GAS SENSOR
5.MANUAL CLOSE
6.LCD DISPLAY
7.PANEL SLEEP
>1.DNP3
>2.IEC60870-5
>3.MODBUS
4.IEC61850
5.SNTP
6.SNMP
7.ETIMS TCP
>2.PORTS
>3.DIALUP MODEM
>4.FTP-SSL
>1.CALLING STRING
2.CALLING NUMBER
3.INITIAL STRING
4.CONNECTION
>1.LOGIC TIMER
2.PULSE TIMER
3.PULSE COUNT
4.INPUT PORTS
5.OUTPUT PORTS
>1.DNP3 SLAVE 1
2.DNP3 SLAVE 2
3.COMMON
>1.IEC60870-5-101
2.IEC60870-5-104
3.COMMON
>1.PORT1(232)
2.PORT2(232)
3.PORT3(485/422)
4.PORT4(ETHERNET)
5.PORT5(ETHERNET)
>5.WIFI
>1.GROUP 1
>6.EVENT&ETC
>2.GROUP 2
>*.SAVE SETTINGS
>3.GROUP 3
>2.GROUP SETTING
>3.EVENT
>4.GROUP 4
>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM
5.SET CHANGE
6.LOAD&ENERGY/MIN
7.LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR
8.LOAD&ENERGY/DAY
9.DIGNOSTIC
10.PQM
11.LOAD CURR＇ ALARM
>12.CLEAR SEVED DATA
>4.MAINTENANCE
>5.GROUP 5
>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM
5.SET CHANGE
6.LOAD & ENERGY
7.DIGNOSTIC
8.PQM
9.PQM CYCLE
10.LOAD CURR＇ ALARM
11.ABOVE ALL
>1.COUNT
>2.INTERRUT TIME
3.CONTACT WEAR
>5.TIME
>4.DATA RESET
>6.STATUS
>7.METERING
>1.CURRENT
2.VOLTAGE
3.FREQUENCY
4.POWER
5.ENERGY
6.DEMAND
7.UNBALANCE
8.HARMONICS
9.TRUE R.M.S
10.TD
11.CONTROLLER REF
ⓐ
>1.RECLOSER
2.INPUT PORTS
3.OUTPUT PORTS
4.GOOSE S-IN
5.GOOSE D-IN
6.GOOSE OUT
7.FAULT
8.DIAGONOSTIC
>6.GROUP 6
>1.ETR300-R
2.FAULT
3.PQM
4.COMMUNICATION
5.USER COUNT
>1.ETR300-R COUNT
2.OPERATION COUNT
3.FAULT COUNT
4.PQM COUNT
5.COM’ COUNT
6.COUNT ALL
7.INTERRUT TIME
8.BATT. CAPACITY
9.CONTACT WEAR
10.ENERGY
11.MAX DEMAND
12.PEAK CURRENT
13.COMM BUFF
14.USER CONT
15.ABOVE ALL
*. NOTE ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETR300-R.
Figure 6-16. Menu Structure Tree (1/2)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
60
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
ⓐ
>1.RECLOSER
>1.AUTO RECLOSING
http://www.entecene.co.kr
>1.FUNCTION
>2.OPERATION
>3.INTERVALS
>2.TIME OC-PHA
>1.(+)PHASE FAST
2.(+)PAHSE DELAY
3.(-)PHASE FAST
4.(-)PAHSE DELAY
>3.TIME OC-GND
>4.TIME OC-NEQ
>1.(+)NEG SEQ FAST
2.(+)NEG SEQ DELAY
3.(-)NEG SEQ FAST
4.(-)NEG SEQ DELAY
>1.(+)INST OC-SEF
2.(-)INST OC-SEF
>1.(+)INST OC-NEQ
2.(-)INST OC-NEQ
>1.(+)INST OCL-PHA
2.(-)INST OCL-PHA
>9.INST OCL-PHA
>10.INST OCL-GND
>1.(+)INST OCL-GND
2.(-)INST OCL-GND
>1.(+)INST OCL-NEQ
2.(-)INST OCL-NEQ
>11.INST OCL-NEQ
>12.INRUSH RES＇/CLPU
>1.INRUSH RESTRAINT
>2.COLD LOAD PICKUP
>13.HARMONIC BLOCK
>14.DIRECTION
>15.BROKEN CONDUCT
>1.2ND BLOCKING
2.5TH BLOCKING
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ＇
>16.VOLTAGE
>17.FREQUENCY
>1.UNDER FREQUENCY1
2.UNDER FREQUENCY2
3.OVER FREQUENCY1
4.OVER FREQUENCY2
5.FREQUENCY DECAY
6.AUTO RESTORATION
>18.POWER
>19.DEMAND
>20.HOTLINE TAG
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.NEG SEQ＇
4.ACTIVE POWER
5.REACTIVE POWER
>21.USER CURVE
>22.OTHERS
>2.SECTIONALIZER
>1.(+)GROUND FAST
2.(+)GROUND DELAY
3.(-)GROUND FAST
4.(-)GROUND DELAY
>1.(+)INST OC-GND
2.(-)INST OC-GND
>7.INST OC-SEF
>8.INST OC-NEQ
>1.PHASE/NEG SEQ＇
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.OTHERS
>1.(+)INST OC-PHA
2.(-)INST OC-PHA
>5.INST OC-PHA
>6.INST OC-GND
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ＇
>1.PICKUP CURRENT
2.INRUSH DURATION T
4.AUTO SECTION
>3.MONITORING
>*.SAVE SETTINGS
>1.FUNCTION
2.PICKUP CURRENT
3.RESTORE MIN. TIME
4.INRUSH RES＇ RESET
5.PHASE CURVE
6.GROUND CURVE
7.NEG SEQ＇ CURVE
8.OTHERS
>1.UNDER VOLT1
2.UNDER VOLT2
3.UV RESTORATION
4.OVER VOLT1
5.OVER VOLT2
6.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT1
7.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT2
8.OV RESTORATION
>1.FUNCTION
2.FORWARD POWER
3.DIRECTION POWER
>1.USER CURVE 1
2.USER CURVE 2
3.USER CURVE 3
4.USER CURVE 4
>1.PHASE DIFFERENCE
2.SYNCHRO＇ CHEC
3.OPEN PHASE
4.LIVE LINE BLOCK
5.FAULT LOCATOR
6.LOAD CURR＇ ALARM
7.POWER FACTOR
*. NOTE ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETR300-R.
Figure 6-16. Menu Structure Tree (2/2)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
61
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting
SYSTEM
Set items related to power system and main body.
Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING and VOLTAGE SENSING.
EVENT RECORDER
Set items related to the format of event beind recoded and whether event is recorded.
MONITORING
Set items related to monitoring for power system and ETR300-R.
Consists of LIVE LINE, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY LOAD TEST,
BATTERY MANAGEMENT, POWER QUALITY, and TD MONITOR.
LOOP CONTROL
Set items related to loop control elements. This menu is only applied when “RECLOSER” type is
set in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE” menu.
PASSCODE
Set items related to passcode security.
Consists of PASSCODE1, PASSCODE2 and PASSCODE 3.
PASSCODE 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and
PASSCODE 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. PASSCODE 3 is applied when
clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.
PLC
Set items related to PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements.
Consists of LOGIC TIMER, PULSE TIMER, PULSE COUNT, INPUT PORTS and OUTPUT
PORTS.
DEVICE
Set items related to Controller ETR300-R.
Consists of CONTROL TYPE, OPERATION TIME, H/W OPTION, GAS SENSOR, MANUAL
CLOSE, LCD DISPLAY, PANEL SLEEP, TIME ZONE and OTHERS.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
62
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION
Set items related to communication elements.
Consists of PROTOCOLS, PORTS, DIALUP MODEM, FTP-SSL, WIFI and EVENT&ETC.
SAVE SETTING
Save all changed values in the menu.
6.2.3. GROUP Setting
This menu is divided into GROUP 1~ 6 for user’s convenient. Selected group circulatly changes
each time of pressing the [GROUP SELECT] button. Consists of GROUP 1~6 settings,
respectively. If ‘GROUP #’ LED is ON, ‘GROUP # SETTINGS’ settings are applied to ETR300R.
[GROUP SETTING]
>1.GROUP 1
2.GROUP 2
3.GROUP 3
4.GROUP 4
5.GROUT 5
6.GROUT 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 6-17. GROUP SELCT Button and GROUP Setting
ESC
FUN
The [GROUP SELECT] button is used to select a set group applied to present ETR300-R. Please
refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local
Control Section” for
ENT
procedure of changing the set group locally.
NOTE : If ‘LOOP CONTROL’ function is activated, selected group is not changed to press
the [GROUP SELEC] button.
All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into RECLOSER,
SECTIONALIZER and MONITORING sub menus.
When set to "RECLOSER" type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE
/ CONTROL TYPE”, only "RECLOSER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated
("SECTIONALIZER" menu is not operated).
When set to "SECTIONALIZER" type, only "SECTIONALIZER" and "MONITORING" menus
are operated ("RECLOSER" menu is not operated).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
63
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.2.4. Event
ERT300-R event information is shown in this menu.
Consists
of
OPERATION,
FAULT,
FAULT
CYCLE,
SYSTEM,
SET
CHANGE,
LOAD&ENERGY/MIN, LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR, LOAD&ENERGY/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC,
PQM, LOAD CURRENT ALARM and CLEAR SAVED DATA.
6.2.5. Maintenance
Shows about Event Maintenance items.

COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic.

INTERRUPT TIME : Cumulated time of Interruption occurred is displayed.

CONTACT WEAR : Shows damaged status of Interrupter.

DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset.

CONTROLLER INFO : Present ETR300-R information is displayed.

MECHNISM SCALE : Correction scale factor for main body sensor is displayd.
For more detail information, please refer to “10. MAINTENANCE” .
6.2.6. Time
Present time can be set and checked.
6.2.7. Status
Present status of recloser, fault, dignostic and Input/Output are displayed.
6.2.8. Metering
Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see “13. METERING”)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
64
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.3. Using the LCD Menu
6.3.1. Initial Screen
Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in ETR300-R.
① To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button.
② Press [FUN] button in initial screen to move to Main menu.
③ “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY”
Through “Init Main Screen” in the MENU, main initial screen can be selected. After initial
booting or clearing SLEEP MODE, this intial Screen can be displayed.
Table 6-3. Initial Screen (1/5)
INITIAL SCREEN
RECLOSER CONTROL
ETR300-R
SELF CHECK [ NORMAL]
ACTIVE SET [ GROUP1]
52 CONTACT [ CLOSE]
ENTEC E&E CO., LTD.
Initial Screen 1
This screen displays status information of ETR300-R
SELF CHECK: It displays self diagnostic information of ETR300-R.
 NORMAL: It displays normal status of ETR300-R
 ALARM: It displays self diagnostic alarm of ETR300-R.
 ERROR: It displays self diagnostic error of ETR300-R. In this status,
ETR300-R is in significantly abnormal satus so, ETR300-R blocks to
Open/Close recloser.
NOTE :
If “ALARM” and “ERROR” in the self check, ETR300-R is in abnormal
condition. Immediately stop operation and contact Manufacturer.
ACTIVE SET: It displays the currently applied SET GROUP in ETR300-R.
52 CONTACT: It displays the status of recloser’s main contact
 CLOSE: Displays main contact is closed.
 OPEN: Displays main contact is opened.
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable
connection is not completed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
65
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 6-3. Initial Screen (2/5)
INITIAL SCREEN
CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV)
Initial Screen 2
IA: 00000 IB: 00000
IC: 00000 IN: 00000
SEF: 00.00
VA: 00.00 VR: 00.00
VB: 00.00 VS: 00.00
VC: 00.00 VT: 00.00
This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.
CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV)
Initial Screen 3
IA: 00000 IB: 00000
IC: 00000 IN: 00000
SEF: 00.00
AB: 00.00 RS: 00.00
BC: 00.00 ST: 00.00
CA: 00.00 TR: 00.00
This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.
GPS/IRIG MODULE
STATUS[ NOT INSTALL]
G01/01/2017 00:00:00
L01/01/2017 00:00:00
<-:
-D -M
-S>
<-:
-D -M
-S>
 Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].
 Each phase voltage value is displayed (A,B,C,R,S,T) [kV].
 Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].
 Each phase-to-phase voltage value is displayed (AB,BC,CA,RS,ST,TR) [kV].
Initial Screen 4
This screen displays IRIG/GPS related with time synchronization.
STATUS: This screen displays time synchronization information.
 LINK SUCCESS: Time synchronization device is well installed.
GPS/IRIG MODULE
STATUS[ NOT INSTALL]
G01/01/2017 00:00:00
L01/01/2017 00:00:00
<
ⓐ
>
<
ⓑ
>
 LINK FAIL: The connection of time synchronization is not normal.
 NOT INSTALL: Time synchronization device is not installed.
G: This screen displays UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
L: This screen displays Local Time.
ⓐ This screen displays latitude received from time synchronization device.
(N: North, S: South).
ⓑ This screen displays longtitude received from time synchronization device.
(E: East, W: West).
*. NOTE) If time synchronization device is not installed or at link fail,
local Information (latitude, longtitude) is not displayed.
CONTROLLER INFO
MPU: V1.0.0.0
DSP: V1.0.0.0
CPU: V1.0.0.0
HMI: V1.0.0.0
XML: ST00-1.00
OS : #001 2017-01-01
Initial Screen 5
This screen displays the version of ETR300-R.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
66
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 6-3. Initial Screen (3/5)
INITIAL SCREEN
RECLOSER STATUS
RECLOSE FUN[ ENABLE]
SEQUENCE NO[
0]
SEQUENCE ST[ RESET]
RECLOSER ST[ CLOSE]
CYCLE RESET[
]
AT REST’ CL[
]
Initial Screen 6
This screen displays auto reclosing function. It can only display when control
type setting is “RECLOSER”.
RECLOSE FUN : It display auto reclosing function status.
 ENABLE : When function is enabled.
 DISABLE : f When function is disabled.
 - : Since control type is selected as sectinalizer, auto reclosing function is
not activated.
SEQUNCE NO: Number of reclosing operation (0~4) is displayed.
SEQUNCE ST: It is showing reclosing sequence process status.
 RESET : It displays 79 Reset.
 CYCLE : It displays 79 Cycle. It means reclosing running state.
 LOCKOUT : It displays 79 Lockout.
RECLOSER ST: Circuit Breaker Open/Close Status is displayed.
 CLOSE: Displays recloser is closed.
 OPEN: Displays recloser is opened.
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable
connection is not completed.
CYCLE RESET: When fault is clear during 79 Cycle, it is under auto reset
status.
 RUNNING: After clearing fault current, reset timer is running to make
auto reset.
AT RESET CL: After fault caused by Volage and frequency auto restation
function, AT RESET CL indicates status for auto closing.
 RUNNING: After fault, when line returns to normal status, restartion timer
is running to make auto closing.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
67
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 6-3. Initial Screen (4/5)
INITIAL SCREEN
LOOP CONTROL <SEC>
Initial Screen 7
VS STATUS [LIVELINE]
VL STATUS [LIVELINE]
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE
[ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[P-1]
This screen displays loop control function. It can be only available when
control type is as “RECLOSER”.
ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.
LOOP CONTROL <ⓐ>

SEC : Sectionalizing Recloser
VS STATUS [LIVELINE]
VL STATUS [LIVELINE]
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE
[ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[ⓑ-ⓒ]

MID : Midpiont Recloser

TIE : Tiepoint Recloser

NON : None Selected

- : Since control type is selected as sectinalizer, auto loop control function
is not activated.
VS STATUS: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
VL STATUS: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
VS LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to
the dead line of source side

RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.
VL LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to
the dead line of load side.

RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.
AUTO RESTORE : Displays auto restoring status after loop control
operation. It is only available when SEC and MID status.

RUNNING : After returning to live line, timmer is running for automatic
reset.
S-CNG : When loop control is operating, it can display the possibility of auto
set group change. It is only available when MID and TIE status.
S-GR : It indicats the currently applied set group.
ⓑ It indicates that when currently applied set group as primary(P) or
alternate(A) setting.
ⓒ It indicats the currently applied set group.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
68
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 6-3. Initial Screen (5/5)
INITIAL SCREEN
AUTO SECTIONALIZER
Initial Screen 8
SECTION FUN[
SEC]
OPERATE ST [ RESET]
SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L]
LOAD
VOLT[ LIVE-L]
O-COUNT SET[
4]
O-COUNT NO.[
0]
This screen displays auto section function. It can be only available when
control type is as “SECTIONALIZER”.
SECTION FUN : It indicates auto section function as below.
 DISABLE : Auto secontion function does not operate.
 SEC : It operates as Auto Sectionalizer.
 TIE : It operates as Tiepoint Switch.
OPERATE ST: Displays the present operating status.
 RESET : Reset status
 RUNNING : Operation counter is increasing.
 LOCKOUT : When at “SEC”, it displays. When operation coutner is up to
maximum setting, recloesr will be at open operating.
 CLOSING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for close operation order.
 OPENING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for opening operation
order
SOURCE VOLT: Displays the status of of source side voltage(LIVE or
DEAD LINE)
LOAD VOLT: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
O-COUNT SET : Displays the set operate count
O-COUNT NO. : Displays the present operate count
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
69
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.3.2. Main Menu
In the initial screen, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC]
button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below.
MAIN MENU
[MAIN MENU]
>1.GLOBAL SETTING
2.GROUP SETTING
3.EVENT
4.MAINTENANCE
5.TIME
6.STATUS
7.METERING
Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menus.
You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key.
Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.
6.3.3. Setting Example
Step to change Phase Pickup current of Recloser menu in Group1~6 setting.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ TIME OC-PHA/
(+)PHASE FAST/ PICKUP”.
A following screen is displayed.
MAIN MENU/ GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ TIME OC-PHA/ (+)PHASE FAST/ PICKUP
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Function:
TRIP
>Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[10~1600:1A]
Range
10 ~ 1600A
Default 500A
Step
1A
Phase pickup current. This value is primary current.
Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio.
(Primary current) = (Secondary current) × (CT ratio)
As above example screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into
value column.
Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value.
Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value.
NOTE : You must save all changed values at ”Setting Save” menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
70
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.3.4. Setting Save
To save all changed values, steps are as follows;
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ *. SAVE SETTING” and follow each
step as below(“Global Setting / General”, “Global Setting / Communiction” and “Group Setting”
menu have “*.Setting Save” menu).
MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SAVE SETTING
①
SETTING CHANGED
PRESS <ENT>
TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)
① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button.
② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct, ③
screen appears; otherwise ② screen appears again.
②
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and
ENTER PASSCODE 1
0000
Group Settings, and Passcode 2 is applied when communication
setting is changed.
③
③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③ screen is displayed for
[SAVE SETTING]
short period.
* SUCCESS *
④
If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE SETTING”, then,
* NOTHING CHANGED *
screen ④ is displayed.
If you do not want to save changed setting value, please go to ① screen
⑤
SETTING CHANGED
PRESS <ENT>
TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)
through [▲] [▼] button and to ⑤ screen [ENT] button.
NOTE :
Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved.
If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is
remained.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
71
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7. GLOBAL SETTING
Place the curser in “GLOBAL SETTING”, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL
SETTING. This menu consists of “GENERAL” menu and “COMMUNICATION” menu.
[GLOBAL SETTING]
>1.GENERAL
2.COMMUNICATION
7.1. General Setting
This menu is to set general setting required to operate recloser’s controller ETR300-R, and Submenu consists of below picture.
[GENERAL]
>1.SYSTEM
2.EVENT RECODER
3.MONITERING
4.LOOP CONTROL
5.PASSCODE
6.PLC
7.DEVICE
*.SAVE SETTING
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
72
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.1. System
Place the curser on “SYSTEM” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below.
[SYSTEM]
>1.POWER LINE
2.CURRENT SENSING
3.VOLTAGE SENSING
CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is
requested.
7.1.1.1. Power Line
Place a cursor on “POWER LINE” in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this
menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / System Frequency
[POWER LINE]
>System Frequency:60
Ref.Voltage: PHA-A
Phase Rotation: ABC
Range
50, 60 ㎐
Default 60
Step
~
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a
default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.
[50~60Hz:10Hz]
It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec.
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to
the option type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
73
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Reference Voltage
Range
[POWER LINE]
>Frequency:
60
>Ref.Voltage: PHA-A
Phase Rotation: ABC
PHA-A, PHA-B, PHA-C, NONE
Default PHA-A
Step
~
Reference voltage set. Beside of Hard wire connection, phase
connection shall be adjusted by software as well.
[A/B/C/NONE]
NOTE : Depending on settings of 'Reference voltage’, ‘Phase
Rotation’ and ‘Source Side’ bushing connection is changed.
Please refer to “Table 7-1. Phase Connection & Display
Mapping Table” for each bushing’s connection, each setting
method.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation
Range
[POWER LINE]
>Frequency:
60
>Ref.Voltage: PHA-A
>Phase Rotation: ABC
ABC, ACB
Default ABC
Step
~
Select the phase rotation of the power system.
[ABC/ACB]
Install Direction
Line Feeding Case :
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
Install Case: Normal Installed
(Source Side: 1V)
Install Case: Reverse Installed
(Source Side: 2V)
Source Side
T
B
A
IB
IA
S
R
-
-
IC
T
C
IC
c
b
a
C
b
a
c
+
a
c
b
S
R
b
c
a
IB
IA
c
a
b
B
A
+
a
b
c
Load
Side
Figure 7-1. Phase Connection
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
74
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 7-1. Phase Connection & Display Mapping Table
Line feeding
Recommend Setting
Bushing Terminal
Ref.
Phase
Source
LCD/INDEX Display :
Bushing/Controller
Voltage
Rotation
Side*
Source V(Load V) / Current
Terminal
A
ABC
1V
Va(Vr)/Ia
A(R)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
C(T)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
B(S)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
A(R)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
C(T)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
B(S)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
A(R)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
B(S)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
B(S)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
C(T)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
C(T)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
A(R)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
R(A)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
T(C)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
S(B)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
R(A)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
T(C)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
S(B)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
R(A)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
S(B)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
S(B)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
T(C)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
T(C)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
R(A)/IA
Case 1 :
abc
Phase Mapping Result
ABC
Case 2 :
cab
B
ABC
Case 3 :
bca
C
ABC
Case 4 :
acb
A
ACB
ABC
Case 5 :
bac
B
ABC
Case 6 :
cba
C
ABC
Case 7 :
abc
A
ABC
RST
Case 8 :
cab
B
RST
Case 9 :
bca
C
RST
Case 10 :
acb
A
RST
Case 11 :
bac
B
RST
Case 12 :
cba
RST
C
ACB
2V
*. NOTE ) Setting value for ‘Source Side’ is available from “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /
SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING” in the menu.
Table 7-2. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
75
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.1.2. Current Sensing
Place a cursor in “CURRENT SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection and fault indication features that have
settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and
sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents
(Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current.
In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary
conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the
ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive
earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered.
For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see “14.8. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram”).
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio
[CURRENT SENSING]
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’:
FOR
GND CT Pol’:
FOR
Range
1 ~ 2000
Default 1000
Step
1
Set phase CT ratio.
[1~2000:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio
[CURRENT SENSING]
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’:
FOR
GND CT Pol’:
FOR
Range
1 ~ 2000
Default 1000
Step
1
Set ground CT ratio.
[1~2000:1]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio
[CURRENT SENSING]
PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’:
FOR
GND CT Pol’
FOR
Range
0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0
Default 1000.0
Step
0.1
Set sensitive earth CT ratio.
[0(OFF),0.1~1000.0]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
76
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity
[CURRENT SENSING]
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Polar’: FOR
>GND CT Polar’: FOR
Range
Forward, Reverse
Default Forward
Step
~
Set phase CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Polarity
[CURRENT SENSING]
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’:
FOR
>GND CT Pol’:
FOR
Range
Forward, Reverse
Default Forward
Step
~
Set Ground CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity
[CURRENT SENSING]
>GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’:
FOR
>GND CT Pol’:
FOR
>SEF CT Pol’:
FOR
Range
Forward, Reverse
Default Forward
Step
~
Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]
7.1.1.3. Voltage Sensing
Place a curser in “VOLTAGE SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
ETR300-R has two voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load side
line voltages. With Line VTs installed, ETR300-R can be used to perform voltage measurements,
power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements and so on.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>1V CON-Type:
WYE
1V Rated(P-P):22.86
1V Ratio:
3300.0
2V CON-Type:
WYE
2V Rated(P-N):22.86
[NONE/WYE/DELTA]
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA
Default WYE
Step
~
Select the voltage type of system that input to Source Voltage
Connector(1V) .
 NONE : VT non installed. Select NON
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
77
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Rated(P-P)
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>1V CON-Type:
WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86
1V Ratio:
3300.0
2V CON-Type:
WYE
2V Rated(P-P):22.86
[3.00~38.00:0.01kV]
3.00~38.00kV
Range
Default 22.86
Step
0.01kV
Enter the primary rated voltage(kV) of potential transformer for
Source Voltage Connector(1V).
This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage(phaseto-phase).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio
10.0~6500.0
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>1V CON-Type:
WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86
>1V Ratio:
3300.0
2V CON-Type:
WYE
2V Rated(P-P):22.86
Range
[10.0~6500.0:0.01]
Connector(1V).
Default 3300.0
Step
0.01
Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Source Voltage
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>1V CON-Type:
WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86
>1V Ratio:
3300.0
2V CON-Type:
WYE
>2V Rated(P-N):22.86
[NONE/WYE/DELTA]
NONE, WYE, DELTA
Range
Default WYE
Step
~
Select the voltage type of system that input to Load Voltage
Connector(2V) .
 NONE : VT non installed. Select NON
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Rated(P-P)
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>1V CON-Type:
WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86
>1V Ratio:
3300.0
>2V CON-Type:
WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
[10.0~6500.0:0.01]
3.00~38.00kV
Range
Default 22.86
Step
0.01kV
Enter the primary rated voltage(kV) of potential transformer for Load
Voltage Connector(2V).
This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage(phaseto-phase).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
78
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio
10.0~6500.0
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86
>1V Ratio:
3300.0
>2V CON-Type:
WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
>2V Ratio:
3300.0
Range
[10.0~6500.0:0.01]
Connector(2V).
Default 3300.0
Step
0.01
Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Load Voltage
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Installation Type
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>2V CON-Type:
WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
>2V Ratio:
3300.0
>2V Instal Type: 3P
Source Side:
1V
[3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-T]
Range
3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T
Default 3P
Step
~
Insert the type of load side sensing voltage for the recloser body unit.
3P : The voltage sensor is installed in each of the three phases
1P-R : The voltage sensor is installed only in the R phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-S : The voltage sensor is installed only in the S phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-T : The voltage sensor is installed only in the T phase of the
recloser body unit.
NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to
only one phase or none of the phase, following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.

Phase Difference

Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection – PQM

Voltage Unbalance Detection – PQM

Under and Over Voltage Detection – PQM

Loop Control

Directional Control

Under and Over Voltage Protection

Live Line Detection

Phase Open/Loss Detection

Open Phase

Live Load Blocking
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
79
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side
[VOLTAGE SENSING]
>2V CON-Type:
WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
>2V Ratio:
3300.0
>2V Instal Type: 3P
>Source Side:
1V
[1V/2V]
Range
1V, 2V
Default 1V
Step
~
Select the Source side of System.
1V : It is selected when Source Voltage Connector(1V) is connected
with the Source side of System..
2V : It is selected when Load Voltage Connector(2V) is connected with
the opposite Source side of System.
According to the selected value, the indication of “MAIN MENU/
METERING/ VOLTAGE” change. In the VOLTAGE screen, ABC
indicates the Source Side, and RST indicates the Load Side.
7.1.1.4. Event Recorder
Place the curser on “EVENT RECORDER” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. Waveform, Event Recorder and its related elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Recorder
ON, OFF
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Wave Recorder:
ON
>Wave S/R:
64
Wave Pre-Cycle:
5
Wave P/S:
P(1ST)
L&E Record:
ON
Range
[OFF/ON]
When this setting is OFF, fault cycle will not register any information.
Default ON
Step
~
Set whether to use wave recorder function.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R:
64
Wave Pre-Cycle:
5
Wave P/S:
P(1ST)
L&E Record:
ON
[16/32/64]
Range
16, 32, 64sample
Default 64 sample
Step
~
Select a number of sampling for wave capture.
Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection. For
example, Captured wave cycle is 60 cycles if 64 sampling is applied.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
80
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R:
64
>Wave Pre-Cycle:
5
Wave P/S:
P(1ST)
L&E Record:
ON
[1~20:1cycle]
Range
1 ~ 20 cycle
Default 5
Step
1 cycle
Pre-cycle is to record(capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger
occurring. Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For
instance, if pre-cycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 64, 5
cycle si applied, the sampling number is 32, pre-cycle is 10, 16 case, 20
pre-cycle is applied.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave P/S
[EVENT RECORDER]
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R:
64
>Wave Pre-Cycle:
5
>Wave P/S:
P(1ST)
L&E Record:
ON
[P(1ST)/S(2ND)]
Range
P(1ST), S(2ND)
Default P(1ST)
Step
~
Select if analog data value is primary data or secondary data recorded
on Wave cycle. Record the current and voltage data applied to setting
value ETR300-R on secondary side (the CT ratio and VT ratio divided
by the primary side data).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Record
[EVENT RECORDER]
>L&E Record:
OFF
L&E Interval:
15
COMFEDE Record: OFF
COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Set wherther Load&Energy event is recorded or not.
[OFF/ON]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Interval
[EVENT RECORDER]
>L&E Record:
OFF
>L&E Interval:
15
COMFEDE Record: OFF
COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
Range
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60
Default 15
Step
~
Set the interval to record Load&Energy events.
[5/10/15/20/30/60]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
81
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMFEDE Record
[EVENT RECORDER]
>L&E Record:
OFF
>L&E Interval:
15
>COMFEDE Record: OFF
COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
[OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
When occurring event, configure if it will be saved on COMFEDE
format (COMmon Format for Event Data Exchange) format file of
ETR300-R.
COMFEDE file recorded in ETR300-R can be downloaded by file
transfer protocol function. For details, refer to “17.3. COMFEDE”.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Record
[EVENT RECORDER]
>L&E Record:
OFF
>L&E Interval:
15
>COMFEDE Record: OFF
>COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
[OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
In case of occuring a fault, set COMTRADE (COMmon Format for
Transient Data Exchange) format file in ETR300-R.
The COMTRADE file recorded in ETR300-R can be downloaded by
the file transfer protocol function. For details, refer to “17.4.
COMTRADE”.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rev.
[EVENT RECORDER]
>L&E Record:
OFF
>L&E Interval:
15
>COMFEDE Record: OFF
>COMTRADE Record:OFF
>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
Range
1999, 2013
Default 1999
Step
~
Select version of COMTRADE file.
[1999/2013]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE P/S
P(1ST), S(2ND)
[EVENT RECORDER]
>COMFEDE Record: OFF
>COMTRADE Record:OFF
>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
>COMTRADE Rate:
1
Range
[P(1ST)/S(2ND)]
is primary or secondary data.
Default P(1ST)
Step
~
Select whether the analog data value recorded in the COMTRADE file
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
82
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rate
1 ~ 10
[EVENT RECORDER]
>COMFEDE Record: OFF
>COMTRADE Record:OFF
>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
>COMTRADE Rate:
1
Range
[1~10:1]
Record the value divided by the analog data into the COMTRADE file.
Default 1
Step
1
Sets the rate of the analog data value recorded to the COMTRADE file.
7.1.2. Monitoring
Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[MONITERING]
>1.LIVE LINE
2.OPERATION COUNT
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.BATT LOAD TEST
5.BATT MANAGEMENT
6.POWER QUALITY
7.TD MONITOR
7.1.2.1. Live Line
Place the curser on “LIVE LINE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
ETR300-R has Line line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintais over live
detec level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as
below.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv
[LIVE LINE]
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
Live Line Tm: 4.00
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default 0.30
Step
0.01 xVT
Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating.
[0.10~1.40:0.01xVT]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
83
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv
[LIVE LINE]
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
>Live Line Tm: 4.00
0.00~600.00 sec
Range
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the delay time of live detec element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
7.1.2.2. Operation Count
Place the curser on “OPERATION COUN” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Recloser operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function
[OPERATION COUNT]
>Function:
DISABLE
Alarm Count: 10000
Reset Count:
0
[DISABLE, ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default
DISABLE
~
Step
Select whether to use Recloser operation count monitoring.
If function is activated and operation counter is over “Alarm Count”,
Logic bit DIGOPRC(Diagnostic Operation Count) is set. Logic bit can
be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.
Function
ON
Alarm Count
Set_Val
Operation Count
_
AND
+
DIGOPRC
Figure 7-2. DIGOPRC Diagram
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Alarm Count
[OPERATION COUNT]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Alarm Count: 10000
Reset Count:
0
Range
1 ~ 20000
Default 10000
Step
1
Set a number to alarm when Recloser operation number meets this set.
[1~20000:1]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
84
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Reset Count
[OPERATION COUNT]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Alarm Count: 10000
>Reset Count:
0
[0~10000:1]
Range
0 ~ 10000
Default 0
Step
1
It is to set the same operation number of circuit breaker. Set value is
available after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to “MAIN
MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ OPERATION COUNT or
COUNT ALL” menu.
NOTE :
1. When entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET”
menu to reset operation count, password 3 authentication is
required
2. The current operation count can be checked in the “MENU/
MAINENANCE/ COUNT/ ETR300-R” menu.
7.1.2.3. Contact Wear
Place the curser on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Recloser contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Function:
DISABLE
Alarm Pickup: 20.0
Time Delay:
0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use Recloser contact wear monitoring.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup(%)
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0
Time Delay:
0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Range
[0.0~50.0:0.1%]
value.
0.0 ~ 50.0 %
Default 20.0
Step
0.1 %
Set a pickup value to alarm when recloser contact wear reaches set
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
85
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Time Delay
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0
>Time Delay:
0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Range
0.00 ~ 1.00 sec
Default 1.0
Step
0.1 sec
Set time delay when recloser contact wear reaches set value.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I1
1.00~600.00 kA
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0
>Time Delay:
0.01
>Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Range
[1.00~600.00:0.01kA]
operation number at the point 1(maximum operation number).
Default 1
Step
0.01 kA
To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct1
1~60000
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0
>Time Delay:
0.01
>Interrupt I1: 1.00
>Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Range
[1~60000:1]
operation number at the point 2(manimum operation number).
Default 10000
Step
0.01kA
To set interruption current of the curve for interruption current to
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I2
1.00~600.00 kA
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2:
16
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00
>C Wear Set: 100.00
Range
[1.00~600.00:0.01kA]
operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).
Default 20.00
Step
0.01kA
To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct 2
1~60000
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2:
16
A Wear Set: 100.00
B Wear Set: 100.00
C Wear Set: 100.00
Range
[1~20000:1]
operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).
Default 16
Step
1
To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
86
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2:
16
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00
>C Wear Set: 100.00
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
0.01%
It is to set Circuit breaker phase A contact wear value in ETR300-R.
Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers
to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ CONTACT
WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2:
16
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00
C Wear Set: 100.00
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
0.01%
It is to set Circuit breaker phase B contact wear value in ETR300-R.
Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers
to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ CONTACT
WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set
[CONTACT WEAR]
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2:
16
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00
>C Wear Set: 100.00
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
0.01%
It is to set Circuit breaker phase C contact wear value in ETR300-R.
Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers
to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ CONTACT
WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.
NOTE :
1.
2.
Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA
RESET” menu to reset “Phase A Contact Wear”, “Phase B Contact Wear” and “Phase C
Contact Wear”.
Current contact wear of each phase can be checked in “MENU/ MAINENANCE/
CONTACT WEAR” menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
87
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.2.4. Auto Battery Load Test
Place the curser on “BATT LOAD TEST” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT LOAD TEST / Period
[BATT LOAD TEST]
>Period:
24
0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour
Range
Default 24
Step
1 hour
Set a time period for automatic battery load test.
[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]
7.1.2.5. Battery Management
Place the curser on “BATT MANAGEMENT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
The ETR300-R has a battery management function that calculates and manages the battery capacity
using the charge time and discharge time of the set battery. However, for correct battery capacity
calculation, charge time and discharge time should be set for the installed battery.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Function
[BATT MANAGEMENT]
>Function:
DISABLE
Charge Time:
780
Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00
[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether to monitor battery capacity.
If set to ENABLE, if the battery capacity is less than the "Alarm Level"
setting value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)" event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Charge Time
[BATT MANAGEMENT]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Charge Time:
780
Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00
Range
[60~6000:1 m]
charged.
60 ~ 6000 min.
Default 780
Step
1 min.
Sets the time at which the fully discharged battery (0%) will be fully
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
88
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Discharge Time
[BATT MANAGEMENT]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Charge Time:
780
>Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00
Range
60 ~ 6000 min.
Default 1440
Step
1 min.
Sets the time when the fully charged battery (100%) is fully discharged.
[60~6000:1 m]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level
[BATT MANAGEMENT]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Charge Time:
780
Discharge Time:1440
>Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 50
Step
0.01 %
Set the battery monitoring level.
If battery capacity is less than this set value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)"
event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
[BATT MANAGEMENT]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Charge Time:
780
Discharge Time:1440
>Alarm Level: 50.00
>Capacity Rst:100.00
Range
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
After this setting, it can reset battery capacity using “MAIN MENU /
Default 100
Step
0.01 %
Set the battery capacity reset value.
MAINENANCE / DATA RESET / BATT. CAPACITY or COUNT
ALL”.
When the battery is replaced, it should be reset to the capacity for the
replaced battery according to the above procedure.
NOTE :
1. Password 3 authentication is required when entering
“MENU / MAINENANCE / DATA RESET” menu to reset
the battery capacity.
2. Current battery capacity can be checked in “MENU /
METERING / CONTROLLERL REF” menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
89
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.2.6. Power Quality Monitoring
Place the curser on “PQM” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.
[PQM]
>1.PQM FUNCTION
2.INTERRUPT
3.SAG
4.SWELL
5.HARMONICS
6.CURR UNBALANCE
7.VOLT UNBALANCE
8.UNDER VOLTAGE
9.OVER VOLTAGE
10.UNDER FREQUENCY
11.OVER FREQUENCY
12.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT
The ETR300-R provides voltage and current measurement signals at a rate of 64 samples / cycle pe
r cycle, providing instantaneous voltage drop (Sag), instantaneous voltage swell, interrupt, undervo
ltage, overvoltage, And power quality monitoring functions such as voltage / current imbalance.
The power quality for power grid is classified into several categories according to the voltage
magnitude and duration according to the international standard IEEE 1159 "Recommended Practice
on Monitoring Electric Power Quality". The power quality categories are listed in “Figure 7-3.
Power Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)” and “Table 7-3. Power
Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)”.
When the power quality monitoring element occurs, record the PQM event, PQM waveform and
PQM counter. In addition, when the related communication point is used, the occurrence event can
be transmitted to the master station through the remote communication.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
90
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
Transient
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Short duration
Instant
Long duration
Temporary
Moment
Over voltage
Swell
1.1 pu
Normal Range
1.0 pu
0.9 pu
Sag
Under voltage
0.1 pu
Interruption
30cycle
3sec
0.5cycle
1min
Figure 7-3. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)
Table 7-3. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)
Category
Time
Voltage Value
Sag
0.5 ~ 30 Cycle
0.1~0.9 xVT of rating
Swell
0.5 ~ 30 Cycle
1.1~1.8 xVT of rating
Interruption
0.5 Cycle ~ 3 sec
Rated below 0.1 xVT
Sag
30 Cycle ~ 3 sec
Rated below 0.1~0.9 xVT
Swell
30 Cycle ~ 3 sec
Rated below 1.1~1.8 xVT
Interruption
3 sec ~ 1 min
Rated below 0.1 xVT
Sag
3 sec ~ 1 min
0.1~0.9 xVT of rating
Swell
3 sec ~ 1 min
1.1~1.8 xVT of rating
1 min 이상
Rated below 0.1 xVT
Short-term fluctuation
Instantaneous
Momentary
Temporary
Long-term fluctuation
Sustained Interruption
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
91
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
1)
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PQM Function
Place the curser on “PQM FUNCTION” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function
[PQM FUNCTION]
>Function:
DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use PQM function.
If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
2)
Interrupt
Place the curser on “INTERRUPT” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level
[INTERRUPT]
>Level:
OFF
>Time:
2.0
Range
0(OFF), 0.10~ 0.49 xVT
Default OFF
Step
0.01 xVT
It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality.
0(OFF),0.10~0.49xVT
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time
[INTERRUPT]
>Level:
OFF
>Time:
2.0
Range
0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
Default 2.0
Step
0.5 cycle
Set a interrupt detecting time.
[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
3)
Sag
Place the curser on “ SAG” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level
Range
[SAG]
>Level:
>Time:
OFF
2.0
0(OFF), 0.50~ 0.99 xVT
Default OFF
Step
0.01 xVT
Set a voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality.
0(OFF),0.50~0.99xVT
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
92
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Time
Range
[SAG]
>Level:
>Time:
OFF
2.0
0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
Default 2.0
Step
0.5 cycle
Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).
[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
4)
Swell
Place the curser on “SWELL” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level
[SWELL]
>Level:
>Time:
Range
OFF
2.0
0(OFF), 1.01~ 1.50 xVT
Default 0
Step
0.01 xVT
Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.
0(OFF),1.01~1.50xVT
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Time
[SWELL]
>Level:
>Time:
Range
OFF
2.0
0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
Default 2.0
Step
0.5 cycle
Set a time to detect voltage swell.
[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
5)
Harmonics
Place the curser on “HARMONIC” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup
[HARMONICS]
>VTHD Pickup:
OFF
>VTHD Delay:
1.00
>ITHD Pickup:
OFF
>ITHD Delay:
1.00
Range
0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
Default OFF
Step
0.1%
Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
93
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay
[HARMONICS]
>VTHD Pickup:
OFF
>VTHD Delay:
1.00
>ITHD Pickup:
OFF
>ITHD Delay:
1.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup
[HARMONICS]
>VTHD Pickup:
OFF
>VTHD Delay:
1.00
>ITHD Pickup:
OFF
>ITHD Delay:
1.00
Range
0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
Default OFF
Step
0.1%
Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay
[HARMONICS]
>VTHD Pickup:
OFF
>VTHD Delay:
1.00
>ITHD Pickup:
OFF
>ITHD Delay:
1.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
6)
Current Unbalance
Place the curser on “CURR UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Pickup
[CURR UNBALANCE]
>Pickup:
30.0
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
Default 30.0
Step
0.1 %
Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.
UI rate 
I2
 100
I1
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
94
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Time delay
[CURR UNBALANCE]
>Pickup:
30.0
>Time Delay:
4.00
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay of current unbalance.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
7)
Voltage Unbalance
Place the curser on “VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Pickup
[VOLT UNBALANCE]
>Pickup:
30.0
>Time Delay:
4.00
0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
Range
Default 30
Step
0.1 %
Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.
UVrate 
V2
 100
V1
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time delay
[VOLT UNBALANCE]
>Pickup:
30.0
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay of voltage unbalance.
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
95
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
8)
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Under Voltage
Place the curser on “UNDER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Pickup
[UNDER VOLTAGE]
>Pickup:
0.80
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT
Default 0.80
Step
0.01 xVT
Set pickup voltage level to detect for under voltage element of power
0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT
quality.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time
[UNDER VOLTAGE]
>Pickup:
0.00
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0.00 ~600.00 sec
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set detecting time for under voltage element of power quality.
[0.0~600.0:0.1s]
9)
Over Voltage
Place the curser on “OVER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Pickup
[OVER VOLTAGE]
>Pickup:
1.20
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT
Default 1.20
Step
0.01 xVT
Set pickup voltage level to detect for over voltage element of power
0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT
quality.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Time
[OVER VOLTAGE]
>Pickup:
1.20
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0.00 ~600.00 sec
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set detecting time for over voltage element of power quality.
[0.0~600.0:0.1s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
96
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10) Under Frequency
Place the curser on “UNDER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Pickup
[UNDER FREQUENCY]
>Pickup:
1.20
Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Default 59.50
Step
0.01 Hz
Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.
0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to
the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time Delay
[UNDER FREQUENCY]
Pickup:
1.20
>Time Delay:
4.00
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set an under frequency detecting time.
11) Over Frequency
Place the curser on “OVER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Level
[OVER FREQUENCY]
>Pickup:
60.50
Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Default 60.50
Step
0.01 Hz
Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.
0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to
the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Time Delay
[UNDER FREQUENCY]
Pickup:
60.50
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set an under frequency detecting time.
[0.03~10.00:0.01s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
97
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12) Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit
Place the cursor on “ITHD/UBI I LIMIT” menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit Current
[ITHD/UBI I LIMIT]
>Limit Current:
60
Range
0 ~ 630 A
Default 60
Step
1A
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element
[0~630:1A]
and current harmonic distortion element.
If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current
THD status point does not maked.
7.1.2.7. TD Monitor
Place the curser on “TD MONITOR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. It is to set Transducer to monitor DC Analog input.
NOTE :
This menu is applicable only when a transducer (TD) input port and an external tranducer
input port are installed.
In the case of OFF on ‘EXT. I/O Use’ and ‘TD Input use” of “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL
SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION”, TD Monitor function of this menu does
not work.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Rate
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1 Rate:
40
>TD1 Ratio:
1
TD1 Offset:
+0
TD1-1 Type:
UNDER
>TD1-1 PU:
OFF
Range
1 ~ 200
Default 40
Step
1
Set Transducer 1(TD1) monitoring range.
[1~200:1]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Ratio
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1 Rate:
40
>TD1 Ratio:
1
TD1 Offset:
+0
TD1-1 Type:
UNDER
>TD1-1 PU:
OFF
[1~3000:1]
Range
1 ~ 3000
Default 1
Step
1
Set the ratio of transducer 1(TD1) input channel.
The TD1 measurement value is the ratio x TD1 input channel input
value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
98
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Offset
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1 Rate:
40
>TD1 Ratio:
1
>TD1 Offset:
+0
TD1-1 Type:
UNDER
>TD1-1 PU:
OFF
[-10000 ~ +10000:1]
Range
-10000 ~ +10000
Default 0
Step
1
Set the offset of transducer 1(TD1) input channel.
When calculating TD1 measurement value, calculate by applying offset
value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Type
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1 Rate:
40
>TD1 Ratio:
1
TD1 Offset:
+0
>TD1-1 Type:
UNDER
>TD1-1 PU:
OFF
[UNDER/OVER]
Range
UNDER, OVER
Default UNDER
Step
~
Set the alarm type(under or over) for Transducer 1-1(TD1-1). Under
setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses under the pickup
value. Over setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses over the
pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 PU
0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1 Rate:
40
>TD1 Ratio:
1
TD1 Offset:
+0
>TD1-1 Type:
UNDER
>TD1-1 PU:
OFF
Range
0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1
TD1-1 Type setting is UNDER and TD1 input is lower than pickup
Default OFF
Step
0.1
Set TD1-1 pickup value.
Dropout value of TD1 is 10% of pickup value. Alarm ocurrs when
value. And it is reset when TD1 input is higher than 110% of pickup
value.
Alarm ocurrs when TD1-1 Type setting is OVER and TD1 input is
higher than pickup value. And it is reset when TD1 input is lower than
90% of pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Delay
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1-1 Delay:
2.00
TD1-2 Type:
UNDER
TD1-2 PU:
0.0
TD1-2 Delay:
2.00
TD2 Rate:
40
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set a delay time of TD1-1 for pickup delay time and dropout delay
time.
When TD1-1 alarm occurs, "DC11T" event occurs.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
99
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Type
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1-1 Delay:
2.00
>TD1-2 Type:
UNDER
TD1-2 PU:
OFF
TD1-2 Delay:
2.00
TD2 Rate:
40
Range
UNDER, OVER
Default UNDER
Step
~
Set the alarm type(under or over) for Transducer 1-2(TD1-2).
[UNDER/OVER]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 PU
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1-1 Delay:
2.00
TD1-2 Type:
UNDER
>TD1-2 PU:
OFF
TD1-2 Delay:
2.00
TD2 Rate:
40
0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1
Range
0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
Default OFF
Step
0.1
Set TD1-2 pickup value.
Dropout value of TD1 is 10% of pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Delay
[TD MONITOR]
>TD1-1 Delay:
2.00
TD1-2 Type:
UNDER
TD1-2 PU:
0.0
>TD1-2 Delay:
2.00
TD2 Rate:
40
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set a delay time of TD1-2 for pickup delay time and dropout delay
time.
When TD1-2 alarm occurs, "DC12T" event occurs.
*. NOTE ) The setting items and application for TD2 ~ 4, ETD1 ~ 4 chanels are the same as above
TD1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
100
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 7-4. Input Ports and Events related to TD Monitor function
TD Monitor
Alarm Event
Monitoring
Items
Name
TD Chanel*
TD1-1
DC11T
TD1-2
DC12T
TD2-1
DC21T
TD2-2
DC22T
TD3-1
DC31T
TD3-2
DC32T
TD4-1
DC41T
TD4-2
DC42T
ETD1-1
EXTDC11T
ETD1-2
EXTDC12T
ETD2-1
EXTDC21T
ETD2-2
EXTDC22T
ETD3-1
EXTDC31T
ETD3-2
EXTDC32T
ETD4-1
EXTDC41T
ETD4-2
EXTDC42T
Remark
TD1
TD2
TD3
If 'TD Input Use' is OFF,
Monitoring does not work
TD4
External TD1
External TD2
If 'EXT. I / O Use 'setting is
External TD3
OFF, Monitoring does not work
External TD4
*. NOTE ) The measurement values of each TD chanel can be checked in the “MAIN MENU/
METERING/ TD” menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
101
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.3. Loop Control
The ETR300-R supports the LOOP CONTROL function when the controller type is set to
“RECLOSER”.
The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation
area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs.
Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID point
Recloser, TIE point Recloser.
Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage).
Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC)
When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates,
the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence, Sectionalizing
Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the
current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live
line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR Function is operated and the load
side is disconnected.
MIDpoint Recloser(MID)
When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing
Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault,
then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to Alternate setting,
when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During TIEpoint Recloser
closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After recovering the fault,
connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting
and MIDpoint Recloser is closed.
When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects the
load side.
TIEpoint Recloser (TIE)
TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV.
When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and lockouts.
TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side
and when both side becomes DV.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
102
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
LCD Initial Screen
Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, is displayed on LCD Initial Screen.
Press [ENT] button to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.
Table 7-5. Initial Screen for Loop Control
INITIAL SCREEN
LOOP CONTROL <SEC>
ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.
VS STATUS [LIVELINE]
VL STATUS [LIVELINE]
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE
[ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[P-1]
 SEC : Sectionalizing Recloser
LOOP CONTROL <ⓐ>
VS STATUS [LIVELINE]
VL STATUS [LIVELINE]
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE
[ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[ⓑ-ⓒ]
 MID : Midpiont Recloser
 TIE : Tiepoint Recloser
 NON : None Selected
 - : Since control type is selected as sectinalizer, auto loop control function
is not activated.
VS STATUS: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
VL STATUS: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
VS LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to
the dead line of source side
 RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.
VL LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to
the dead line of load side.
 RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.
AUTO RESTORE : Displays auto restoring status after loop control
operation. It is only available when SEC and MID status.
 RUNNING : After returning to live line, timmer is running for automatic
reset
S-CNG : When loop control is operating, it can display the possibility of auto
set group change. It is only available when MID and TIE status.
S-GR : It indicats the currently applied set group.
ⓑ It indicates that when currently applied set group as primary(P) or
alternate(A) setting.
ⓒ It indicats the currently applied set group.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
103
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
LOOP CONTROL Button
Use LOOP CONTROL button to use Loop control on User interface Panel.
LOOP CONTROL ENABLED
When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop
control function is enabled. LED ON Control is possible
only under the conditions as mentioned in “Table 7-6.
“LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control
Conditions”.
LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE
When “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED is ON,
auto restoration function is enabled. In auto restoration
Figure 7-4. Loop Control Button
function, “Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and
restores the preset values after the loop control operation.
LED
ON
Control
of
“LOOP
CONTROL
AUTO
RESTORE” is only possible when the "LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED" LED is ON in SEC and MID type.
Table 7-6. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions
Loop Control Setting
Recloser Status
Function
Type Select
ENABLE
SEC
CLOSE
ENABLE
MID
CLOSE
ENABLE
TIE
OPEN
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Remark
104
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.3.1. Setting
Place the curser on “LOOP CONTROL” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Function
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Function:
DISABLE
Type Select : NONE
>VRS to S/M :
VS
>VRS to Tie :
VS
>VS Wire:
3PN
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether to use loop control function.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE
>VRS to S/M :
VS
>VRS to TIE :
VS
>VS Wire:
3PN
[NONE/SEC/MID/TIE]
Range
NONE, SEC, MID, TIE
Default NONE
Step
~
Set whether to use Recloser type and loop control function.
After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp
ON) to operate this function.
 NONE : Loop control is not in use.
 SEC : It is used for SECtionalizing recloser.
 MID : It is used for MIDpoint.
 TIE : It is used for TIEpoint.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE
>VRS to S/M :
VS
>VRS to TIE :
VS
>VS Wire:
3PN
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
Range
VS, VL, VS&VL
Default VS
Step
~
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used
in SEC, MID.
Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
105
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to TIE
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE
>VRS to S/M :
VS
>VRS to TIE :
VS
>VS Wire:
3PN
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
Range
VS, VL, VS&VL
Default VS
Step
~
Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE.
TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
 VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load
side voltage becomes dead line voltage
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE
>VRS to S/M :
VS
>VRS to Tie :
VS
>VS Wire:
3PN
[Combination of ABC]
Range
3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)
Default
3PN
Step
~
Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
CVD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.
 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
106
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire
[LOOP CONTROL]
>VL Wire:
3PN
Primary:
GROUP1
Alternate:
GROUP2
Cng Alt-MID:
OFF
Cng Alt-TIE:
OFF
Range
3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)
Default 3PN
Step
~
Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure
[Combination of ABC]
dead/live line voltage. Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for
CVD type Control S,T phase are not measured.
 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Primary
[LOOP CONTROL]
>VL Wire:
3PN
>Primary:
GROUP1
Alternate:
GROUP2
Cng Alt-MID:
OFF
Cng Alt-TIE:
OFF
Range
GROUP 1 ~ GROUP 6
Default GROUP 1
Step
~
Set which the number of group is primary setting for LOOP
CONTROL function.
[OFF/ON]
When the LOOP CONTROL function is active, it is automatically
applied to the set goup of this setting. In case of SEC type, it is always
applied as the set group of this setting (applied as the primary setting).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Alternate
[LOOP CONTROL]
>VL Wire:
3PN
Primary:
GROUP3
>Alternate:
GROUP4
Cng Alt-MID:
OFF
Cng Alt-TIE:
OFF
[OFF/VS/VL/BOTH]
Range
GROUP 1 ~ GROUP 6
Default GROUP 2
Step
~
Set which the number of group is alternate setting for LOOP
CONTROL function.
NOTE :
When the Loop Control function is activated, the “GROUP SELECT” command via the field
and remote control is not applied since the set group is applied by the ‘Primary’ and ‘Altrnate’
settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
107
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt - Mid
[LOOP CONTROL]
>VL Wire:
3PN
>Primary:
GROUP1
Alternate:
GROUP2
>Cng Alt-MID:
OFF
Cng Alt-TIE:
OFF
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point :
Select whether to use automatic setting change in MID type. Dead Line
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
status is remained for ‘Live Line TD’ time, setting group changes from
Primary setting group to Alternate setting group.
 OFF : Turn off auto change.
 ON : Turn on auto change.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt - Tie
[LOOP CONTROL]
>VL Wire:
3PN
Primary:
GROUP1
>Alternate:
GROUP2
>Cng Alt-MID:
OFF
>Cng Alt-TIE:
OFF
Range
OFF, VS, VL, BOTH
Default OFF
Step
~
Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE.
Select whether to use automatic setting change in TIE type. Dead Line
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
status is remained for ‘Live Line TD’ time, setting group changes from
Primary setting group to Alternate setting group.
 OFF : Turn off auto change.
 ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS(when VS is Dead
Line status).
 ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL(when VL is Dead
Line status).
 ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL(When
VS or VS is on the Dead Line status).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
108
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / LC After CL
[LOOP CONTROL]
>LC After CL:DISABLE
LC After OP:DISABLE
OT Both DL:
10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
~
Step
Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC or MID.
To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by
Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is
coming from remote or local command. When Loop control function is
set to ENABLE, “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED on User
interface panel is turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not
automatically activated.(Use “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” to
manually activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / LC After OP
[LOOP CONTROL]
>LC After CL:DISABLE
>LC After OP:DISABLE
OT Both DL:
10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE.
To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is
opened by manual operation. Manual open is referred when the
operation signal is coming from remote or local commnad. When Loop
control function is set to ENABLE, “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED”
LED on User interface panel is turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is not
automatically activated.(Use “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” to
manually activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL
[LOOP CONTROL]
>LC After CL:DISABLE
>LC After OP:DISABLE
>OT Both DL:
10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Open Time on Both Dead Line : Setting value is used in TIE.
After TIE closed, source and load side voltage become dead line for a
certain period, TIE opens by Loop control function.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
109
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest’ T
[LOOP CONTROL]
>LC After CL:DISABLE
>LC After OP:DISABLE
>OT Both DL:
10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 10.00
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID.
This is active when “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED on
User Interface Panel is enabled.
SEC operates Loop control (Automatic Open) if a voltage selected
from “VRS to S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage
becomes Live Line, a certain period (Auto Restoration Time) later,
restores (Automatic Close).
MID operate Loop control if a voltage selected form “VRS to S/M”
becomes dead line (when “Chg Alt-MID” is on, it automatically
changes to alternative Setting). After Loop control operated, When it
returns to the live line in the open state and remains for a certain period
(Auto Restoration Time), the MID re-restores (auto close and change to
primary setting).
The MID’s restore process looks like this:
A voltage selected form “VRS to S/M” becomes dead line and MID
operates.  TIE is closed and on operation fault is occurred and trip
lockout.  The voltage that is dead line is returned to the live line. 
MID is restored.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Dead Line Lv
[LOOP CONTROL]
LC After c1: ENABLE
LC After Op: ENABLE
OT Both DL:
10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00
>Dead Line Lv: 0.20
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default 0.20
Step
0.01 xVT
Set the dead line level to detect.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line Lv
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Live Line Lv: 0.70
Dead Line TD: 50.00
Live Line TD: 50.00
DL Reset TD: 5.00
RBT After LC: 5.00
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
Default 0.70
Step
0.01 xVT
Set the live line level to detect.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
110
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Dead Line TD
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>Dead Line TD: 50.00
Live Line TD: 50.00
DL Reset TD: 5.00
RBT After LC: 5.00
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 50.00
Step
0.01 sec
Dead Line Detection Time Delay: It is the delay time for detecting the
dead line in order to operate the SEC, MID and TIE recloser for loop
control. If the voltage is kept below 'Dead Line Level', it is considered
as dead line condition. If voltage is not recovered during 'Live Line
TD', loop control operation is performed
Dead Line TD Timer is a cumulate timer that counts the dead line time
when doing reclosing of the upper C / B or recloser. This timer does not
reset the accumulated count even if it becomes live line and it is reset
only by 'DL Reset TD' setting. The set time should be set to be equal to
or greater than the largest time of the sum of the reclosing times of the
upper C/B or recloser.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line TD
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>Dead Line TD: 50.00
>Live Line TD: 50.00
DL Reset TD: 5.00
RBT After LC: 5.00
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 50.00
Step
0.01 sec
Live Line Detection Time Delay : This is the delay time for detecting
the Live Line. If the live line is not available for the preset time after
detection of the dead line status, the SEC, MID and TIE recloser are
loop controlled. For smooth loop control operation, the set time should
be set larger than the SEC setting value, and the MID setting value
should be set to be greater than the SEC setting value for each 5
seconds or more.
The loop control operation by this set time is as follows;
 SEC does open operation.
 In the case of MID, active set group is changed. (In the case of ‘Cng
Alt-MID’ setting is on)
 TIE does close operation, active set group is changed(In the case of
‘Cng Alt-TIE’ setting is on)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
111
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line TD
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>Dead Line TD: 50.00
>Live Line TD: 50.00
>DL Reset TD: 5.00
RBT After LC: 5.00
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Dead Line Reset Time : Dead Line Status and Dead Line TD 'Timer
reset time setting.
In case of SEC, if the voltage which was in the dead line condition is
maintained over the set time longer than the 'Live Line Level', it is
considered as that the line has returned to normal and automatically
SEC is closed (In the case of that "LOOP CONTROL AUTO
RESTORE" LED is ON)
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / RBT After LC
[LOOP CONTROL]
>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>Dead Line TD: 50.00
>Live Line TD: 50.00
>DL Reset TD: 5.00
>RBT After LC: 5.00
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Auto Reclosing Block Time after Loop Control Operation : Setting
values are used in MID, TIE.
This timer prevents from Auto Reclosing function when recloser
operates due to a fault after Loop control operation.
After ‘Live Line TD’ and changed Settings, while backward
distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set
time, MID recloser. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and
MID trips after a set time, auto reclosing is executed.
After ‘Live Line TD’, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set
time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips
after a set time, auto reclosing is executed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
112
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.3.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED Key
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED LED
Dead Line Lv
Dead Line TD
DL Reset TD
Live Line TD
Live Line Lv
LOOP CONTROL
AUTO RESTORE Key
LOOP CONTROL
AUTO RESTORE LED
MANUAL OPEN
Figure 7-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
113
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED Key
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED LED
Dead Line Lv
Dead Line TD
DL Reset TD
Live Line TD
Live Line Lv
RBT After LC
LOOP CONTROL
AUTO RESTORE Key
LOOP CONTROL AUTO
RESTORE LED
Figure 7-6. MID Point Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
114
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED Key
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED LED
Dead Line Lv
Dead Line TD
DL Reset TD
Live Line TD
Live Line Lv
Dead Line Lv
Live Line Lv
RBT After LC
Figure 7-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
115
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.3.3. Loop Control Application
1)
5-Reclosers Loop Control
For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of
MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side
to SEC-MID-TIE.
In “Table 7-7. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for
CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side.
Table 7-7. 5-Reclosers Setting
SETTING
CB1
RC1
RC2
RC3
RC4
RC5
CB2
Type Select
-
SEC
MID
TIE
MID
SEC
-
VRS to S/M
-
VS

VS

X
VS

VS

-
VRS to Tie
-
X
X
VS&VL
X
X
-
VS Wire
-
3PN
3PN
3PN
3PN
3PN
-
VL Wire
-
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
-
Cng Alt-Mid
-
X
ON
X
ON
X
-
Cng Alt-Tie
-
X
X
ON
X
X
-
LC After CL
-
ENABLE
ENABLE
X
ENABLE
ENABLE
-
LC After OP
-
-
X
ENABLE
X
-
-
OT Both DL
-
X
X
10.00
X
X
-
Auto Rest’ T
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
Dead Line Lv(xVT)
-
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
-
Live Line Lv(xVT)
-
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
-
Dead Line TD(sec)
-
22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
-
Live Line TD(sec)
-
5.00
10.00
15.00
10.00
5.00
-
DL Reset TD(sec)
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
RBT After LC(sec)
-
X
10.00
10.00
10.00
X
-
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
-
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
-
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED
LOOP CONTROL
AUTO RESTORE
Reclose Time
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
116
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Figure 7-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates.
“Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate.
To operate “Live Line TD” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time
set than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “Live Line TD” is enable,
SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to alternate set group setting.
Step3 : When “Live Line TD” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to alternate group setting
automatically, and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the
rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.
Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after AutoRestoration Time.
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to primary group setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
117
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Figure 7-9. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When the line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD”
operates.
“Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time.
Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “Live Line TD” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than MID.
When “Live Line TD” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to alternate group setting automatically.
Step3 : When “Live Line TD” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to
alternate group setting.
Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault.
F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to
alternate group setting after Auto Restoration Time.
Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to primary group setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
118
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5-Reclosers Loop control at F3 Fault
Figure 7-10. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When the line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD”
operates.
“Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
TIE(RC3) operate. When “Live Line TD” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to alternate group
setting automatically.
Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault.
F3 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3)
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to primary group setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous
normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
119
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
2)
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3-Reclosers Loop Control
For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of
TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE.
In “Table 7-8. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1
side. And the source side bushings of RC3 is installed for CB2 side.
Table 7-8. 3-Reclosers Setting
SETTING
CB1
RC1
RC2
RC3
CB2
Type Select
-
SEC
TIE
SEC
-
VRS to S/M
-
VS

X
VS

-
VRS to Tie
-
X
VS&VL
X
-
VS Wire
-
3PN
3PN
3PN
-
VL Wire
-
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
-
Cng Alt-Mid
-
X
X
X
-
Cng Alt-Tie
-
X
ON
X
-
LC After CL
-
ENABLE
X
ENABLE
-
LC After OP
-
-
ENABLE
-
-
OT Both DL
-
X
10.00
X
-
Auto Rest’ T
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
Dead Line Lv(xVT)
-
0.50
0.50
0.50
-
Live Line Lv(xVT)
-
0.70
0.70
0.70
-
Dead Line TD(sec)
-
22.0
22.0
22.0
-
Live Line TD(sec)
-
5.00
10.00
5.00
-
DL Reset TD(sec)
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
RBT After LC(sec)
-
X
10.00
X
-
-
ON
ON
ON
-
-
ON
OFF
ON
-
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED
LOOP CONTROL
AUTO RESTORE
Reclose Time
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
120
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Figure 7-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates.
“Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “Live Line TD” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than SEC.
When “Live Line TD” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2)
automatically changes to alternate group setting and close.
F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto
Restoration Time.
Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to primary group setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
121
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Figure 7-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated
time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates.
Step2 :
“Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
TIE(RC2) automatically changes to alternate group setting and close.
When closing TIE(RC2), TIE(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1).
Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to primary group setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
122
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.4. Passcode
Place the curser on “PASSCODE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
When entering to “PASSCODE” menu, Passcord 3 certification is necessary.
ETR300-R has 3 (three) Passcods, Passcords can be changed in this menu.
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and Passcode 2
is applied when communication setting is changed. Passcode 3 is applied when clearing or resetting
registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.
The setting range and the procedure for changing the three passcods are the same.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 ~3
[PASSCODE 1]
>PASSCODE 1:
0000
Range
0000 ~ 9999
Default 0000
Step
1
Put Passcode 1.
[0000~9999:1]
7.1.5. PLC
Place the curser on “PLC” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[PLC]
>1.LOGIC TIMER
2.PULS TIMER
3.PULS COUNT
4.INPUT PORTS
5.OUTPUT PORTS
7.1.5.1. LOGIC TIMER
Place the curser on “LOGIC TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

PLC has 8 logic timer.

If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is
disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Fgure 7-13. Logic Timer
symbol”.

X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.

In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM□.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
123
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

http://www.entecene.co.kr
In PLC, B is output for TM□.
TM□
X
A
B
Y
0s/0s
Figure 7-13. Logic Timer Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU
[LOGIC TIMER]
>TM01-Pickup: 0.05
TM01-Dropout: 0.05
TM02-Pickup: 0.05
TM02-Dropout: 0.05
TM03-Pickup: 0.05
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.05
Step
0.01 sec
Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO
[LOGIC TIMER]
TM01-Pickup:
0.05
>TM01-Dropout: 0.05
TM02-Pickup: 0.05
TM02-Dropout: 0.05
TM03-Pickup: 0.05
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.05
Step
0.01 sec
Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) TM02~TM08 are sam as TM01 above.
7.1.5.2. PULSE TIMER
Place the curser on “PULSE TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

PLC has 8 pulse timer.

When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time.
Please refer to “Figure 7-14. Pulse Timer Symbol”

In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM□.

In PLC, B is output for PTM□.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
124
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PTM□
A
B
Y
0s
Figure 7-14. Pulse Timer Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE TIMER / PTM1
[PULSE TIMER]
>PTM01 Output: 0.01
PTM02 Output: 0.01
PTM03 Output: 0.01
PTM04 Output: 0.01
PTM05 Output: 0.01
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.01
Step
0.01 sec
Set a output time of pulse timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) PTM02~PTM08 are sam as PTM01 above.
7.1.5.3. PULSE COUNTER
Place the curser on “PULSE COUNTER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

PLC has 8 pulse counters.

Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it
reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and
increased count becomes 0. Please refer to “Fgure 7-15. Pulse Counter Symbol”.

It can be checked counter value about Input A on “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/
COUNT/ USER COUNT” menu.

In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET□.

In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST□.

In PLC, C is output for CLT□
CLT
PC□
A
B
X
R
Q
C
0
Figure 7-15. Pulse Counter Symbol
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
125
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE COUNTER / PTL01 Count
Range
[PULSE TIMER]
>CTL01 Count: 1000
CTL02 Count: 1000
CTL03 Count: 1000
CTL04 Count: 1000
CTL05 Count: 1000
1 ~ 60000
Default 1
1
Step
Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).
[1~60000:1]
*. NOTE ) PTL02 Count~PTL08 Count are sam as PTL01 Count above.
7.1.5.4. INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS
Place the curser on “INPUT PORTS” or “OUTPUT PORTS” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
[INPUT PORTS]
>1.INPUT DEBOUNCE
1)
[OUTPUT PORTS]
>1.OUTPUT PULSETIME
INPUT DEBOUNCE
Place the curser on “INPUT DEBOUNCE” in INPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.

Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input.

Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal.

In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is
disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-16. Input Debounce
Timer Symbol”.

In PLC, A is IN101~IN□ of Control Input, B is output for IN□.
A
IN□
X
X
B
0s
Figure 7-16. Input Debounce Timer Symbol
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
126
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / INPUT PORTS / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101
Range
[INPUT DEBOUNCE]
>IN101 :
0.020
IN102 :
0.020
IN103 :
0.020
IN104 :
0.020
IN105 :
0.020
0.005 ~ 300.000 sec
Default 0.020
Step
0.001 sec
Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.
0.005~300.000:0.001s
*. NOTE ) ① IN102 ~ IN112 and IN201 ~ IN216 are the same as IN101 above.
② IN101 ~ IN112 are the SCADA input ports of the side panel, so the IN101 ~ IN112
settings do not apply unless the Scada I / O board is installed (‘SCADA I / O Use’
setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is
ON)
③ IN301 ~ IN308 are the same as IN101 above. If the ETIO10 unit is not installed, the
IN301 ~ IN308 settings will not be applied, since the IN301 ~ IN308 are external
input ports of the ETIO10 unit (‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting in the “GLOBAL SETTING/
GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON, it is applied)
2)
Output Pulse Timer
Place the curser on “OUTPUT PULSE TIME” in OUTPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.

Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually.

In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When
Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending
on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C
becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to “Figure 7-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol’.

In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT□.

In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT□.

In PLC, C is output for OUT□ and this output operates RELAY.
OUT□
A
B
Y
R
C
0s
Figure 7-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
127
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101
[OUTPUT PULSE TIME]
>OUT101 :
0.50
OUT102 :
0.50
OUT103 :
0.50
OUT104 :
0.50
OUT105 :
0.50
Range
0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec
Default 0.50
Step
0.01 sec
Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.
0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s
*. NOTE ) ① OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT216 are the same as OUT101 above.
② OUT101 ~ OUT108 is the scada output port of the side panel. Therefore, OUT101 ~
OUT108 settings are not applied unless the Scada I / O board is installed (‘SCADA
I/O Use’ setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION”
menu is ON)
③ OUT301 ~ OUT308 are the same as OUT101 above. OUT301 ~ OUT308 is the
external output port of the ETIO10 unit. If the ETIO10 unit is not installed, the
above OUT301 ~ OUT308 settings will not be applied (‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting in the
“GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON, it is
applied)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
128
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.5.5. PLC Setting Example
The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur
within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical
mapping, refer to “Table 7-9. Operator Symbols”.
Table 7-9. Operator Symbols
OPERATOR
DESCRIPTION
*
“AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.
+
“OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..
!
“NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.
(
)
-
This operation is performed first.
1
-
When outputting directly, the output is 1.
0
-
When outputting directly, the output is 0.
-
Buffer output.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
129
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PLC logic setting example is as follows;
If user wants pulse signal output at OUT101 port during Phase Time OverCurrent(Fast/Delay) fault
occurrence, set the PLC logic as the formula below.
Example: Logical Expression
1) ITM01 = 151P1T+151P2T+251P1T+251P2T
When any one of following : Phase Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault occurs, Logic Timer
01(TM01) is outputted. The Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic Timer 01 is set in
“GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ LOGIC TIMER” menu.
※. NOTE ) Time Over Current Element related Logic Bit designation
① 151P1T : (+) Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase
② 151P2T : (+) Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase
③ 251P1T : (-) Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase
④ 251P2T : (-) Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase
2) IOUT101 = TM01
Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output101 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse
Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in “GLOBAL
SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ OUTPUT PULSE TIME” menu.
3) BOUT101 = 0
As there is no block condition for Output101 port, 0 is always inputted.
The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as “Figure 7-18. OUT101 Output
Signal Logic Diagram”.
Logic Timer
151P1T
151P2T
Output Pulse Timer
X
TM01
251P1T
251P2T
OUT101
Y
0s/0s
R
Y
0.1s
0
Figure 7-18. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
130
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PLC Editting Example
As shown in “Figure 7-19. PLC Edit Screen”, input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen
operating program then upload PLC data to ETR300-R. For more info, consult “ETR300-R-600
ETIMS Interface Software User Manual”.
Logic Timer
151P1T
X
151P2T
TM01
251P1T
Y
251P2T
0s/0s
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
Figure 7-19. PLC Edit Screen
NOTE : 1. When editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.
2. When editing PLC logic, you can see the list of logic that can be input to the
equation by pressing the ‘F1’ key.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
131
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.6. Device
Place the curser on “DEVICE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[DEVICE]
>1.CONTROL TYPE
2.OPERATION TIME
3.H/W OPTION
4.GAS SENSOR
5.MANUAL CLOSE
6.LCD DISPLAY
7.PANEL SLEEP
8.TIME ZONE
9.OTHERS
10.FACTORY DEBUG
7.1.6.1. Control Type
Place the curser on “CONTROL TYPE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE / Type
[CONTROL TYPE]
>Type:
RECLOSER
Range
RECLOSER, SECCTIONALIZER
Default RECLOSER
Step
~
Set the control type according to the installed body.
[REC/SEC]
ETR-300R has two control types (Recloser and Sectionalizer type). The
control type must be selected according to the installed body. If the
selected control type and the body type do not match, erroneous
operation or non-operating occurs.
The menu of the group setting to be applied depends on the control
type. When set to RECLOSER, “GROUP SETTING/ RECLOSER”
menu is applied and trip operation is performed in case of fault. When
set to SECTIONALIZER, "
“GROUP SETTING/ SECTIONALIZER”
menu is applied. In case of fault, only fault indication is performed and
trip operation is not performed.
For detailed application function according to control type, refer to “"3.
APPLICATION”.
NOTE : Be sure to set the control type according to the
characteristics of the main body. Otherwise, the ETR300-R will
not only operate normally, but it will also cause demage to the
mainframe.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
132
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.6.2. CB Operation Time
Place the curser on “OPERATION TIME” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu. In this menu, the operation time of thet tank is set. The time set in this menu is used to
compensate the T-C curve trip time and reclosing time.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Open Time
[OPERATION TIME]
>Open Time:
0.026
Close Time:
0.050
Range
0.000 ~ 1.000 sec
Default 0.026
Step
0.001 sec
Set actual circuit breaker’s opening time.
[0.000~1.000:0.001s]
Circuit breaker’s complete opening time is calculated as follows.
Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time
+ CB Trip Time
(CB Opening Time + Arcing Time)
*. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ERT300-R is 1.00sec
and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s
Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The
difference between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec
needs to be set for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time
compensates CB Trip Time.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Close Time
[OPERATION TIME]
>Open Time:
0.026
>Close Time:
0.050
Range
0.000 ~ 10.000 sec
Default 0.050
Step
0.01
Set actual circuit breaker’s closing time.
[0~10.000:0.001s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
133
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.6.3. H/W Option
Place the curser on “H/W OPTION” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
In this menu, set the H / W option of ETR300-R. Unlike the actual options, if set, the item may
behave incorrectly.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / SCADA I/O Use
[H/W OPTION]
>SCADA I/O Use:
ON
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF
>TD Input Use:
OFF
>IRIG Use:
OFF
>Wifi Use:
OFF
[OFF/ON]]
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
~
Select whether the SCADA I/O board is installed.
When set to OFF, input / output control of IN101 ~ IN112 and OUT101
~ OUT108 ports is disabled and port stauts is always “OFF”.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / EX. I/O Use
[H/W OPTION]
>SCADA I/O Use:
ON
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF
>TD Input Use:
OFF
>IRIG Use:
OFF
>Wifi Use:
OFF
[OFF/ON]]
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Select whether the external I/O unit ETIO10 is installed.
When set to OFF, the following applies;
 Input / output control of IN301 ~ IN308 and OUT301 ~ OUT308
ports is disabled and port status is always “OFF”
 External TD is measured always as 0.
 Monitor function doesn’t work about External TD input port.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / TD Input Use
[H/W OPTION]
>SCADA I/O Use:
ON
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF
>TD Input Use:
OFF
>IRIG Use:
OFF
>Wifi Use:
OFF
[OFF/ON]]
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Select whether the TD(DC) input boad is installed.
When set to OFF, the following applies;
 TD is measured always as 0.
 Monitor function doesn’t work about TD input port.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
134
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use
OFF, ON
[H/W OPTION]
>SCADA I/O Use:
ON
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF
>TD Input Use:
OFF
>IRIG Use:
OFF
>Wifi Use:
OFF
Range
[OFF/ON]]
installed.
Default OFF
Step
~
Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / Wifi Use
[H/W OPTION]
>SCADA I/O Use:
ON
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF
>TD Input Use:
OFF
>IRIG Use:
OFF
>Wifi Use:
OFF
[OFF/ON]]
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Select whether the wifi is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / EXT. Temper’ Use
[H/W OPTION]
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF
>TD Input Use:
OFF
>IRIG Use:
OFF
>Wifi Use:
OFF
>EXT.Temper’ Use:OFF
[OFF/ON]]
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Select whether the external temperature is installed.
7.1.6.4. GAS Sensor Type
Place the curser on “GAS SENSOR” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / GAS SENSOR
[GAS SENSOR]
>Sensor:
NONE
Opr’ Block GPF; OFF
Range
NONE, INSTALL
Default NONE
Step
~
Set whether the gas sensor of the main body is installed or not.
[NONE/INSTALL]
Set to INSTALL when the main body is a gas type, and set to NONE
if it is a polymer type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
135
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / Opr’ Block GPF
[GAS SENSOR]
>Sensor:
NONE
>Opr’ Block GPF; OFF
ON, OFF
Range
Default OFF
Step
~
In case of gas pressure failure (pressure low or high), it sets whether
[OFF/ON]
or not the close operation block.
This setting is applied only when the above 'Sensor' setting is
INSTALL.
7.1.6.5. Manual Close
Place the curser on “MANUAL CLOSE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / MANUAL CLOSE / Time Delay
[MANUAL CLOSE]
>Time Delay:
0.00
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Using the CLOSE button on the front panel, set the closing delay time
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
to be applied to the main body when the close control is performed in
the field.
If the CLOSE button is pressed again during the close delay time, the
delay time is applied even if the delay time remains.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
136
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.6.6. LCD Display
Place the curser on “LCD Display” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
In this menu, items related to the LCD screen display method of the front panel are set.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Date Disp’ Type
[LCD DISPLAY]
>Date Disp’type: MDY
Init Main Screen: 2
Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
[YMD/MDY]
YMD, MDY
Range
Default MDY
Step
~
Set the display type of the date displayed on the LCD screen such as
the event menu.
 YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date
 MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Init Main Screen
[LCD DISPLAY]
>Date Disp’type: MDY
>Init Main Screen: 2
Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
[1~8:1]
1~8
Range
Default 2
Step
2
The ETR300-R has 8 initial screens. Set the main screen of 8 initial
screens. The set screen is displayed for the first time after booting or
deviating from main menu, when sleep mode is released.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Flt Pop-up Msg
[LCD DISPLAY]
>Date Disp’type: MDY
>Init Main Screen: 2
>Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
[OFF/ON]
OFF, ON
Range
Default OFF
Step
~
Set whether to display the fault pop-up screen when a fault occurs.
The fault pop-up screen is shown in “"Table 7-10. Fault Pop-up
Screen”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
137
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 7-10. Fault Pop-up Screen (1/2)
FAULT POP-UP SCREEN
[ALERT] FAULT INFO
SEQ: 1
TYPE:
ABCNSQ
51
A: 00000
B: 00000
C: 00000
N: 00000
Q: 00000
S: 00.00
2017/01/01 00:00:00
① Fault sequence (shot count) is indicated
② Indicate fault target
 A, B, C : each phase fault (Phase fault)
 N : Ground fault
 Q : Negative Sequence fault
 S : Senstive Earth Fault
[ALERT] FAULT INFO
SEQ: ①
TYPE:
②
③
A: ④
C: ④
Q: ④
B: ④
N: ④
S: ④
⑤
③ Indicate fault element
 - : Sectionalizer type, Fault Indication
 51 : Time Overcurrent Trip
 50 : Insantaneous Overcurrent Trip or Insantaneous Overcurrent Lockout
 27 : Under Voltage Trip
 59 : Over Voltage Trip
 64 : Neutral Over Voltage Trip
 81 : Under Frequency, Over Frequency or Frequency Decay Trip
 32 : Forward Power or Direction Power Trip
 46 : Broken Conduct Trip
 D : Demand Trip
④ Indicate each phase and negative sequence, S.E.F fault current
⑤ Indicate fault current occurring time
*. Whenever fault is occurred, fault pop-up screen is accumulated, the latest
fault screen is displayed at first.
*. Using [ENT] button, accumulated fault pop-up screen is checked.
*. Using [ESC] button, you can clear the pop-up screen without checking all
fault pop-up screens.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
138
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.6.7. Panel Sleep Time
Place the curser on “PANEL SLEEP” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Sleep Time
[PANEL SLEEP]
>Sleep Time:
OFF
Awake Method: BOTH
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
Default 5
Step
1 min
Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key
[0(OFF),1~100:1m]
operation on interface panel, ETR300-R goes into sleep mode.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method
[PANEL SLEEP]
Sleep Time:
OFF
>Awake Method: BOTH
Range
KEY, DOOR, BOTH
Default BOTH
Step
-
This setting value is affected to display wake-up method
[KEY/DOOR/BOTH]
 DOOR : Using door pin attached on the control door, when the
door is open, the control panel is awaken from sleep mode.
 KEY : When “AWAKE” key button on the front panel is pushed, the
control panel is awaken from sleep mode.
 BOTH : DOOR and KEY are all used.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
139
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.6.8. Time Zone
Place the curser on “TIME ZONE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time
Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module
option is installed.
Select standard time zone for user county. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synchronization by
Time Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Sign
[TIME ZONE]
>GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9
GMT Offset-Min:
0
Time SyncType: GMT
Range
+, -
Default +
Step
-
Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction.
[+/-]
Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Hour
[TIME ZONE]
GMT Offset-Sign: +
>GMT Offset-Hour: 9
GMT Offset-Min:
0
Time SyncType: GMT
Range
0~23 hour(s)
Default 9
Step
1 hour
Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time.
[0~23:1hr]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Min
0~59 min
[TIME ZONE]
GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9
>GMT Offset-Min:
0
Time SyncType: GMT
Range
[0~59:1min]
Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.
Default 0
Step
1 min
NOTE : Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00);
Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0
The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
140
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
NOTE :
If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be
happened as follows.
-
If the "Time Sync Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in ETR300-R
can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
-
If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event
transmitted is not correct.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type
LOCAL, GMT
[TIME ZONE]
GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9
GMT Offset-Min:
0
>Time SyncType: GMT
Range
[LOCAL/GMT]
with Time Synchronization module.
Default GMT
Step
~
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized
NOTE :
In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if “IRIG Use” setting is set
with "NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION” menu, the
time synchronization module is not able to be used.
7.1.6.9. Others
Place the curser on “OTHERS” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Count Use
[OTHERS]
>16bit Count Use:OFF
16bit Ener’ Use:OFF
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
~
Set the count data format that ETR300-R registed.
[OFF/ON]
 OFF : Use 32bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000.
 ON : Use 16bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
141
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Ener’ Use
[OTHERS]
>16bit Count Use:OFF
16bit Ener’ Use:OFF
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
~
Set the energy data format that the ETR300-R registed.
[OFF/ON]
 OFF : Use 32bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled
over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 999,999,999.
 ON : Use 16bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled
over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 60,000.
7.1.6.10. Factory Debug
This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.
7.1.7. Save Setting
From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GENERAL menu. The procedure
for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
142
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2. Communication
Place the curser on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has submenu as below.
[COMMUNICATION]
>1.PROTOCOLS
2.PORTS
3.DIALUP MODEM
4.FTP-SSL
5.WIFI
6.EVENT&ETC
*.SAVE SETTINGS
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.
7.2.1. Protocol Setup
Place the curser on “PROTOCOL SETUP” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETR300-R is set and it has sub-menus as below.
[PROTOCOLS]
>1.DNP3
2.IEC60870-5
3.MODBUS
4.IEC61850
5.SNTP
6.SNMP
7.ETIMS TCP
ETR300-R supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104, MODBOUS, IEC61850, SNTP,
SNMP and ETIMS TCP Communication protocol . This menu may be changed depending on
User’s request. Each protocol setting details are as below.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
143
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup
1)
DNP3 Slave 1 and DNP3 Slave 2
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/
DNP3 S1 or DNP3 S2” to select setting for DNP3 Protocol.
Setting items of “DNP3 SLAVE 1” and “DNP3 SLAVE 2” menu are same as following;
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Function
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries:
0
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / COM Port
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Function:
DISABLE
>Port Select: PORT1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries:
0
Range
PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, PORT4, PORT5
Default PORT1
Step
~
Select DNP3 communication port.
[PORT1~PORT5]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Confirm
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT1
>D/L Confirm:
SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries:
0
[NO/YES/SOME]
Range
NO, YES, SOME
Default SOME
Step
~
Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.
 NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.
 YES : Data Link Confirm is used.
 SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.
When Data Link Confirm is used, it shall be set same as the Host
setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication
may be failed due to Data Link Reset.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
144
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L FrameDly
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT1
D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L FrameDly:
100
D/L Retries:
0
[0~5000:10ms]
Range
0 ~ 5000 msec
Default 100
Step
10 msec
Set Data Link frame Delay Time.
In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time
when multi-frame occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Retries
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
>D/L Retries:
0
Range
[0~2:1]
layer.
0~ 2
Default 0
Step
1
Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Timeout
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Port Select: PORT1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries:
0
>D/L Timeout:
10
[1~255:1s]
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 10
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive
Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm
receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETR300-R will send Data
Link Frame again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Retries
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>A/L Retries:
0
A/L Timeout:
30
Master Addr: 60000
Slave Address:
1
SBO Timeout:
15
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0
Step
1
Enter the number of retries of retransmission of unsol message
[1~255:1s]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Timeout
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>A/L Retries:
0
>A/L Timeout:
30
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address:
1
>SBO Timeout:
15
[1~255:1s]
Range
1~ 255 sec
Default 30
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive Application layer
Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is
requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master
Application.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
145
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master Address
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
A/L Retries:
15
A/L Timeout:
30
>Master Addr: 60000
Slave Address:
1
SBO Timeout:
15
0 ~ 65534
Range
Default 60000
Step
1
Enter the master station address.
[0~65534:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Slave Address
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>A/L Retries:
15
>A/L Timeout:
30
Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address:
15
>SBO Timeout:
15
[0~65534:1]
0 ~ 65534
Range
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SBO Timeout
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>A/L Retries:
15
>A/L Timeout:
30
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address:
15
>SBO Timeout:
15
[1~255:1s]
1 ~ 255 sec
Range
Default 15
Step
1 sec
Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If
there is no operation command during set time, Select command is
cancelled.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Init Unsol
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
Unsol Time:
5
Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Class1:
ENABLE
Class2:
ENABLE
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.
 ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
transferred.
 DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
not transferred.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol Time
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time:
5
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1:
ENABLE
>Class2:
ENABLE
[0~60:1s]
Range
0 ~ 60 sec
Default 5
Step
1 sec
Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is occurred.
Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within the time.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
146
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 /Unsol Type
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time:
5
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Class1:
ENABLE
Class2:
ENABLE
[NOTRIG/PERIOD]
Range
NOTRIG, PERIOD
Default NOTRIG
Step
-
Set the method to Unsolicited Message.
 NOTRG: If there is no event occurrence during setting unsolicited
time after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted.
 PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event
data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing
when the first event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 1
DISABLE, ENABLE
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time:
5
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1:
ENABLE
Class2:
ENABLE
Range
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
that Class 1 event is occurred.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 2
DISABLE, ENABLE
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time:
5
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1:
ENABLE
>Class2:
ENABLE
Range
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
that Class 2 event is occurred.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 3
DISABLE, ENABLE
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Class3:
ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
TCP Port:
20000
UDP Port :
20001
Master IP Oct1:
0
Range
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
that Class 3 event is occurred.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
147
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/UDP Select
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Class3:
ENABLE
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
TCP Port:
20000
UDP Port :
20001
Master IP Oct1:
0
Range
TCP, UDP
Default
TCP
Step
~
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.
[TCP/UDP]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP Port
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Class3:
ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
>TCP Port:
20000
UDP Port :
20001
Master IP Oct1:
0
Range
1 ~ 65535
Default 20000
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300-R for TCP communication.
[1~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / UDP Port
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Class3:
ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
TCP Port:
20000
>UDP Port :
20001
Master IP Oct1:
0
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 20001
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300-R for UDP communication.
[1~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master IP Oct 1~4
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Master IP Oct1:
Master IP Oct2:
Master IP Oct3:
Master IP Oct4:
[0~255:1]
Range
0
0
0
0
0 ~ 255
Default 0*
Step
1
Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
①
②
③
④
Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according o
the option type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
148
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / K-Alv Check Tm
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Master IP Oct4:
0
>K-Alv Check Tm:
4
Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m):
OFF
Retry Type:
REGEN
Range
[O(OFF),1~600:1s]
during the idle status.
Default 4
Step
1sec
Set the time period that checks the communication connecting status
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Fragment Size
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Master IP Oct4:
0
>K-Alv Check Tm:
4
>Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m):
OFF
Retry Type:
REGEN
[64~2048:1]
Range
64 ~ 2048
Default 2048
Step
1
Set the size of DNP fragment.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Time Req(m)
0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Master IP Oct4:
0
K-Alv Check Tm:
4
Fragment Size: 2048
>Time Req(m):
OFF
Retry Type:
REGEN
Range
[0(OFF),1~30000:1]
received from master station.
Default OFF
Step
1
Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Retry Type
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Master IP Oct4:
0
K-Alv Check Tm:
4
Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m):
OFF
>Retry Type:
REGEN
[REGEN/IDENT]
Range
IDENT, REGEN
Default REGEN
Step
~
Set the Retry Type(Indentical, Regenerated).
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SA Func
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>SA Func:
DISABLE
TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE
Unsol off TO:
OFF
[DISABLE/SAv2/SAv5]
Range
DISABLE, SAv2, SAv5
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether DNP Secure Authenitication is used i.e, SAv2, SAv5 or not
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
149
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/IP TLS
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
SA Func:
DISABLE
>TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE
Unsol off TO:
OFF
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set the DNP TCP/IP Transport Layer Security is used or not.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol off TO
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
SA Func:
DISABLE
TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE
>Unsol off TO:
OFF
Range
0(OFF), 0~65535sec
Default OFF
Step
1sec
Set final confirmation timeout period.
When unsolicited message transmit is failed, the transmittion retries
[0(OFF),0~65535:1s]
repeat. After final retry is done, it waits during this set time and then
another unsolicited response series will be started.
2)
DNP3 Protocol Common
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/
COMMON” menu. This setting is applied to the DNP3 Save 1 and DNP3 Save 2 protocols.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ CI Frz Period
[COMMON]
>CI Frz Period:
Range
OFF
[0(OFF),0~60000:1m]
0(OFF), 0~60000m
Default OFF
Step
1minute
Set freeze period of CI points.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
150
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.1.2. IEC60870-5 Protocol Setup
1)
IEC60870-5-101
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC608705/ IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-5-101.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function
[IEC870-5-101]
>Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT1
Link Address
1
ASDU Address
0
Cyclic Period
60
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether IEC60870-5-101 protocol is used for communcation.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COM Port
[IEC870-5-101]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Port Select: PORT1
Link Address:
1
ASDU Address:
0
Cyclic Period: 60
PORT1, PORT2, PORT3
Range
Default PORT1
Step
~
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
[PORT1-PORT3]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address
1 ~ 65535
[IEC870-5-101]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Port Select: PORT1
>Link Address:
1
ASDU Address:
0
Cyclic Period: 60
Range
[1~65535:1]
unication.
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address for IEC60870-5-101 comm-
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr
[IEC60870-5-101]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
PORT1
Link Address:
1
>ASDU Address:
0
Cyclic Period:
60
[1~65535:1]
Range
0~65535
Default 0
Step
1
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
151
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period
[IEC60870-5-101]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
PORT1
Link Address:
1
ASDU Address:
0
>Cyclic Period:
60
[0(OFF),1~60000:1s]
Range
0(OFF), 1~60000 sec
Default 60
Step
1 sec
Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period
0~255 sec
[IEC60870-5-101]>
>Event Period:
15
D/L Retries:
0
Conf.Timeout:
10
Max Poll Time:
10
ASDU Addr Size:
2
Range
[0~255:1s]
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
Default 15
Step
1sec
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/D/L Retries
[IEC60870-5-101]>
>Event Period:
15
>D/L Retries:
0
Conf.Timeout:
10
Max Poll Time:
10
ASDU Addr Size:
2
[0~255:1]
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0
Step
1
Set the number of Data retry.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout
[IEC60870-5-101]>
>Event Period:
15
D/L Retries:
0
>Conf.Timeout:
10
Max Poll Time:
10
ASDU Addr Size:
2
[1~255:1s]
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 10
Step
1 sec
Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after
transfer the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time
and Data retries is available, ETR300-R transfers the Data again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim
[IEC60870-5-101]>
>Event Period:
15
D/L Retries:
0
Conf.Timeout:
10
>Max Poll Time:
10
ASDU Addr Size:
2
[1~255:1s]
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 10
Step
1 sec
Set the Data Polling period time.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
152
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ADSUAddr Size
[IEC60870-5-101]>
Event Period:
15
D/L Retries:
0
Conf.Timeout:
10
Max Poll Time:
10
>ASDU Addr Size:
2
[1~2:1]
Range
1~2
Default 2
Step
1
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Confirm
[IEC60870-5-101]
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size:
1
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO:
15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Range
NEVER, ALWAYS
Default ALWAYS
Step
~
Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
[NEVER/ALWAYS]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Addr Size
[IEC60870-5-101]
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
>Link Addr Size:
1
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO:
15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Range
1~2
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the size of link address.
[1~2:1]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size
[IEC60870-5-101]
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size:
1
>Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO:
15
Tx Frame Size: 261
[0~261:1]
Range
0 ~ 261
Default 261
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO
0(OFF), 0 ~ 255 sec
[IEC60870-5-101]
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size:
1
Rx Frame Size: 261
>Rx Frame TO:
15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Range
[0(OFF),0~255:1s]
receiving the frame sync.
Default 15
Step
1 sec
Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
153
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size
[IEC60870-5-101]
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size:
1
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO:
15
>Tx Frame Size: 261
[0~261:1]
Range
0 ~ 261
Default 261
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COT Size
[IEC60870-5-101]
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout:
5
Range
1~2
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
[1~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ IOA Size
[IEC60870-5-101]
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout:
5
Range
1~3
Default 2
Step
1
Enter the size of information object address.
[1~3:1]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ One Ch Response
NO, YES
[IEC60870-5-101]
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
>One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout:
5
Range
[NO/YES]
NACK when no response data available.
Default NO
Step
~
This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Fram Repet’TO
0(OFF), 0~255sec
[IEC60870-5-101]
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
One Ch Response: NO
>Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout:
5
Range
[0(OFF),0~255:1s]
layer timeout).
Default 30
Step
1 sec
Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
154
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Select Timeout
[IEC60870-5-101]
>COT Size :
1
>IOA Size :
2
One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
>Select Timeout:
5
[0(OFF),0~255:1]
Range
0(OFF), 0~255
Default 5
Step
1 sec
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CMD Termination
NO, YES
[IEC60870-5-101]
>CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
Range
[NO/YES]
commands other than set point commands.
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CSE Termination
NO, YES
[IEC60870-5-101]
CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
Range
[NO/YES]
point commands.
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Clock Sync’Evt
[IEC60870-5-101]
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSPTime-Tag:
CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
[NO/YES]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MSPTime-Tag
[IEC60870-5-101]
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56/CP24]
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
155
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag
[IEC60870-5-101]
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag
[IEC60870-5-101]
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Flt Time-Tag
[IEC60870-5-101]
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
[CP56/CP24]
2)
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
IEC60870-5-104
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC608705/ IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-5-104.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function
[IEC870-5-104]
>Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT4
ASDU Address:
0
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0):
120
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether IEC60870-5-104 protocol is used for communcation.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
156
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ COM Port
[IEC870-5-104]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Port Select: PORT4
ASDU Address:
0
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0):
120
Range
PORT4, PORT 5
Default PORT4
Step
~
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-104 communication.
[PORT4-PORT5]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr
[IEC60870-5-104]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
PORT4
>ASDU Address:
0
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0):
120
[1~65535:1]
Range
0~65535
Default 0
Step
1
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period
[IEC60870-5-104]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
PORT4
ASDU Address:
0
>Cyclic Period:
60
Timeout(t0):
120
[0(OFF),1~60000:1s]
Range
0(OFF), 1~60000 sec
Default 60
Step
1 sec
Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)
[IEC60870-5-104]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select:
PORT4
ASDU Address:
0
Cyclic Period:
60
>Timeout(t0):
120
[1~255:1s]
Range
1~255 sec
Default 120
Step
1
Select the Timeout for connection establishment.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t1)
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
Time Out(t2):
20
Event Perioid:
15
TCP Port No:
2404
[1~255:1s]
Range
1~255 sec
Default 15
Step
1
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
157
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t2)
1~255 sec
[IEC60870-5-104]
Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
Time Out(t2):
20
Event Perioid:
15
TCP Port No:
2404
Range
[1~255:1s]
( t2<t1).
Default 10
Step
1
Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t3)
[IEC60870-5-104]
Time Out(t1):
15
Time Out(t2):
10
>Time Out(t2):
20
Event Perioid:
15
TCP Port No:
2404
[1~255:1s]
Range
1~255 sec
Default 20
Step
1
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period
0~255 sec
[IEC60870-5-104]
Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
Time Out(t2):
20
>Event Perioid:
15
TCP Port No:
2404
Range
[0~255:1s]
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
Default 15
Step
1sec
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port
1~65535
[IEC60870-5-104]
Time Out(t1):
15
>Time Out(t2):
10
Time Out(t2):
20
Event Perioid:
15
>TCP Port:
2404
Range
[1~65535:1]
communication.
Default 2404
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP Port of ETR300 for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255
SBO Timeout:
5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
[0~255:1]
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 255
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
158
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255
SBO Timeout:
5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 255
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
[0~255:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ SBO Timeout
[IEC60870-5-104]
Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255
>SBO Timeout:
5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Range
0(OFF), 0~255
Default 5
Step
1sec
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
[0(OFF),0~255:1]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CMD Termination
[IEC60870-5-104]
Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255
SBO Timeout:
5
>CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
[NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
commands other than set point commands.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CSE Termination
[IEC60870-5-104]
Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255
SBO Timeout:
5
CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES
[NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
point commands.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Clock Sync’Evt
[IEC60870-5-104]
>CSE Termination:YES
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
MME Time-Tag: CP56
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
[NO/YES]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
159
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MSPTime-Tag
[IEC60870-5-104]
>CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56/CP24]
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MIT Time-Tag
[IEC60870-5-104]
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag
[IEC60870-5-104]
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Flt Time-Tag
[IEC60870-5-104]
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56
Range
CP56, CP24
Default CP56
Step
~
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
160
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
3)
http://www.entecene.co.kr
IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104 Common
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC608705/ COMMON” to select setting for common requirement of IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5104.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MPS Start
[COMMON]
>MSP Start:
MDP Start:
MMENA Start:
MMENB Start:
MMENC Start:
Range
1000
1500
2000
2500
8000
0 ~ 65535
Default 1000
Step
1
Set the start address of Single-point Information for IEC60870-5101/104 protocol.
[0~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MDP Start
[COMMON]
>MSP Start:
>MDP Start:
MMENA Start:
MMENB Start:
MMENC Start:
Range
1000
1500
2000
2500
8000
0 ~ 65535
Default 1500
Step
1
Set the start address of Double-point Information for IEC60870-5101/104 protocol.
[0~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENA Start
[COMMON]
>MSP Start:
MDP Start:
>MMENA Start:
MMENB Start:
MMENC Start:
Range
1000
1500
2000
2500
8000
0 ~ 65535
Default 2000
Step
1
Set the start address of Measured Value, Normalized Value for
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
[0~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENB Start
[COMMON]
>MSP Start:
>MDP Start:
MMENA Start:
>MMENB Start:
MMENC Start:
[0~65535:1]
Range
1000
1500
2000
2500
8000
0 ~ 65535
Default 2500
Step
1
Set the start address of Measured Value, Scaled Value for IEC60870-5101/104 protocol.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
161
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENC Start
[COMMON]
>MSP Start:
MDP Start:
MMENA Start:
MMENB Start:
>MMENC Start:
1000
1500
2000
2500
8000
[0~65535:1]
0 ~ 65535
Range
Default 8000
Step
1
Set the start address of Measured Value, Short Floating Point Number
for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMEND Start
0 ~ 65535
[COMMON]
>MMEND Start:
6000
MIT Start:
3000
CSC Start:
21000
CDC Start:
32000
CSEMA Start: 26000
Range
[0~65535:1]
Quality Desctiptor for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
Default 6000
Step
1
Set the start address of Measured value, Normalized Value without
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / MIT Start
0 ~ 65535
[COMMON]
>MMEND Start:
6000
>MIT Start:
3000
CSC Start:
21000
CDC Start:
32000
CSEMA Start: 26000
Range
[0~65535:1]
protocol.
Default 3000
Step
1
Set the start address of Integrated Totals for IEC60870-5-101/104
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / CSC Start
0 ~ 65535
[COMMON]
>MMEND Start:
6000
MIT Start:
3000
>CSC Start:
21000
CDC Start:
32000
CSEMA Start: 26000
Range
[0~65535:1]
protocol.
Default 21000
Step
1
Set the start address of Single Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CDC Start
0 ~ 65535
[COMMON]
>MMEND Start:
6000
MIT Start:
3000
CSC Start:
21000
>CDC Start:
32000
CSEMA Start: 26000
Range
[0~65535:1]
protocol.
Default 32000
Step
1
Set the start address of Double Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
162
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON / CSEMA Start
[COMMON]
>MIT Start:
3000
CSC Start:
21000
CDC Start:
32000
>CSEMA Start: 26000
[0~65535:1]
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 26000
Step
1
Set the start address of Set-point Command, Normalized Value for
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CSEMB Start
[COMMON]
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
[0~65535:1]
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 27000
Step
1
Set the start address of Set-point Command, Scaled Value for
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENA Start
[COMMON]
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
[0~65535:1]
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 10000
Step
1
Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values,
Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENB Start
[COMMON]
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
[0~65535:1]
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 12000
Step
1
Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values, Scaled
Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENC Start
[COMMON]
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
[0~65535:1]
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 14000
Step
1
Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating
Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
163
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.1.3. MODBUS Protocol Setup
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MODBUS/ Function
[MODBUS]
>Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT3
Slave Address:
1
TX Delay:
0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Port Select
[MODBUS]
Function:
DISABLE
>Port Select: PORT3
Slave Address:
1
TX Delay:
0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Range
PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, PORT4, PORT 5
Default PORT3
Step
~
Select MODBUS communication port.
[PORT1 – PORT5]
GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Slave Address
[MODBUS]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT3
>Slave Address:
1
TX Delay:
0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Range
1 ~ 254
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address
[1~254:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS / TX Delay
[MODBUS]
Function: DISABLE
Port Select: PORT3
Slave Address:
1
>TX Delay:
0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Range
0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Default 0.05 sec
Step
0.01
Set TCP port number of ETR300-R.
[0(OFF),0.00~300s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
164
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS /TCP/UDP select
[MODBUS]
Function:
DISABLE
Port Select: PORT3
Slave Address:
1
TX Delay:
0.05
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Range
TCP, UDP
Default TCP
Step
1
Select to use between TCP and UDP.
[TCP/UDP]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ TCP Port
[MODBUS]
>TCP Port:
>UDP Port:
Range
502
503
1 ~ 65535
Default 502
Step
1
Enter the Modbus address for TCP Port.
[1~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ UDP Port
[MODBUS]
TCP Port:
>UDP Port:
Range
502
503
1~65535
Default 503
Step
1
Enter the Modbus address for UDP Port.
[1~65535:1]
7.2.1.4. IEC61850 Protocol Setup
ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC61850 through Ethernet
ports(Eth1 or Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
IEC61850” to select setting for IEC61850 Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Function
[IEC61850]
>Function:
DISABLE
Goose Msg’: DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use IEC 61850 Protocol.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
165
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Goose Msg’
[IEC61850]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Goose Msg’: DISABLE
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Event).
7.2.1.5. SNTP Protocol Setup
ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the SNTP through Ethernet ports(Eth1 or
Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNTP” to
select setting for SNTP Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP/ Function
[SNTP]
>Function:
DISABLE
T-S Period:
3600
SNTP IP 1:
0
SNTP IP 2:
0
SNTP IP 3:
0
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use SNTP Protocol for Time Synchronization.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ T-S Period
[SNTP]
Function:
DISABLE
>T-S Period:
3600
SNTP IP 1:
0
SNTP IP 2:
0
SNTP IP 3:
0
[0~60000:1s]
Range
1~60000
Default 3600
Step
1
Enter the time period for requesting time synchronization with the time
server.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ SNTP IP 1 ~4
[SNTP]
Function:
DISABLE
T-S Period:
3600
>SNTP IP 1:
0
SNTP IP 2:
0
SNTP IP 3:
0
[0~255:1]
Range
0~255
Default 0
Step
1
Enter the IP Address 1 for SNTP server.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
166
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.1.6. SNMP Protocol Setup
ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the SNMP through Ethernet ports(Eth1 or
Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNMP” to
select setting for SNMP Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Function
[SNMP]
>Function:
DISABLE
Accept PW: 00000000
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE / ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether SNMP Protoctol Function is used or not.
This setting supports SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Accept PW
[SNMP]
Function:
DISABLE
>Accept PW: 00000000
Range
0~z
Default 0
Step
~
Set the accept password of SNMP Protoctol for SNMPv3, only.
[0~Z]
7.2.1.7. ETIMS TCP Protocol Setup
ETR300-R can be setup for communication with interface software ETIMS through Ethernet
ports(Eth1 or Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ ETIMS
TCP”.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS TCP/ TCP Port No
[ETIMS TCP]
>TCP Port No: 30000
Range
30000 ~ 40000
Default 30000
Step
1
Set the number of TCP Port for ETIMS Inteface Software.
[30000~40000:1]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
167
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.2. Port Setup
Place the curser on “PORT SETUP” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. ETR300-R communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has submenu as below.
[PORT SETUP]
>1.PORT1(232)
2.PORT2(232)
3.PORT3(485/422)
4.PORT4(ETHERNET)
5.PORT5(ETHERNET)
7.2.2.1. PORT1 and PORT2 (RS232) Setup
ETR300-R side panel PORT1 and PROT2 and related elements are set.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ PORT1(232)” to
select setting for PORT1. Also, settings for PORT2 are same as below.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ PORT1(232)/ Baud Rate
[PORT1(232)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Modem Sel:
4W
Range
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Default 9600
Step
~
Select the baud rate for PORT1.
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ Parity Bit
[PORT1(232)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
>Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Modem Sel:
4W
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN
Default NONE
Step
~
Select whether to use Parity Bit.
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
168
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ Data Bit
[PORT1(232)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
>Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Modem Sel:
4W
Range
7, 8
Default 8
Step
1
Select the Data Bit.
[7~8:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ Stop Bit
[PORT1(232)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
>Stop Bit:
1
Modem Sel:
4W
Range
1, 2
Default 1
Step
1
Select the Stop Bit.
[1~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ Modem Sel
[PORT1(232)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
>Stop Bit:
1
>Modem Sel:
4W
[2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]
Range
2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE
Default 4W
Step
~
Select a modem for communication.
 2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is
monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).
 4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and
CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
 DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used.
 NONE : Not used.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ CTS Usage
[PORT1(232)]
>CTS Usage:
ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE
>RTS Usage:
AUTO
>CTS CheckOut:
2
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use CTS signal or not.
 ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming CTS signal is
Asserted.
 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of CTS signal.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
169
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ DCD Usage
[PORT1(232)]
>CTS Usage:
ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE
>RTS Usage:
AUTO
>CTS CheckOut:
2
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether to use DCD signal.
 ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming DCD signal is
Deasserted.
 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of DCD signal
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ RTS Usage
[PORT1(232)]
>CTS Usage:
ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE
>RTS Usage:
AUTO
>CTS CheckOut:
2
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
[OFF/ON/AUTO]
Range
OFF, ON, AUTO
Default AUTO
Step
~
 ON : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always ON(Assert).
 OFF : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always OFF(Deassert).
 AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of
ETR300-R is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of
ETR300-R is off.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ CTS CheckOut
[PORT1(232)]
>CTS Usage:
ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE
>RTS Usage:
AUTO
>CTS CheckOut:
2
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
[1~255:1s]
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 2
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal
which informs that ETR300-R is ready to transfer a data. If there is no
CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not
transfer the data.
It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ DCD BackOffDly
[PORT1(232)]
>CTS Usage:
ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE
>RTS Usage:
AUTO
>CTS CheckOut:
2
>DCD BackOffDly:5000
[10~30000:10ms]
Range
10 ~ 30000 msec
Default 5000
Step
10 msec
Set a delay time of DCD signal checks which determine modem status
before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set
time, if DCD signal is ON, ETR300-R does not transfer the data and
treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
170
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ TX PreDelay
[PORT1(232)]
>TX PreDelay:
50
>TX PostDelay:
10
>BackOffRandom: OFF
Range
0 ~ 20000 msec
Default 50
Step
1 msec
Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.
[0~20000:1ms]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ TX PostDelay
[PORT1(232)]
>TX PreDelay:
50
>TX PostDelay:
10
>BackOffRandom: OFF
Range
0 ~ 20000 msec
Default 10
Step
1 msec
Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.
[0~20000:1ms]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT1(232)/ BackOffRandom
[PORT1(232)]
TX PreDelay:
10
TX PostDelay:
50
>BackOffRandom: OFF
Range
0(OFF) 1~ 65535 msec
Default OFF
Step
1 msec
Set random back off time.
[0(OFF),1~65535:1ms]
7.2.2.2. PORT3(485/422) Setup
Related elements with PORT3 in side panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ PORT3(485/422)” to select setting for
PORT3.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT3(485/422)/ Baud Rate
[PORT3(485/422)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Line Type:
RS422
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]
Range
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Default 9600
Step
~
Select the baud rate for PORT3.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
171
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT3(485/422)/ Parity Bit
[PORT3(485/422)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
>Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Line Type:
RS422
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN
Default NONE
Step
~
Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT3(485/422)/ Data Bit
[PORT3(485/422)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
>Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Line Type:
RS422
Range
7, 8
Default 8
Step
1
Select the Data Bit.
[7~8:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT3(485/422)/ Stop Bit
[PORT3(485/422)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
>Stop Bit:
1
Line Type:
RS422
Range
1, 2
Default 1
Step
1
Select the Stop Bit.
[1~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT3(485/422)/ Line Type
[PORT3(485/422)]
>Baud Rate:
9600
Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
>Line Type:
RS422
Range
RS422, RS485
Default RS422
Step
~
Select a physical port for communication.
[RS422/RS485]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT3(485/422)/ CA Delay
[PORT3(485/422)]
>Parity Bit:
NONE
Data Bit:
8
Stop Bit:
1
Line Type:
RS422
>CA Delay:
1.00
Range
0.00 ~ 240.00
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set a delay time from data reced till transferring a reply data.
[0.00~240.00:0.01]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
172
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.2.3. PORT4 and PORT5(EHTERNET) Setup
Related elements with PORT4 and 5 in side panel of ETR300-R are set Move to “MAIN MENU/
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ PORT4 or 5 (ETHERNET)” to select
setting.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT4/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>IP Addr Oct1:
0
IP Addr Oct2:
0
IP Addr Oct3:
0
>IP Addr Oct4:
0
>Gateway Oct1:
0
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0*
Step
1
Select the IP Address for ETR300-R.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
①
[0~255:1]
②
③
④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this setti g can vary accor ing t
the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT4/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>Gateway Oct1:
0
Gateway Oct2:
0
Gateway Oct3:
0
>Gateway Oct4:
0
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0*
Step
1
Select the Gateway Address.
Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
①
[0~255:1]
②
③
④
Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this e t n can vary ccording to
the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT4/ Subnet Mask Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>SubnetMask Oct1: 0
SubnetMask Oct2: 0
>SubnetMask Oct3: 0
>SubnetMask Oct4: 0
[0~255:1]
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0*
Step
1
Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETR300-R.
Subnet Mask Address : 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
①
②
③
④
Subnet Mask Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to
the option type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
173
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT4/ K-Alv Function
DISABLE, ENABLE
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00
K-Alv Interval:
2
>K-Alv Retry:
3
Range
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
status check function.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT4/ K-Alv Idle Time
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00
K-Alv Interval:
2
>K-Alv Retry:
3
Range
[0(OFF),1~600:1s]
communication connecting maintainance status.
Default 4
Step
1sec
If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT4/ K-Alv Interval
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00
>K-Alv Interval:
2
>K-Alv Retry:
3
Range
[0(OFF),1~600:1s]
reply during the setting time, check again the status.
Default 2
Step
1sec
After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / PORT4/ K-Alv Retry
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00
K-Alv Interval:
2
>K-Alv Retry:
3
[0~255:1]
Range
0~255
Default 3
Step
1
Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as
the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail
and close the communication connection.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
174
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / PORT4/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>IP Addr Oct1:
0
IP Addr Oct2:
0
IP Addr Oct3:
0
IP Addr Oct4:
0
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0*
Step
1
Select the IP Address for ETR300-R.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
②
[0~255:1]
②
③
④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this setti g can vary accor ing t
the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / PORT4/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>Gateway Oct1:
0
Gateway Oct2:
0
Gateway Oct3:
0
Gateway Oct4:
0
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0*
Step
1
Select the Gateway Address.
Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
②
[0~255:1]
②
③
④
Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this e t n can vary ccording to
the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / PORT4/ SubnetMask Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT4(ETHERNET)]
>SubnetMask Oct1: 0
SubnetMask Oct2: 0
SubnetMask Oct3: 0
SubnetMask Oct4: 0
[0~255:1]
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0*
Step
1
Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETR300-R.
Subnet Mask Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
②
②
③
④
Subnet Mask Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to
the option type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
175
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.3. Dialup Modem Setup
Place the curser on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
ETR300-R supports a Hayes compatible Modem on RS232 Port(Port1 and Port2) for remote dial
up access using DNP3. For details, refer to “DNP3 Protocol Technical Manual”.
DIAL MODEM menu has the sub-menu as below.
[DIALUP MODEM]
>1.CALLING STRING
2.CALLING NUMBER
3.INITIAL STRING
4.CONNECTION
The settings for the dialup modem are shown below;
7.2.3.1. Calling String
In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ CALLING STRING”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING
[CALLING STRING]
>CS:
ATD
Range
ATD, ATDT, ATDP
Default ATD
Step
~
Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them.
[! ~ z]
 ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
 ATDT : Tone Dial
 ATDP : Pulse Dial
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
176
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.3.2. Calling Number
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/
CALLING NUMBER”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER
[CALLING NUMBER]
>CN:0123456789XXXXXX
Range
~
Default ~
Step
~
Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number].
Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space
[! ~ z]
shall be filled up by ‘X’.
7.2.3.3. Initial String
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM / INITIAL
STRING”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING
[INITIAL STRING]
>IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
&D2 +CRM=129
[space ~ z]
Range
Default
~
AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
&D2 +CRM=129
Step
~
Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
character, space or special character.
ETR300-R should be reset before making a phone call(connection).
NOTE : Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
177
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.3.4. Connection
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/
CONNECTION”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res’ TO
[CONNECTION]
>Cmd Res’ TO:
Connect TO:
Idle Time:
Range
2
30
60
[0~255:1s]
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 2
Step
1 sec
Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO
[CONNECTION]
>Cmd Res’ TO:
2
>Connect TO:
30
Idle Time:
60
[0~255:1s]
Range
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 30
Step
1 sec
Setting the Modem connection waiting time.
If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a
connection failure as the status of modem failure is maintained for the
setting time
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time
[CONNECTION]
Cmd Res’ TO:
2
Connect TO:
30
>Idle Time:
60
[0~255:1s]
Range
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 60
Step
1 sec
Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
178
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2.4. FTP-SSL
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL to file transfer in
order to configure protocol SSL.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL / Function
[FTP-SSL]
>Function:
DISABLE
Admin PW: 00000000
User1 PW: 00000000
DISABLE / ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
-
Set whether FTP-SSL Fucntion is used or not.
[0~255:1s]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/FTP-SSL/Admin PW
[FTP-SSL]
Function:
DISABLE
>Admin PW: 00000000
User1 PW: 00000000
[0~z]
0~z
Range
Default 0
Step
~
Set the administer password for FTP-SSL.
Administer’s log-in account name is ‘entec_admin’ with read and write
authority.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL/User1 PW
[FTP-SSL]
Function:
DISABLE
Admin PW: 00000000
>User1 PW: 00000000
Range
0~z
Default 0
Step
~
Set the user password for FTP-SSL.
[0~z]
User 1’s log-in account name is ‘entec_user1’with read-only authority.
7.2.5. Wifi
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI” to set related Wifi.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/WiFi SSID
0~z
[WIFI]
>WiFi SSID:00000000
WiFi P/W: 00000000
Range
[0~z]
Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wifi for Wifi access.
Default 0
Step
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
~
179
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ WiFi P/W
[WIFI]
WiFi SSID:00000000
>WiFi P/W: 00000000
Range
0~z
Default 0
Step
~
For wifi access, set WIFI password.
[0~z]
7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup
Place the curser on “EVENT&ETC” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among ETR300-R communication protocol
setting items.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP” to
select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Method
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AEvt Method:
OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO
Daily Max I:DISABLE
Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT
BI EvtBuff Size:256
[OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]
Range
OFF, TH, DB, BOTH
Default OFF
Step
~
This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event
Active: in DNP point map.
 OFF : AI point event is not occurred.
 TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than
Threshold value.
 DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the
Deadband value
 BOTH : TH and DB all used.
 Use ETR300-R interface program to setting the “Event Active”
activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and
Deadband value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
180
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Skip at Ft
NO, YES
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AEvt Method:
OFF
>AEvt Skip at Ft: NO
Daily Max I:DISABLE
Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT
BI EvtBuff Size:256
Range
[NO/YES]
during Fault pickup.
Default NO
Step
~
Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Daily Max I
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AEvt Method:
OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO
>Daily Max I:DISABLE
Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT
BI EvtBuff Size:256
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current
transmission.
 DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event..
 ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Flt ‘I’ Evt
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AEvt Method:
OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO
>Daily Max I:DISABLE
>Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT
BI EvtBuff Size:256
[NO/YES/1SHOT]
Range
NO, YES, 1SHOT
Default 1SHOT
Step
~
When occurring fault, set whether or not record AI point which is
related with fault such as fault current.
 NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
 YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence
to Event.
NOTE :
The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when it
becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
181
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI EvtBuff Size
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AEvt Method:
OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO
Daily Max I:DISABLE
>Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT
>BI EvtBuff Size:256
Range
32, 64, 128, 256
Default 256
Step
~
Set the Binary Queue Size
[32/64/128/256]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI EvtBuff Size
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256
BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL
Range
32, 64, 128, 256
Default 256
Step
~
Set the Binary Queue Size
>[32/64/128/256]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/EVENT&ETC/ CI EvtBuff Size
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
>CI EvtBuff Size:256
BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL
CI Evt Method: ALL
[32/64/128/256]
Range
32, 64, 128, 256
Default 256
Step
~
Set the binary event mode.
 ALL : all status is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Method
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256
>BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL
CI Evt Method: ALL
[ALL/LAST]
Range
ALL, LAST
Default ALL
Step
~
Set the analog event mode.
 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
182
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Method
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256
BI Evt Method: ALL
>AI Evt Method: ALL
CI Evt Method: ALL
[ALL/LAST]
Range
ALL, LAST
Default ALL
Step
~
Set the analog event mode.
 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Method
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256
>BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL
[ALL/LAST]
Range
ALL, LAST
Default ALL
Step
~
Set the counter event mode.
 ALL : all counter is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / DO Cmd at Local
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL
>DO Cmd at Local:OFF
>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL
Range
OFF,ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Set whether or not to control DO command on local control status.
[ALL/LAST]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Syn’ Ref
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL
>DO Cmd at Local:OFF
>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL
[LOCAL/GMT]
Range
LOCAL,GMT
Default LOCAL
Step
~
Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time
Synching with the master station.
NOTE :
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated
with UTC(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time internal clock in ETR300-R can be changed incorrectly at
time synchronization.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
183
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Tag Type
[EVENT&ETC SETUP]
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL
>DO Cmd at Local:OFF
>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL
Range
LOCAL,GMT
Default LOCAL
Step
~
Set the time type for occurred events in Communication.
[LOCAL/GMT]
NOTE :
This setting is set to be UTC and the setting values associated
with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time of event transmitted is not correct.
7.2.7. Save Setting
This menu allows you to save the changed settings of the GENERAL menu. The procedure for
storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
184
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8. GROUP SETTING
Place the curser on “GROUP SETTING” in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[GROUP SETTING]
>1.GROUP 1
2.GROUP 2
3.GROUP 3
4.GROUP 4
5.GROUP 5
6.GROUP 6
The GROUP SETTING menu has six identical subgroup settings. The setting group which is
turned on "SET GROUP" LED is applied to the ETR300-R. The [GROUP SELECT] button is used
to select a set group applied to present ETR300-R. Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP
SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group
locally.
NOTE : If ‘LOOP CONTROL’ function is activated, selected group is not changed to press
the [GROUP SELEC] button.
[GROUP 1]
>1.RECLOSER
2.SECTIONALIZER
3.MONITORING
*.SAVE SETTING
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.
All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into RECLOSER,
SECTIONALIZER and MONITORING sub menus.
When set to "RECLOSER" type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE
/ CONTROL TYPE”, only "RECLOSER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated
("SECTIONALIZER" menu is not operated).
When set to "SECTIONALIZER" type, only "SECTIONALIZER" and "MONITORING" menus
are operated ("RECLOSER" menu is not operated).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
185
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1. Recloser
Place the curser on “RECLOSER” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu sets the protection elements that operate when the recloser control type is set.
[RECLOSER]
>1.AUTO RECLOSING
>2.TIME OC-PHA
3.TIME OC-GND
4.TIME OC-NEQ
5.INST OC-PHA
6.INST OC-GND
7.INST OC-SEF
8.INST OC-NEQ
9.INST OCL-PHA
10.INST OCL-GND
11.INST OCL-NEQ
12.INRUSH RES’/CLPU
13.HARMONIC BLOCK
14.DIRECTION
15.BROKEN CONDUCT
16.VOLTAGE
17.FREQUENCY
18.POWER
19.DEMAND
20.HOTLINE TAG
21.USER CURVE
22.OTHERS
Protection Elements - ANSI Designations
In case of Recloser control type, the protection elements are as follows;
Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations(1/2)
Protective Elements
Five shot auto reclosing
ANSI
LCD Menu
Designations
79
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER /AUTO RECLOSING
Phase fast/delay time overcurrent
51P-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA
Ground fast/delay time overcurrent
51G-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-GND
51Q(46)-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ
Phase instantaneous overcurrent
50P-1
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA
Ground instantaneous overcurrent
50G-1
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND
Sensitive Earth Fault protection
50SG
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-SEF
50Q(46)-1
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC -NEQ
Phase instantaneous lockout overcurrent
50P-2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC-PHA
Ground instantaneous lockout overcurrent
50G-2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC-GND
Negative squence fast/delay time overcurrent
Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
186
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations(2/2)
ANSI
Protective Elements
LCD Menu
Designations
Negative sequence instantaneous lockout overcurrent
50Q(46)-2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC -NEQ
Inrush restraint
CLPU-1
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU /
INRUSH RESTRAINT
Cold load pickup
CLPU-2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU /
COLD LOAD PICKUP
2nd Harmonic Block
2HB
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HARMONIC BLOCK /
2ND BLOCK
5th Harmonic Block
5HB
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HARMONIC BLOCK /
5TH BLOCK
Phase directional time control
67P
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE
Ground directional time control
67G
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND
Sensitive Earth Fault directional time control
67SG
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / SEF
Negative sequence directional time control
67Q
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ
Broken conduct
46BC
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT
Under voltage 1/2
27-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER
VOLTAGE 1,2
Under voltage restoration
27R
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV
RESTROATION
Over voltage 1/2
59-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER
VOLTAGE 1,2
Neutral over voltage 1/2
64N-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE /
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE 1,2
Over voltage restoration
59R
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV
RESTROATION
Under frequency 1/2
81U-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/
UNDER FREQUENCY 1, 2
Over frequency1/2
81O-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/ OVER
FREQUENCY 1,2
Frequency decay 1/2
81D-1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/
FREQUENCY DECAY 1,2
Frequency restoration
81R
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/
FREQUENCY RESTROATION
Forward power
32FP
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD
POWER
Direction power
32P
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION
POWER
Phase demand current
49P
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE
Ground demand current
49G
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / GROUND
Negative sequence demand current
49Q
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / NEG SEQ’
Active demand power
49W
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / ACTIVE POWER
Reactive demand power
49V
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / REACTIVE POWER
Hotline tag
-
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HOTLINE TAG
Sequence coordination
-
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / OTHERS / Seq’ Coordi’
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
187
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Protection Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations
SOURCE
ETR300-R Controller
46BC
OPTION
51Q
50Q
1,2
1,2
49Q
Isef
50SG
ZCT
3I0
67SG
In
51G
50G
1,2
1,2
51P
50P
1,2
1,2
32P
32FP
49W
49V
49G
In
CT
3WYE
Ia, Ib, Ic
Calc.
I1
Calc.
I2
Calc.
3I0
67P
67Q
67G
Calc.
V1
Calc.
V2
Calc.
3V0
Calc.
Pow'
27
59
1,2
1,2
2HB
5HB
49P
81
O/U/D
1,2
RECLOSER
3VD
64N
1,2
27R
52
59R
81R
CLPU
1,2
79
3VD
*. NOTE )
LOAD
: Overcurrent elements
Figure 8-1. Protection Elements Block Diagram
All elements of overcurrent protection consist of dual-relays ((+) and (-)) of individual operations.
Dual-relays can be operated in several ways depending on the configuration of the line system and
the user's request. An example of dual-relay application is as follows;
1)
Ring Line System Application
By using directional elements and dual-relays (+) and (-), it is possible to protect simultaneously
both sides of the source line on ring line system operation. After setting the directional type as
forward, when using the dual-relays (function is set to ENABLE). The (+) element does fault
protection about the forward direction and the (-) element does the fault protection about the
reverse direction.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
188
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
The (+) element operates as the setting type of the directional element, and the (-) element operates
as the opposite direction to the setting type of the directional element. If the type of the directional
element is set as NONE, the (+) and (-) elements operate simultaneously regardless of the direction
of the fault.
Forward powerflow
S1
S2
ETR300-R
(+) Source Side
(-) Source Side
Reverse powerflow
Figure 8-2. Ring Line System Application
2)
Radial Line System Application
When working in a radial line system, the directional element does not work and only one of the
(+) or (-) elements is used. ((+) element is recommended)
Powerflow
ETR300-R
Load
Source Side
Figure 8-3. Radial Line System Application
3)
Overcurrent Alarm elements Application
In the case of time overcurrent elements, each function can be used for trip or alarm purposes.
Thus, one of the dual-relays can be operated as the trip element and another one is operated as the
alarm element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
189
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.1. Auto Reclosing (79)
ETR300-R provides Auto Reclosing (79) when a system failure of the line occurs which interrupts
the system at high speed and automatically recloses after a certain period of time passes after
interruption.
When it is a temporay fault due to contact of external object, lightning, or loss of insulation, the
system will automatically reclose after high speed interruption, resulting in minimization of failure
range and power outage period.
Auto Reclosing function is applied when fault current is larger than the fault pickup current, the
system will repeat trip and reclosing according to the sequence. Then, it will be LOCKOUT or
return to the normal sequence status after AUTO Reset TIME.
The sequence of Auto Reclosing consists of ‘Reset’, ‘Cycle’ and ‘Lockout’.
Figure 8-4. Protection Elements Block Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
190
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1) LOCKOUT
In the situations stated below, the Lockout occurs. In the Lockout state, the system doesn’t reclose
automatically, so the user should close Recloser(or CB) manually at the site or remotely.
•
In case when the failure occurs continuously and the recloser(or CB) has repeated trip for the
number of times set previously. (Permanent failure)
•
When the user opens the recloser(or CB) manually
•
In case of trip due to Instantaneous lockout overcurrent element
•
In case of trip when fault current is larger than pickup current of Inrush Restraint function
during Inrush Restraint
•
In case of trip due to the current larger than CLPU pickup current for the period of CLPU
operation
•
In case of trip due to protection elements (Voltage(27,59), Frequency(81) and Demand, etc.)
excluding OverCurrent Trip.
•
In case of trip due to the Hot Line Tag function
•
In case of Overcurrent Trip while Auto Reclosing function is disabled (‘RECLOSE ENABLE’
Lamp OFF)
This “Figure 8-5. Lockout Sequence Operation” shows the typical protection sequence of lockout
after 4 times of OCR trips when the total operation time is set as 4.
AMP
(1)
FULT
CURRENT
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
*LOCKOUT*
PICKUP
CURRENT
NORMAL
CURRENT
TIME
Reset
Cycle
Lockout
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC
Figure 8-5. Lockout Sequence Operation
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
191
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
After Recloser(or CB) is closed manually at site or remote controller from the status of Lockout,
and it passes Lockout Reset Time. Lockout status will convert into reset, then normal reclosing
fucntiond will be activated.
2) RESET
RESET means the system has returned to normal state.
The reset occurs in the following
situations.
 Lockout  Reset : In case when Recloser(or CB) is closed manually at the site or remotely and
the Lockout Reset Time has passed.
 Cycle  Reset : While it is in sequence, the over current is removed before lockout as well as
the Auto Reset Time has passed.
The “Figure 8-6. Reset Sequence Operation” shows the sequence where the system return to
normal status because the overcurrent is removed after 2 times of reclosing operations when the
total operation time is set as 4.
AMP
(1)
FULT
CURRENT
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
AUTO RESET
TIME
＂Reset T(A.R)＂
*RESET*
PICKUP
CURRENT
NORMAL
CURRENT
TIME
Reset
Cycle
Reset
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
Figure 8-6. Reset Sequence Operation
If fault occurs during the Auto Reset Time, only remaining reclosing operations will be performed
and then, the system will lockout.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
192
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3) CYCLE
It indicates the current sequence status. It occurs when OCR fault trips onyly except Instantaneous
lockout overcurrent elements, and maintain as cycle until operation time reach to the setting.
During Cycle, Later certain period after fault trip, it automatically operates reclosing function.
(But, Cycle occurs only when Auto Reclosing is enabled(‘RECLOSE ENABLE’ LED ON)
8.1.1.1. Auto Reclosing Setup
After a fault has occurred, the reclosing element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose
interval time expires. The number of lockout operation setting can be programmed from one to
five, and each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer.
If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will
continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the
operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts. At this moment,
if make close operation remotely or locally, Lockout is released and fault detecting is activated.
Also, if the fault is temporary, the Lockout sequence of the Recloser is Rest by Reset logic.
If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic.
The reclosing element can be disabled in the GROUP settings by one operating lockout or by
[RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel.
AUTO RECLOSING menu is classified as below;
[AUTO RECLOSING]
>1.FUNCTION
2.OPERATIONS
3.INTERVALS
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
193
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Each of the setting items under AUTO RECLOSING menu are described below.
Function Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / Reclose Fun
[FUNCTION]
>Reclose Fun: ENABLE
Range
ENABLE, DISABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
-
Select whether to enable or disable the reclsoing function.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
This setting is used to change the reclosing function of ETR300-R.
Operations Setup
Set the operation of phase fault, ground fault, SEF fault and negative sequence fault. The operation
settings are applied individually according to the fault type. OPERATION menu is classified as
below;
[OPERATIONS]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ’
Auto reclosing function of ETR300-R supports maximum of 5 reclosing shots. It is possible to set
the curve (FAST or DELAY) to be applied for each shot. This feature allows to implement the
‘Save Fuse’ scheme by using the combination of 2 Fast and 2 Delay curves (total 4 shots trip
lockout i.e. first and second shot should be fast trip time curves and third and fourth shots should
be delayed trip time curves).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
194
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Each of the setting items under the OPERATIONS menu are described below.
1) Operations Setup – PHASE
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / OPERATIONS / PHASE / Lockout Shots
[PHASE]
>Lockout Shots:
4
Sh1 Fast Active:YES
>Sh2 Fast Active:YES
>Sh3 Fast Active: NO
>Sh4 Fast Active: NO
[1~5: 1]
Range
1~5
Default 4
Step
1
Select the total number of the Phase trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the Phase trip
operations.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh1 Fast Active
[PHASE]
Lockout Shots:
4
>Sh1 Fast Active:YES
>Sh2 Fast Active:YES
>Sh3 Fast Active: NO
>Sh4 Fast Active: NO
[NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
st
For 1 trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
When YES is applied, fast T-C curve of time overcurrent and delay T-C
are operated together, on the other hand, when NO is applied, only
delay T-C is operated.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh2 Fast Active
[PHASE]
Lockout Shots:
4
Sh1 Fast Active:YES
>Sh2 Fast Active:YES
Sh3 Fast Active: NO
Sh4 Fast Active: NO
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
For 2nd trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE / Sh3 Fast Active
[PHASE]
Lockout Shots:
4
Sh1 Fast Active:YES
Sh2 Fast Active:YES
>Sh3 Fast Active: NO
Sh4 Fast Active: NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
-
For 3rd trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
195
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh4 Fast Active
[PHASE]
Lockout Shots:
4
Sh1 Fast Active:YES
Sh2 Fast Active:YES
Sh3 Fast Active: NO
>Sh4 Fast Active: NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
-
For 4th trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh5 Fast Active
[PHASE]
Sh1 Fast Active:YES
Sh2 Fast Active:YES
Sh3 Fast Active: NO
Sh4 Fast Active: NO
>Sh5 Fast Active: NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
-
For 5th trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]
2) Operations Setup – GROUND
The ground operation settings process is the same as the phase operation.
3) Operations Setup – SEF
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / OPERATIONS / SEF / Lockout Shots
[SEF]
>Lockout Shots:
Range
4
1~5
Default 4
Step
1
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations.
[1~5:1]
This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip
operations.
4) Operations Setup – NEG SEQ’
The negative sequence operation settings process is the same as the phase operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
196
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Intervals Setup
Set the reclosing time of phase fault, ground fault, SEF fault and negative sequence fault. The
reclosing time is applied individually according to the fault type. INTERVALS menu is classified
as below;
[INTERVALS]
>1.PHASE/NEG SEQ’
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.OTHER
Each of the setting items under the INTERVALs menu are described below.
1) Intervals Setup – PHASE/NEG SEQ’
Set the reclosing interval time of phase fault and negative sequence fault at the same time.
However the interval time is applied according to phase fault and negative sequence fault,
respectively.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 1
0.10 ~ 1800.00 sec
[PHASE/NEG SEQ’]
>Reclose 1:
0.60
Reclose 2:
2.00
Reclose 3:
15.00
Reclose 4:
15.00
Range
[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]
first trip operation and the close operation.
Default 0.60
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 2
0.10 ~ 1800.00 sec
[PHASE/NEG SEQ’]
Reclose 1:
0.60
>Reclose 2:
2.00
Reclose 3:
15.00
Reclose 4:
15.00
Range
[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]
the second trip operation and the close operation.
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the second reclose interval time between
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
197
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 3
0.10 ~ 1800.00 sec
[PHASE/NEG SEQ’]
Reclose 1:
0.06
Reclose 2:
2.00
>Reclose 3:
15.00
Reclose 4:
15.00
Range
[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]
the third trip operation and the close operation.
Default 15.00
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the third reclose interval time between
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 4
0.10 ~ 1800.00 sec
[PHASE/NEG SEQ’]
Reclose 1:
0.06
Reclose 2:
2.00
Reclose 3:
15.00
>Reclose 4:
15.00
Range
[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]
the fourth trip operation and the close operation.
Default 15.00
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the fourth reclose interval time between
2) Intervals Setup – GROUND
The ground interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.
3) Intervals Setup – SEF
The SEF interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.
4) Intervals Setup – OTHERS
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reset T(A.R)
[OTHERS]
>Reset T(A.R): 30.00
Reset T(L.O): 10.00
Reclose Wait: 60.00
[0.10~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.10~ 600.00 sec
Default 30.00
Step
0.01 sec
It is to select Reset time during auto reclosing.
During reclosing sequence operation, if current is back to normal for this
set time, recloser sequence is Reset. Generally, Reclosing reset time shall
be set longer than present reclose sequence time. During reclose sequence
time, if a fault current is removed, ‘Reset T(A.R)’ starts and during ‘Reset
T(A.R)’, a fault is detected again, Reset timer is reset.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
198
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reset T(L.O)
[OTHERS]
Reset T(A.R): 30.00
>Reset T(L.O): 10.00
Reclose Wait: 60.00
[0.10~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.10~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
To set Lockout reset time.
After recloser is closed by locally or remotely, within this set time, auto
reclosing is not activated. It is to eliminate reclosing sequence if a fault
current is detected after manual closing, and to have waiting time for
feeder stabilization. After this set time, Recloser function is activated.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reclose Wait
[OTHERS]
Reset T(A.R): 30.00
Reset T(L.O): 10.00
>Reclose Wait: 60.00
[0(OFF),0.10~600.0s]
Range
0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 60.00
Step
0.01 sec
Reclose signal is output after reclose interval time, when reclosing
operation does not operate due to close power supply problem, it will
set time to maintain recloser signal. If reclosing operation does not
work during this period, it will be directly LOCK OUT even though
reclosing sequence is remained.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
199
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.2. Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51P)
The ETR300-R has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element
contained in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current
inputs. The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase
time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus phse fault current for tripping that is used for
an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time
overcurrent element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to
respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external devices
on the distribution system. US, ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current
curves are included in the ETR300-R.
A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the
US, ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the
recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as
mechanical relay reset.
Phase time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent malfunction of
inrush current generated when relcloser or nearby power distribution device is closed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
200
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
‘Time OC-PHASE’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[Time OC-PHA]
>1.(+)PHASE FAST
2.(+)PHASE DELAY
3.(-)PHASE FAST
4.(-)PHASE DELAY
Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - PHASE element.
1) (+) PHASE FAST Setup
(+) PHASE FAST setting menu is available for setting (+) PHASE FAST Curve.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / (+)PHASE FAST / Function
[(+)PHASE FAST]
>Function:
TRIP
Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
Range
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
Default TRIP
Step
-
Set the function of (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent as enable or
disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm..
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / (+)PHASE FAST / Pickup
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
Range
10 ~ 1600A
Default 500A
Step
1A
Set pickup current of (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
201
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Curve
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Function:
ENABLE
Pickup:
500
>Curve:
[US-VI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[Curves : total 62]
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Range
Default US-VI
Select desired curve type for (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent
element.
The T-C curves supported by the ETR300-R are as follows;




US
-
US-NI : US Normally Inverse
-
US-VI : US Very Inverse
-
US-EI : US Extremely Inverse
-
US-STI : US Short Time Inverse
-
US-STVI : US Short Time Very Inverse
ANSI /IEEE
-
IEEE-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse
-
IEEE-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse
-
IEEE-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse
IEC
-
IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse
-
IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse
-
IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse
-
IEC-STI : IEC Short Time Inverse
-
IEC-LTI : IEC Long Time Inverse
ES
-
ES-NI : KEPCO ESB Normally Inverse
-
ES-VI : KEPCO ESB Very Inverse
-
ES-EI : KEPCO ESB Extremely Inverse
-
ES-LTVI : KEPCO ESB Long Time Very Inverse

Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s

KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4

User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4

McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32

Fuse curves : RI, HR, FR
For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation
characteristic setting range”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
202
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range
Setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Curve
A(101)
B(117)
C(133)
D(116)
E(132)
IEC-EI
K(162)
L(107)
M(118)
N(104)
Setting
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Curve
IEC-NI
P(115)
R(105)
T(161)
V(137)
IEC-VI
W(138)
Y(120)
Z(134)
1(102)
Setting
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Curve
2(135)
3(140)
4(106)
5(114)
6(136)
7(152)
8(113)
8*(111)
9(131)
11(141)
Setting
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Curve
13(142)
14(119)
15(112)
16(139)
18(151)
N1
N2
N3
N4
US-NI
Setting
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Curve
US-VI
US-EI
ES-NI
ES-VI
USER-1
USER-2
USER-3
USER-4
DEF-1S
DEF-10S
Setting
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Curve
IEEE-NI
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
US-STI
US-STVI
IEC-LTI
IEC-STI
ES-LTVI
ES-EI
RI
Setting
61
62
Curve
HR
FR
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Time Dial
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Function:
ENABLE
Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
Range
0.01 ~ 15.00
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
time add application.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Time Add
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Function:
ENABLE
Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
>Time Add.:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
203
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA /PHASE FAST / M.R.T
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Range
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Reset Method
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
[INST/LINEAR]
INST, LINEAR
Range
Default INST
Step
~
In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)PHASE
FAST overcurrent protection is reset.
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT
(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[(+)PHASE FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
>Low Set DT:
OFF
[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]
0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 0(OFF),
Step
0.01 sec
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.
2)
(+) PHASE DELAY Setup
‘(+) PHASE DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.
3) (-) PHASE FAST Setup
‘(-) PHASE FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
4) (-) PHASE DELAY Setup
‘(-) PHASE DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
204
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.3. Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51G)
The ETR300-R has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element in
the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground
time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution
systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The ground time
overcurrent element provides a time delay versus gournd fault current for tripping that is used for
an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time
overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both PROTECTION ENABLED and
GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely
coordinate with other protection elements within the ETR300-R and other external devices on the
distribution system. ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER and non-standard time current curves are
included in the ETR300-R.
A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with
other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the
distribution system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset
instantaneously when the current level measured by the ETR300-R drops below the pickup setting
for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device
necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset.
Ground time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent malfunction of
inrush current generated when relcloser or distribution device is closed.
‘Time OC-GROUND’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[Time OC-GND]
>1.(+)GROUND FAST
2.(+)GROUND DELAY
3.(-)GROUND FAST
4.(-)GROUND DELAY
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
205
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - GROUND element.
1) (+) GROUND FAST Setup
(+) GROUND FAST setting menu is available for setting (+) GROUND FAST Curve.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Function
[(+)GROUND FAST]
>Function:
TRIP
Pickup:
250
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM,
Range
Default TRIP
Step
-
Set the function of (+) GROUND FAST fast time overcurrent as
enable or disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Pickup
[(+)GROUND FAST]
Function:
TRIP
>Pickup:
250
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
Range
10 ~ 1600A
Default 250A
Step
1A
Set pickup current of (+)GROUND FAST time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Curve
[(+)GROUND FAST]
Function:
TRIP
Pickup:
250
>Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[10~1600:1A]
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default US-VI
Select desired curve type for (+)GROUND FAST time overcurrent
element. For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current
operation characteristic setting range”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
206
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Time Dial
[(+)GROUND FAST]
Function:
TRIP
Pickup:
250
Curve:
[US-VI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
time add application.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Time Add
[(+)GROUND FAST]
Function:
TRIP
Pickup:
250
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
>Time Add.:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~15.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / M.R.T
[(+)GROUND FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Reset Method
[(+)GROUND FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
[INST/LINEAR]
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step
~
In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level,
(+)GROUND FAST fast overcurrent protection is reset.
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT
(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
207
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST /Low Set DT
[(+)GROUND FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
>Low Set DT:
OFF
[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]
0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00sec
Range
Default 0(OFF),
Step
0.01sec
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.
2)
(+) GROUND DELAY Setup
‘(+) GROUND DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.
3) (-) GROUND FAST Setup
‘(-) GROUND FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
4) (-) GROUND DELAY Setup
‘(-) GROUND DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
208
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.4. Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51Q(46))
The ETR300-R has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence
element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence
overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The
negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus negative sequence fault
current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current
pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent
element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external
devices on the distribution system.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode
applies to the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to
coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment
on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset
instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for
delay time as mechanical relay reset.
Negative sequence time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent
malfunction of inrush current generated when relcloser or nearby distribution device is closed.
‘Time OC-NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[Time OC-NEQ]
>1.(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST
2.(+)NEG SEQ’ DELAY
3.(-)NEG SEQ’ FAST
4.(-)NEG SEQ’ DELAY
Following setting is used to program ‘Time OC-NEQ’ elements.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
209
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1) (+) NEG SEQ’ FAST Setup
(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST setting menu is available for setting (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST Curve.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Function
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
Range
Default TRIP
Step
-
Set the function of negative sequence fast time overcurrent as enable or
disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Pickup
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
Range
OFF, 1.0 ~ 1600.0A
Default 500.0A
Step
1A
Set pickup current of (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Curve
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
500
>Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[curves : total 62]
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default US-VI
Select desired curve type for (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent
element. For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current
operation characteristic setting range”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
210
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Time Dial
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
500
Curve:
[US-VI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
time add application.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Time Add
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
Pickup:
500
Threshold:
1.00
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
>Time Add.:
0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / M.R.T
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
Threshold:
1.00
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Reset Method
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
[INST/LINEAR]
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step
~
In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)NEG
SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent protection is reset.
 .INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT
(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
211
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST /Low Set DT
[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
>Low Set DT:
OFF
0(OFF),0.01~600.00s
0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default OFF
Step
0.01 sec
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.
2)
(+) NEG SEQ’ DELAY Setup
‘(+) NEG SEQ’ DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.
3) (-) NEG SEQ’ FAST Setup
‘(-) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
4) (-) NEG SEQ’ DELAY Setup
‘(-) NEG SEQ’ DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
212
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.5. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P1)
The ETR300-R has a phase instantaneous overccurent element. This element in the ETR300-R, is
set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a
definite time delay versus phse high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED
on user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.
‘INST OC - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[INST OC - PHA]
>1.(+)INST OC-PHA
2.(-)INST OC-PHA
Following settings are used to program ‘INST OC – PHASE’ elements.
1) (+)INST OC-PHA Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Function
[(+)INST OC-PHA]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
Range
ENABLE, DISABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Set the function (+) INST OC -PHASE as enable or disable.
DISABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function operates.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Pickup
[(+)INST OC-PHA]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[10~20000:1A]
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current for (+) INST OC -PHASE element.
This value is the minimum operating current for (+) INST OC PHASE element
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
213
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Time Delay
0.00~600.00 sec
[(+)INST OC-PHA]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set time delay of trip operation for (+) INST OC -PHASE element. If
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Active Shot
[(+)INST OC-PHA]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Shot:
1
[1~5:1shot]
Range
1~5 shot
Default 1
Step
1shot
Sets the time when this element is activated.
If Active Shot = 1, then (+)INST OC -PHASE element is enabled for
the first trip operation and next trip operations.
2) (-) INST OC – PHA Setup
(-) INST OC-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OC-PHA settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
214
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.6. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G1)
The ETR300-R has a ground instantaneous overccurent element. This element in the ETR300-R, is
set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a
definite time delay versus ground high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the ground setting and both PROTECTION
ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.
‘INST OC - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OC - GND]
>1.(+)INST OC-GND
2.(-)INST OC-GND
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –GND’ element.
1) (+) INST OC-GND Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Function
[(+)INST OC-GND]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
Range
ENABLE, DISABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Set the function of ground instantaneous overccurent element as enable
or disable.
DISABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on the ground does not
operate.
ENABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on ground operates.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Pickup
10 ~ 20000 A
[(+)INST OC-GND]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
Range
[10~20000:1A]
This value is the minimum operating current of this element.
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of ground instantaneous overccurent element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
215
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Time Delay
0.00~600.00 sec
[(+)INST OC-GND]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
set for 0, trips immediately on gorund fault current without delay.
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set Time Delay for ground instantaneous overccurent element. If it is
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Active Shot
[(+)INST OC-GND]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Shot:
1
[1~5:1shot]
Range
1~5 shot
Default 1
Step
1shot
Sets the time when this element is activated.
If Active Shot = 1, then ground instantaneous overccurent element is
enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.
2) (-) INST OC-GND Setup
(-) INST OC-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC-GND settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
216
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.7. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SG)
The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase
to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity
of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy
of CTs. For SEF element, ETR300-R has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be
connected in series with the provided phase CT’s(standard) or connected to a separate window type
ZCT.
The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus sensitive earth fault current . The SEF
element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED, GROUND ENABLED and
SEF ENABLED on user interface panel.
For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero
sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.
A sensitive earth fault element does not work during the inrush restraint to prevent malfunction of
the inrush current that occurs when the relcloser or nearby distribution device is closed.
‘INST OC-SEF’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OC - SEF]
>1.(+)INST OC-SEF
2.(-)INST OC-SEF
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
217
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –SEF’ element.
1) (+)INST OC-SEF Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Function
[(+)INST OC-SEF]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
10.0
>Time Delay:
5.00
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set the function of sensitive earth fault element as enable or disable
when the power flow is in forward direction.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm..
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Pickup
[(+)INST OC-SEF]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
10.0
Time Delay:
5.00
[0.1~160.0:1A]
0.1~160.0 A
Range
Default 10.0
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of sensitive earth fault element.
This value is the minimum operating current of sensitive earth fault
element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Time Delay
[(+)INST OC-SEF]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
10.0
>Time Delay:
5.00
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set Time Delay for sensitive earth fault trip. If it is set for 0, trips
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
immediately sensitive earth fault current without delay.
2) (-) INST OC – SEF Setup
(-) INST OC- SEF settings are very similar to the (+)INST OC- SEF settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
218
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.8. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q1(46))
The negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT
secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay
versus negative sequence high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION on user
interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.
‘INST OC - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OC - NEQ]
>1.(+)INST OC-NEQ
2.(-)INST OC-NEQ
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC – NEQ’ element.
1) (+)INST OC-NEQ Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Function
[(+)INST OC-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
ENABLE, DISABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set the function of negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element as enable or disable.
DISABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on the negative sequence
does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on negative sequence
operates.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
219
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Pickup
[(+)INST OC-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[10~20000:1A]
10 ~ 20000 A
Range
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element.
This value is the minimum operating current of negative sequence
instantaneous overccurent element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Time Delay
[(+)INST OC-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
4000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
0.00~600.00 sec
Range
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set Time Delay for negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative sequence fault
current without delay.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Active Shot
[(+)INST OC-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
4000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Shot:
1
[1~5:1shot]
1~5 shot
Range
Default 1
Step
1shot
Sets the time when this element is activated.
If Active Shot = 1, then negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip
operation.
2) (-) INST OC – NEQ Setup
(-) INST OC- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC- NEQ settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
220
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.9. Phase Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50P2)
The ETR300-R has a phase instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This element in the
ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element
provides a definite time delay versus phase high fault current.
When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other phase overcurrent
elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated.
This element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout,
time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of
permanent fault.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and phase instantaneous
overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED
in user interface panel.
This element element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme
‘INST OCL - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[INST OCL-PHA]
>1.(+)INST OCL-PHA
2.(-)INST OCL-PHA
Following settings are used to program ‘INST OCL – PHASE’ elements.
1) (+)INST OCL-PHA Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Function
[(+)INST OCL-PHA]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
Range
ENABLE, DISABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Set the function (+) INST OCL -PHASE as enable or disable.
DISABLE : (+) INST OCL -PHASE function does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OCL -PHASE function operates.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
221
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Pickup
[(+)INST OCL-PHA]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[10~20000:1A]
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current for (+) INST OCL -PHASE element.
This value is the minimum operating current for (+) INST OCLPHASE element
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Time Delay
0.00~600.00 sec
[(+)INST OCL-PHA]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set time delay of trip operation for (+) INST OCL-PHASE element. If
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Active Shot
[(+)INST OCL-PHA]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Shot:
1
[1~5:1shot]
Range
1~5 shot
Default 1
Step
1shot
Sets the time when this element is activated.
If Active Shot = 1, then (+)INST OCL-PHASE element is enabled for
the first trip operation and next trip operations.
2) (-) INST OCL – PHA Setup
(-) INST OCL-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OCL-PHA settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
222
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.10. Ground Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50G2)
The ETR300-R has a ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This element in the
ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element
provides a definite time delay versus ground high fault current.
When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other gournd overcurrent
elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated.
This element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout,
time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of
permanent fault.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and ground
instantaneous overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and both
PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.
This element element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme
‘INST OCL - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OCL - GND]
>1.(+)INST OCL-GND
2.(-)INST OCL-GND
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OCL –GND’ element.
1) (+) INST OCL-GND Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Function
[(+)INST OCL-GND]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
Range
ENABLE, DISABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Set the function of ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element
as enable or disable.
DISABLE: (+) INST OCL-GND function on the ground does not
operate.
ENABLE: (+) INST OCL-GND function on ground operates.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
223
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Pickup
[(+)INST OCL-GND]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[10~20000:1A]
10 ~ 20000 A
Range
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of ground instantaneous lockout overccurent
element.
This value is the minimum operating current of this element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Time Delay
[(+)INST OCL-GND]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
0.00~600.00 sec
Range
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set Time Delay for ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element.
If it is set for 0, trips immediately on gorund fault current without
delay.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Active Shot
[(+)INST OCL-GND]
Function:
ENABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Shot:
1
[1~5:1shot]
1~5 shot
Range
Default 1
Step
1shot
Sets the time when this element is activated.
If Active Shot = 1, then ground instantaneous lockout overccurent
element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip
operation.
2) (-) INST OCL-GND Setup
(-) INST OCL-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OCL-GND settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
224
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.11. Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50Q2(46))
The negative sequence instantaneous lockout overccurent element provides a definite time delay
versus negative sequence high fault current.
When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other negative sequence
overcurrent elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated.
This element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout,
time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of
permanent fault.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and negative sequence
instantaneous overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
This element element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme
‘INST OCL - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OCL - NEQ]
>1.(+)INST OCL-NEQ
2.(-)INST OCL-NEQ
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OCL – NEQ’ element.
1) (+)INST OCL-NEQ Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Function
[(+)INST OCL-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
ENABLE, DISABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set the function of negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element as enable or disable.
DISABLE : (+) INST OCL-NEQ function on the negative sequence
does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OCL-NEQ function on negative sequence
operates.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
225
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Pickup
[(+)INST OCL-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[10~20000:1A]
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element.
This value is the minimum operating current of this element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Time Delay
[(+)INST OCL-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
8000
>Time Delay:
0.00
Active Shot:
1
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set Time Delay for negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative
sequence fault current without delay.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Active Shot
[(+)INST OCL-NEQ]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
8000
Time Delay:
0.00
>Active Shot:
1
[1~5:1shot]
Range
1~5 shot
Default 1
Step
1shot
Sets the time when this element is activated.
If Active Shot = 1, then negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element is enabled for the first trip operation and every
following trip operation.
2) (-) INST OCL – NEQ Setup
(-) INST OCL- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OCL- NEQ settings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
226
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.12. Inrush Restraint
The ETR300-R suppresses the time overcurrent operation during the inrush current restraint period
to prevent erroneous operation of the ETR300-R due to the inrush current generated when the
recloser does close operation or the near-field distribution device does close operation (the
instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent elements do normal operation). The setting of
the Inrush current restraint function can be set individually for phase, ground, sensitive earth fault
and negative sequence.
Current
> Outage Time
50 Pickup Current
R.M.T Time
(Restore Minimum Time)
50
Operation Region
Inrush DurationFault & 50
Operation Region
Trip
Inrush Current 1
Inrush Duration
Fault Pickup Current
Inrush Current
Restraint Region
51
Operation Region
Trip
Inrush Current 2
51 Pickup Current
Inrush Reset Current
Inrush Current 3
Reset Time
Inrush
Current 2
Inrush
Current 3
Without Supply
Normal Current
Region
Time
Inrush Restraint Duration
Oneshot Trip and Lockout
Normal Condition
Reclosing Avaliable
Inrush Restraint Duration
Oneshot Trip and Lockout
Normal Condition
Reclosing Avaliable
Supply Restore
Inrush Restraint Duration OFF
By Reset Current & Time
Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
227
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
After it’s done black out more than outage time, it restores load current supply, inrush current
restraint algorithm is applied. When the restoration of load supply is occured, in the case of that
generated inrush current is greater than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush current 1 of
“Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics”, it’s considered as fault current,
recloser does trip operation during inrush duration. (But, when the delay curve of time overcurrent
element is ENABL, recloser does operation). When inrush current is less than inrush duration fault
pickup current as inrush current 2 of “Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics”
After fault protection operation is suppressed during R.M.T Time(Restore Minimu Time), recloser
does trip operation after inrush duration.
However, inrush duration is removed if inrush current is less than reset current before R.M.T Time
(Restore Minimum Time) as inrush current 3 of “Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation
Characteristics”.
When faul current is flowed more than inrush duration fault pick up current during inrush duration,
reloser does 1st trip operation and goes to lockout status on RECLOSE ENABLED.
NOTE:
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, in order to activate inrush current restraint sectopm the
condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the
decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set, the decision is made
when a recloser is closed (51A) by local or remote control.
8.1.12.1. Inrush Restraint Setup
‘INRUSH RESTRAINT’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INRUSH RESTRAINT]
>1.FUNCTION
2.PICKUP CURRENT
3.RESTORE MIN. TIME
4.INRUSH RES’ RESET
5.PHASE CURVE
6.GROUND CURVE
7.NEG SEQ’ CURVE
8.OTHERS
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
228
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1) Fuction Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Phase
DISABLE, ENABLE
[FUNCTION]
>Phase:
ENABLE
Ground:
ENABLE
SEF:
ENABLE
Neg Seq’:
ENABLE
Range
[ENABLE/DISABLE]
phase current.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Ground
DISABLE, ENABLE
[FUNCTION]
Phase:
ENABLE
>Ground:
ENABLE
SEF:
ENABLE
Neg Seq’:
ENABLE
Range
[ENABLE/DISABLE]
ground current.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / SEF
DISABLE, ENABLE
[FUNCTION]
Phase:
ENABLE
Ground:
ENABLE
>SEF:
ENABLE
Neg Seq’:
ENABLE
Range
[ENABLE/DISABLE]
sensitive earth fault current.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Neg Seq’
DISABLE, ENABLE
[FUNCTION]
Phase:
ENABLE
Ground:
ENABLE
SEF:
ENABLE
>Neg Seq’:
ENABLE
Range
[ENABLE/DISABLE]
Negative sequence current.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
229
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2) Inrush Duration Fault Pickup Current Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Phase
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
2000
Ground:
2000
SEF:
20.0
>Neg Seq’:
2000
[10~20000:1 A]
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Phase fault current level is configured during inrush current restraint
duration. If the phase current is greater than the setring value, the
delay curve of the phase time overcurrent element is activated.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Ground
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
2000
>Ground:
2000
SEF:
20.0
>Neg Seq’:
2000
[10~20000:1 A]
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Ground fault level is configured during the inrush current restraint
duration. If the ground current is greater than the setting value, the
delay curve of the ground time overcurrent element is activated.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ S.E.F
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
2000
>Ground:
2000
>SEF:
20.0
>Neg Seq’:
2000
[0.1~2000.0:0.1 A]
Range
0.1 ~ 2000.0A
Default 20.0
Step
0.1A
Sets the sensitive earth fault current level during the inrush current
restraint duration If S.E.F current is greater than this setting, a
sensitive earth fault element will operate.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Neg Seq’
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
2000
>Ground:
2000
SEF:
20.0
>Neg Seq’:
2000
[10~20000:1 A]
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Sets the negative sequence fault current level during the inrush current
restraint duration. If the negative sequence current is greater than the
setting value, the delay curve of the negative sequence time
overcurrent element operates.
NOTE:
The above setting applies the pickup current to operate the time overcurrent element, and the
multiple of current pickup current which is applied to the T-C curve during the time
overcurrent operation applies the pickup current setting value of the delay curve.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
230
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3) Restroe Minimum Time Setup
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / P-Function
[RESTORE MIN. TIME]
>P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME:
0.60
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Set whether to apply restore minimum time for phase inrush current.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / G-Function
[RESTORE MIN. TIME]
>P-Function: ENABLE
>G-Function: ENABLE
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME:
0.60
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for ground inrush current.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / S-Function
[RESTORE MIN. TIME]
>P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE
>S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME:
0.60
Range
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
current.
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for sensitive earth inrush
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / Q-Function
DISABLE, ENABLE
[RESTORE MIN. TIME]
>P-Function: ENABLE
>G-Function: ENABLE
S-Function: ENABLE
>Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME:
0.60
Range
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
inrush current.
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for negative sequence
NOTE:
Depending on the above settings, the inrush current restraint duration release condition will be
different. If it sets to EANBLE, the restore minimum time is applied and regardless of current
size, the inrush current restraint duration is released after a restore minimum time.
On the other hand, if it sets to DISABLE, the restore minimum time is not applied and the
current size should fall below the reset current, and the inrush current restraint duration is
released.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
231
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ RESTORE MIN. TIME/ RMTTIME
[RESTORE MIN. TIME]
P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
>RMT TIME:
0.60
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 0.60
Step
0.01 sec
Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush current.
The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for time
overcurrent detection from inrush duration fault pickup current back to
nominal pickup level.
4) Reset Current & Time Setup
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / P-Reset I
[INRUSH RES’ RESET]
>P-Reset I:
500
G-Reset I:
250
S-Reset I:
10.0
Q-Reset I:
500
Reset Time:
0.60
[10~1600:1 A]
Range
10~1600A
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the level of reset current for phase inrush restraint.
Inrush current that is lower than this reset current setting level, is kept
for the reset time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and
normal over current protection function operates.
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / G-Reset I
[INRUSH RES’ RESET]
>P-Reset I:
500
>G-Reset I:
250
S-Reset I:
10.0
Q-Reset I:
500
Reset Time:
0.60
Range
10~1600A
Default 250
Step
1A
Set the level of reset current for ground inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / S-Reset I
[INRUSH RES’ RESET]
>P-Reset I:
500
G-Reset I:
250
>S-Reset I:
10.0
Q-Reset I:
500
Reset Time:
0.60
Range
0.1~160.0A
Default 10.0
Step
0.1A
Set the level of reset current for sensitive earth inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
232
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / Q-Reset I
[INRUSH RES’ RESET]
>P-Reset I:
500
G-Reset I:
250
S-Reset I:
10.0
>Q-Reset I:
500
Reset Time:
0.60
Range
10~1600A
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the level of reset current for negative sequence inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / Reset Time
[INRUSH RES’ RESET]
P-Reset I:
500
G-Reset I:
250
S-Reset I:
10.0
Q-Reset I:
500
>Reset Time:
0.60
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.60
Step
0.01 sec
Sets the time to reset inrush current restraint duration.
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
5) Inrush Current Restrait Duration’s T-C Curve Setup
Set the T-C curve to be applied during the Inrush current restraint duration.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / Curve
[PHASE CURVE]
>Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
[curve : total 62]
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default US-VI
Step
~
Set T-C curve to apply when Phase inrush current is more than few
times of phase disconnect inrush current. Applicable curve ragne refers
to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting
range”.
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.
GROUP # /RECLOSER/INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE/ Time Dial
0.01~15.00
[PHASE CURVE]
Curve:
[US-VI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
Range
[0.01~15.00:0.01]
the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application changes
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
233
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP #/RECLOSER/INRUSH RES’ CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Time Add.
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
[PHASE CURVE]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
>Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
including its own delay time.
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / M.R.T
[PHASE CURVE]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time,
tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be
cooperated with other protection device or fuse.
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.
GROUP#/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / Reset Method
[PHASE CURVE]
Curve:
[US-VI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
[INST/LINEAR]
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step
~
In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold
load pickup element is reset.
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
234
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6) Other Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Outage Time
[OTHERS]
>Outage Time:
>Outage I:
>Make Use ‘I’:
0.01 ~ 10.00 sec
Range
5.00
2
NO
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the outage time. After the outage condition is maintained for more
than the setting time, the restoration of load supply becomes active
and the Inrush current restraint section becomes active.
Outage conditions are as follows;

If "Make Use 'I'" setting is NO, it is considerd to be outage when
recloser status is open.

If "Make Use 'I'" setting is YES, it is considered to be outage
when current is below 2A.
However, under the above conditions, current should be below
"Outage I".
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Outage I
[OTHERS]
>Outage Time:
>Outage I:
>Make Use ‘I’:
0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
Range
5.00
2
NO
[0(OFF),1~630:1 A]
Default 2
Step
1A
Set the current to determine outage. It is considered to be outage only
when the current is below the setting value. However, when it sets to
OFF, this setting is not used when determining the outage status.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Make Use ‘I’
[OTHERS]
>Outage Time:
>Outage I:
>Make Use ‘I’:
[NO/YES]
NO, YES
Range
5.00
2
NO
Default NO
Step
~
Set whetherer or not to use current as decision condition for operating
function.

When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint interval becomes
active when relcoser is changed from open to close status.

When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the
inrush current restraint interval is active.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
235
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.13. Cold Load Pickup
The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating by the cold
load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.
In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over
current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy
load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time
overcurrent element during certain time (Pickup Multi) defined by a user.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Up
At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is
risen as follows.
 Without Supply Time

Operational Cold Load Multi '  1 
 ( Pickup Multi ' 1) 
Interval Time


As example, when ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively,
over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis
set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum
working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Down
If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over
Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1.
When ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the
cold load multiple in “Figure 8-8. Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows.
NOTE:
The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate
overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of T-C curve is a minimum
working current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
236
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Cold Load Multiplier
Without Supply
Supply Restore
T(60min)
T(60min)
0.5×T
(30min)
0.5×T
(30min)
×3
×2
×1
Time(min)
Figure 8-9. Cold Load Multipilier
8.1.13.1. Cold Load Pickup Setup
This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Function
[COLD LOAD PICKUP]
>Function:
ENABLE
Make Use ‘I’:
NO
Pickup Multi:
2.0
Interval Time:
10
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Set whether to Enable or disable the Cold load pickup function.
When it sets to ON, cold load multiplier is applied to pickup current of
phase, ground and negative sequence time overcurrent.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use ‘I’
[COLD LOAD PICKUP]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’:
NO
Pickup Multi:
2.0
Interval Time:
10
[NO/YES]
Range
YES, NO
Default NO
Step
~
Set whether or not to be used as a decision condition for operating the
cold load pickup function.

If it sets to NO, power loss and power restoration are considered
as open or close state of relcoser.

If it sets to YES, determine power loss and power restoration as
current (less than or equal to 2A)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
237
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Pickup Multi’
[COLD LOAD PICKUP]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’:
NO
>Pickup Multi:
2.0
Interval Time:
10
[1.0~5.0:0.1xMTC]
Range
1.0~5.0 xMTC
Default 2.0
Step
0.1xMTC
Set the multiple of cold load. If 1 is set, the cold load multiple is not
applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied
for overcurrent pickup current.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Interval Time
1~720 min
[COLD LOAD PICKUP]
>Function:
ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’:
NO
>Pickup Multi:
2.0
>Interval Time:
10
Range
[1~720:1 m]
level is raised or dropped.
Default 10
Step
1 min
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
238
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.14. Harmonic Block (2HB and 5HB)
Magnetizing inrush current in power transformer on the distribution line causes to operate
overcurrent element. It provides the second and fifth harmonic block function to block overcurrent
element caused by transformer inrush current.
If measured second harmonic current content exceeds the adjustable pickup threshold setting value,
the second harmonic block function can restraint to operate overcurrent elements until the inrush
current has subsided.
2HB
Function
2HBAT
Pickup
2HBBT
Time Delay
2HBCT
Reset Time
2HBT
Minimum Current
Ia
Ib
Ic
E2HBE
Figure 8-10. Function block diagram for 2HB
Function
E2HBE
&
Min Curr.
Ia
Ib
Ic
+
+
+
-
2nd
Harmonic
Calculation
IaRms.H2
/IaRms
+
-
&
IaRms.H2
/IaRms
+
-
&
IaRms.H2
/IaRms
+
-
&
2HBAT
Time Delay
2HBBT
Reset Time
2HBCT
OR
2HBT
Pickup
Figure 8-11. Function logic diagram for 2HB
The fifth harmonic block function process is same as the second harmonic block function above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
239
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
This setting is to restrain the inrush current caused by the second harmonic element.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Function
[2ND BLOCKING]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
OFF
Time Delay:
1.00
Reset Time:
1.00
Min.I:
60
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set the second harmonic function as enabled or disabled.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Pickup
[2ND BLOCKING]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
OFF
Time Delay:
1.00
Reset Time:
1.00
Min.I:
60
[OFF, 5~100:1 %]
Range
0(OFF), 5 ~ 100 %
Default OFF
Step
1%
Set the second harmonic pickup level. At least one of the phase currents
has the second harmonic exceeded this setting value, this function is
activated. In case of setting 0(OFF), the function is deactivated.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Time Delay
[2ND BLOCKING]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
OFF
>Time Delay:
1.00
Reset Time:
1.00
Min.I:
60
[0.00~600.0s:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the second harmonic block function delay time. If the second
harmonic exceeds above pickup setting during the delay time, selected
overcurrent elements restrains to operate.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Reset Time
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
[2ND BLOCKING]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
OFF
Time Delay:
1.00
>Reset Time:
1.00
Min.I:
60
Range
[0.00~600.0s:0.01s]
selected overcurrent elements keep restraining during the reset time.
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
The second harmonic current is less than the pickup setting level, the
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Min. I
0(OFF), 1~630A
[2ND BLOCKING]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
OFF
Time Delay:
1.00
Reset Time:
1.00
>Min.I:
60
Range
[0(OFF),1~630:1 A]
harmonic blocking element to operate.
Default 60
Step
1A
Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the second
*. NOTE ) 5TH BLOCKING setting process is same as 2ND BLOCKING settings above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
240
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.15. Directional Controls (67)
The Directional Controls provide time overcurrent protection in the direction of power flow. The
directional controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of
finding faults in different directions. The directional controls are comprised of phase, gound, SEF
and negative sequence overcurrent elements.
If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in
forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum
Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls,
add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
The directional controls settings can be different in each GROUP settings.
Each of the directional control elements has four setting items as follow:
[DIRECTION]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ
8.1.15.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)
Normal voltage V1 provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is
determined by comparing normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1). If an angle between normal
voltage(V1) and normal current(I1) is within  90˚, the direction is forward otherwise it is
backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Max torque
initial angle is set for lags Normal voltage V1 for∠60˚.( Initial set value of Max Torque angle shall
be set ∠60˚ lagging angle.
If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is
lost and phase over current is not detected. On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for
‘NONE’, regardless of phase direction, phase over current is detected.
Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase over current. Depending on control
type, over current can be detected in Forward direction or reverse direction or regardless of
direction.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
241
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Following “Figure 8-12. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization” shows normal current
(I1) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane.
Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V1
ro
Ze
rq
To
I1
Typical Fault Angle
M.T.A= 60° Lag
ue
L in
e
x
Ma
im
um
rq u
To
eL
in e
D
OR
RW
FO
E
RS
VE
RE
Figure 8-12. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization
The phase direction control in followingfour settings should be enabled.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type
[PHASE]
>Type:
M.T.A:
M.P.V(V1):
Block OC:
[NONE/FOR/REV]
Range
NONE
60
0.30
YES
NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
Default NONE
Step
~
Set phase direction type.
NONE : Regardless of phase direction, phase overcurrent is detected
by normal phase current(Ia,Ib,Ic).
FOR : (+) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction.
(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction.
REV : (+) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction.
(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
242
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type
[PHASE]
Type:
>M.T.A:
M.P.V(V1):
Block OC:
NONE
60
0.30
YES
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 60
Step
1 degree
Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle
setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing
[0~359:1°Lag]
voltage.
For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be
approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION /PHASE / M.P.V(V1)
[PHASE]
Type:
M.T.A:
>M.P.V(V1):
Block OC:
Range
NONE
60
0.30
YES
0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT
0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Default 0.30
Step
0.01 xVT
To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing
Voltage, V1). It is available to check the direction when a votage shall
be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of
setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Block OC
[PHASE]
Type:
M.T.A:
M.P.V(V1):
>Block OC:
[NO/YES]
Range
NONE
60
0.30
YES
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
~
Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
243
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.15.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)
Zero phase voltage 3V0 provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is
determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V0) and zero phase current(I0). If an angle from
zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is
forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359
˚. Initial set value of max torque angle is set for ∠60˚ lagging compared with Zero sequence
voltage(-V0).
Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground
over current is not detected. On the other hand, if ground direction control is set for ‘NONE’,
ground over current is detected regardless of direction.
Ground direction control type is set to detect ground over current. Depending on control type, over
current is detected or is not detected.
Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.
Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
-V0
Ze
Typical Fault
Angle
M.T.A= 60° Lag
I0
ro
To
rq
ue
Li
ne
Ma
m
xi
um
To
u
rq
Li
e
ne
FO
RW
OR
D
RE
VE
RS
E
V0
Figure 8-13. Phasor Graph for Ig Directional Polarization
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
244
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
The ground direction control in followingfour settings should be enabled.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type
[GROUND]
>Type:
M.T.A:
M.P.V(-3V0):
Block OC:
Range
NONE
60
0.30
YES
NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
Default NONE
Step
~
Set Ground direction type.
NONE : Regardless of ground direction, ground overcurrent is detected
[NONE/FOR/REV]
by normal current(In).
FOR : (+) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction.
(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction.
REV : (+) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction.
(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A
[GROUND]
Type:
>M.T.A:
M.P.V(-3V0):
Block OC:
NONE
60
0.30
YES
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 60
Step
1 degree
Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting
determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.
[0~359:1°Lag]
For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the
ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠60degree.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum
torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V(-3V0)
[GROUND]
Type:
M.T.A:
>M.P.V(-3V0):
Block OC:
Range
NONE
60
0.30
YES
0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT
0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Default 0.30
Step
0.01 xVT
Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction.
Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction.
Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF),
direction checking is disabled.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
245
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / Block OC
[GROUND]
Type:
M.T.A:
M.P.V(-3V0):
>Block OC:
Range
NONE
60
0.30
YES
[NO/YES]
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.
8.1.15.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF)
The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the GROUND directional control. But
the default value of SEF directional element “Type” is ‘None’, and default value of “M.T.A(-V0) is
‘90°’ .
8.1.15.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))
Negative Sequence voltage V2 provides negative sequence pole direction in power system.
Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V2) and
negative current(I2).
If an angle from negative sequence voltage (V2) to negative sequence current
(I2) is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise, reverse
direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Maximum Torque Angle initial set
value leads from negative sequence voltage(V2) for ∠60˚.
If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is
cancelled and over current is not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction control
type is set for ‘NONE’, over current is detected regardless of direction.
Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence overcurrent. Depending on
control type, overcurrent is detected in forward or reverse or both direction.
Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I2) direction polarity.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
246
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
http://www.entecene.co.kr
-V2
Typical Fault Angle
r
Ze
M.T.A= 60° Lag
o
I2
r
To
qu
e
Li
ne
M
im
ax
um
To
e
rq u
L in
e
R
FO
R
O
W
D
R
ER
EV
SE
V2
Figure 8-14. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization
The negative sequence directional controls in followingfour settings should be enabled.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / Type
[NEG SEQ’]
>Type:
NONE
M.T.A:
60
M.P.V(-V2):
0.30
Block OC:
YES
[NONE/FOR/REV]
Range
NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
Default NONE
Step
~
Set Negative sequence direction type.
NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, over current is
detected by normal current(I2).
FOR : (+) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward
negative sequence direction.
(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse
negative sequence direction.
REV : (+) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse
negative sequence direction.
(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward
negative sequence direction.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
247
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.T.A
[NEG SEQ’]
Type:
NONE
>M.T.A:
60
M.P.V(-V2):
0.30
Block OC:
YES
[0~359:1°Lag]
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 135
Step
1 degree
In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum
Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I2) against zero phase
voltage(V2) is set
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.P.V(-V2)
[NEG SEQ’]
Type:
NONE
M.T.A:
60
>M.P.V(-V2):
0.30
Block OC:
YES
Range
0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.80 xVT
Default 0.30
Step
0.01 xVT
Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage
shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise,
0(OFF),0.10~0.80xVT
direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction
checking is disabled.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / BLOCK OC
[NEG SEQ’]
Type:
NONE
M.T.A:
60
M.P.V(-V2):
0.30
>Block OC:
YES
[NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
248
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.16. Broken Conductor
The broken conductor element operates when the ratio between the negative sequence current (I2)
and the positive sequence current (I1) of the relay is larger than the operation setting (pickup)
value. Under normal conditions I2/I1 ratio is zero but when a fault occurs on the load, this ratio of
I2/I1 increases.
‘Broken Conductor’ protection element configuration is as below.
46BC
Function
46BC
Pickup
46BCT
Time Delay
Minimum Curr.
I₁
I₂
E150P1E
Figure 8-15. 46BC Function Block Diagram
.
The figure below shows the function logic diagram of Broken Conductor.
Function
E46BCE
&
Min Curr.
Ia
+
-
Ib
+
-
Ic
+
-
Positive
/Negative
Sequence
Current
Calculation
+
-
&
46BC
Time Delay
0
46BCT
Pickup
Figure 8-16. 46BC Function Logic Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
249
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Function
[BROKEN CONDUCT]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1):
5
Time Delay:
4.00
Min.I:
60
Max.I:
500
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
Set the function of broken conduct element as enable or disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Pickup(I2/I1)
[BROKEN CONDUCT]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup(I2/I1):
5
Time Delay:
4.00
Min.I:
60
>Max.I:
500
Range
1~100 %
Default 5
Step
1%
Set the Broken Conductor pickup level.
[1~100:1 %]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Time Delay
[BROKEN CONDUCT]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1):
5
>Time Delay:
4.00
Min.I:
60
>Max.I:
500
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the Broken Conductor function delay time.
[0.00:600.00:0.01 s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I
[BROKEN CONDUCT]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1):
5
Time Delay:
4.00
>Min.I:
60
>Max.I:
500
[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A]
Range
0(OFF), 1~630A
Default 60
Step
1A
Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the broken
conduct element to operate.
Positive sequence current is less than setting value, element will not
operate.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
250
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I
[BROKEN CONDUCT]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1):
5
Time Delay:
4.00
>Min.I:
60
>Max.I:
500
[0(OFF),10~1600:1 A]
0(OFF), 10~1600
Range
Default 500
Step
1A
Enter the maximum value of current required to allow the broken
conduct element to operate.
Positive sequence current is greater than setting value, element will not
operate.
8.1.17. Voltage (27/59/64N)
In this section, undervoltage, overvoltage and neutral elements will be described. And the voltage
menu is composed with 8 sub-menus as follows:
[VOLTAGE]
>1.UNDER VOLT1
2.UNDER VOLT2
3.UV RESTORATION
4.OVER VOLT1
5.OVER VOLT2
6.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT1
7.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT2
8.OV RESTORATION
8.1.17.1. Undervoltage (27)
In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two under voltage
elements make a trip or alarm operation.
The under voltage element are set in GROUP setting. It is available to select a number of phase to
be checked for undervoltage function.
The under voltage element are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
251
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1) UNDER VOLT1 Setup
The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Function
[UNDER VOLT1]
>Function:
OFF
Pickup:
0.80
Time Delay:
5.00
Min. V:
0.10
Voltage Type:
1P
[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL
Range
Default OFF
Step
~
Set the function of under voltage 1 element as enable or disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Pickup
[UNDER VOLT1]
Function:
OFF
>Pickup:
0.80
Time Delay:
5.00
Min. V:
0.10
Voltage Type:
1P
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 0.80
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the pickup value for under voltage 1 element.
This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 0.80xVT
and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be less
than 10.56kV (= 13.2kV * 0.80) to operate this element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Time Delay
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
[UNDER VOLT1]
Function:
OFF
Pickup:
0.80
>Time Delay:
5.00
Min. V:
0.10
Voltage Type:
1P
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
during this time delay below the pickup level, this element will operate.
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
252
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Min. V
0.10~1.40 xVT
[UNDER VOLT1]
Function:
OFF
Pickup:
0.80
Time Delay:
5.00
>Min. V:
0.10
Voltage Type:
1P
Range
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
ratio of the rated voltage.
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Set the minimum voltage to operate this element. This setting is the
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Voltage Type
[UNDER VOLT1]
Function:
OFF
Pickup:
0.80
Time Delay:
5.00
Min. V:
0.10
>Voltage Type:
1P
[1P/2P/3P]
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
~
Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage.
1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
2) UNDER VOLT2 Setup
The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.
3) UV RESTORATION Setup
The undervoltage restoration should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Function
[UV RESTORATION]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
0.95
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether to use undervoltage restoration function.
This function is a function to automatically do close operation when the
voltage returns to normal status after trip by undervoltage function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Pickup
[UV RESTORATION]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
0.95
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Range
0.00~1.40 xVT
Default 0.95
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the pickup value for undervoltage restoration element.
When the voltage is above the setting value, it is considered that the
voltage returns to normal status.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
253
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Time Delay
[UV RESTORATION]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
0.95
>Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 30.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay for this function. If the voltage remains above the
pickup level during this setting time, the recloser does automatically
close operation.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Reset Time
[UV RESTORATION]
Pickup:
0.95
Time Delay:
30.00
>Reset Time:
5.00
Source Side:
VS
Voltage Type:
3P
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01sec
Sets the reset time of the undervoltage restoration function.
The undervoltage restration function does not work if the voltage does
not return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by the
undervoltage function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Source Side
[UV RESTORATION]
Pickup:
0.95
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
>Source Side:
VS
Voltage Type:
3P
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
Range
VS,VL, VS&VL
Default VS
Step
~
Undervoltage restoration operates upon selected side of voltage
sensing.
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
 VS&VL : Undervoltage element operates one of either Source side
or load side voltage becomes higher voltage level compared with
pickup setting in UV RESTORATION.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Voltage Type
[UV RESTORATION]
Pickup:
0.95
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
>Voltage Type:
3P
[1P/2P/3P]
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
~
Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage Restoration.
1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
254
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.17.2. Overvoltage (59) and Neutral Overvoltage (64N)
In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, over voltage
elements makes a trip or alarm operation. Over voltage elements is set in GROUP setting. Phase
overvoltage(59) elements are available to select a number of phase to be checked for overvoltage
function. Neutral overvoltage elements operate with zero sequence volage (3V0) by the input phase
volage.
The over voltage element are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.
1) OVER VOLT1 Setup
The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Function
[OVER VOLT1]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
1.10
Time Delay:
5.00
Voltage Type:
1P
[DIS/TR/AL/TR&AL]
DISABLE, TR, AL, TR&AL
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set the function of over voltage 1 element as enable or disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Pickup
[OVER VOLT1]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
1.10
Time Delay:
5.00
Voltage Type:
1P
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 1.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the pickup value for over voltage element1.
This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 1.10xVT
and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be
higher than 14.52kV (= 13.2kV * 1.10) to operate this element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
255
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Time Delay
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
[OVER VOLT1]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
1.10
>Time Delay:
5.00
Voltage Type:
1P
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
above this pickup level for this time delay, this element will operate.
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type
[OVER VOLT1]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
1.10
Time Delay:
5.00
>Voltage Type:
1P
[1P/2P/3P]
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
~
Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage
1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
2) OVER VOLT2 Setup
The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
3) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 1 Setup
The neutral overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However,
there is no setting menu for voltage type.
4) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 2 Setup
The neutral overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However,
there is no setting menu for voltage type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
256
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5) OV RESTORATION Setup
The overvoltage restoration should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Function
[OV RESTORATION]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
1.05
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
Voltage Type:
3P
[DIS/TR/AL/TR&AL]
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Default DISABLE
Set whether to use overvoltage restoration function.
This function is a function to automatically close when voltage returns
to normal status after trip by overvoltage and neutral overvoltage
function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Pickup
[OV RESTORATION]
Function:
OFF
>Pickup:
1.05
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Range
0.00~1.40 xVT
Default 1.05
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the pickup value for over voltage restoration element.
When the voltage is below the setting value, it is considered that the
voltage returns to normal status.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Time Delay
[OV RESTORATION]
Function:
OFF
Pickup:
1.05
>Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 30.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay for this function.
If the voltage remains below the pickup level during this setting time,
the recloser does automatically close operation.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Reset Time
[OV RESTORATION]
Function:
OFF
Pickup:
1.05
Time Delay:
30.00
>Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
Voltage Type:
3P
[1~100:1m]
Range
1~100 min
Default 5
Step
1min
Set the operation reset time of overvoltage restoration function.
The overvoltage restoration function does not work if the voltage does
not return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by
overvoltage function.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
257
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Source Side
[OV RESTORATION]
Pickup:
1.05
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
>Source Side:
VS
Voltage Type:
3P
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
Range
VS,VL, VS&VL
Default VS
Step
~
Overvoltage restoration operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
 VS&VL : Overvoltage element operates one of either Source side or
load side voltage becomes lower voltage level compared with pickup
setting in OV RESTORATION.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Voltage Type
[OV RESTORATION]
Pickup:
1.05
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Source Side:
VS
>Voltage Type:
3P
[1P/2P/3P]
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
~
Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage Restoration.
.
1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
258
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.18. Frequency (81)
In this section, underfrequency, overfrequency and frequency delay elements will be described.
And the frequency menu is composed with 6 sub-menus as follows:
[FREQUENCY]
>1.UNDER FREQUENCY1
2.UNDER FREQUENCY2
3.OVER FREQUENCY1
4.OVER FREQUENCY2
5.FREQUENCY DELAY
6.AUTO RESTORATION
8.1.18.1. Underfrequency (81U)
The underfrequency element is activated to trip when the distribution system frequency drops
below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system frequency is measured
from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for
Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection(  ), VA-B voltage is zero crossing and if wye
connection(Y), VA-N voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.)
The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control..
The underfrequency elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in
user interface panel.
The underfrequency element should be enabled to followingsettings.
1) UNDER FREQUENCY 1 Setup
The under frequency 1 should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Function
[UNDER FREQUENCY1]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
58.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether under frequency element 1 is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
259
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup
[UNDER FREQUENCY1]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
58.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
Range
40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Default 58.50
Step
0.01Hz
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup.
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay
[UNDER FREQUENCY1]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
58.50
>Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
It sets the delay time to operate the underfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time
[UNDER FREQUENCY1]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
58.50
Time Delay:
2.00
>Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
It sets the time to reset the underfrequency element
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. Volt
0.00~1.40 xVT
[UNDER FREQUENCY1]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
58.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
>Min.Volt:
0.10
Range
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
element to operate.
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I
0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
[UNDER FREQUENCY1]
Pickup:
58.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Volt:
0.10
>Min. I:
60
Range
[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A]
underfrequency element to operate.
Default 60
Step
1A
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
260
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2) UNDER FREQUENCY 2 Setup
The underfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the underfrequency 1.
8.1.18.2. Overfrequency (81O)
In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency
element makes a trip operation. Overfrequency element is set in GROUP setting. If VTs is delta  connection VA-B is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, VA-N.is to be zero-crossing.
Overfrequency minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when
recloser is closed locally or remotely.
The overfrequency elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in
user interface panel.
1) OVER FREQUENCY 1 Setup
The over frequency 1 should be enabled to followingsettings;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /OVER FREQUENCY1 / Function
[OVER FREQUENCY1]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
62.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min. Volt:
0.10
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether over frequency element 1 is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup
[OVER FREQUENCY1]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
62.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min. Volt:
0.10
Range
40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Default 62.50
Step
0.01Hz
Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup.
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
261
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay
[OVER FREQUENCY1]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
62.50
>Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min. Volt:
0.10
0.00~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
Sets the delay time to operate the overfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time
[OVER FREQUENCY1]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
62.50
Time Delay:
2.00
>Reset Time:
2.00
Min. Volt:
0.10
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
Sets the time to reset the overfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. V
0.00~1.40 xVT
[OVER FREQUENCY1]
Pickup:
62.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
>Min. Volt:
0.10
Min. I:
60
Range
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
element and overfrequency to operate.
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the overfrequency
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I
0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
[OVER FREQUENCY1]
Pickup:
62.50
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min. Volt:
0.10
>Min. I:
60
Range
[0(OFF),1~630:1A]
overfrequency element to operate.
Default 60
Step
1A
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
2) OVER FREQUENCY 2 Setup
The overfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the overfrequency 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
262
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.18.3. Frequency Decay (81D)
When frequency fluctuates due to unbalance between load and active power in power system,
ETR300-R offers frequency decay element in order to prevent unstable condition in the power
system.
The frequency decay elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in
user interface panel.
Frequency decay should be enabled as follows;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Function
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Freq:
45.00
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
DISABLE ~
Set whether frequency decay element is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Pickup(Hz/sec)
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Freq:
45.00
Range
0.01~5.00 Hz/sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01Hz/sec
Enter the level of which the frequency decay element is to pickup.
[0.01~5.00:0.01Hz]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
263
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Time Delay
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
>Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Freq:
45.00
[0.05~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.05~600.00sec
Default
2.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the delay time for frequency decay elements. According to pickup
setting value, time window of frequency decay rate is changed
described in followingtable.
Fault Trip Time of Frequency decay element is like below;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time
0.05~600.00sec
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
Time Delay:
2.00
>Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Freq:
45.00
Range
[0.05~600.00:0.01s]
configure reset time longer than time window.
Default 2.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the reset time of Frequency decay element pickup. It must
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Freq
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
>Min.Freq:
50.00
[45.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
45.00~65.00 Hz
Range
Default 50.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Set the minimum frequency in order to operate frequency decay
element. When frequency is bigger than setting value, it will be
operated.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
264
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Volt
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
Time Delay:
2.00
Reset Time:
2.00
Min.Freq:
45.00
>Min.Volt:
0.10
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Range
0.00~1.40 xVT
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Set the minimum voltage in order to operate frequency decay element.
Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting
value, it will be operated.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. I
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
>Min.I:
60
Type :
ABSOLUTE
Range
0(OFF), 1~630A
Default 60
Step
1A
Set the minimum current in order to operate frequency decay element.
[0(OFF), 1~630A:1A]
Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting
value, it will be operated.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time
[FREQUENCY DECAY]
Min.I:
60
>Type :
ABSOLUTE
Range
INCREASE, DECREASE, ABSOLUTE
Default ABSOLUTE
Step
~
Set operation trend type of Frequency decay element.
[INC/DEC/ABSOLUTE]
When INCREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay
rate is increased.
When DECREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay
rate is decreased.
When ABSOLUTE is configured, it operates when absolute value of
frequency decay rate is bigger than pickup setting value.
8.1.18.4. Frequency Auto Restoration (81R)
The ETR300-R has an auto restoration function that automatically trips the recloser when the
frequency returns to normal status after a fault trip by the frequency element.
Auto Restoration of frequency element should be enabled as follows;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /AUTO RESTORATION / Function
[AUTO RESTORATION]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
59.98
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Min. Volt:
0.10
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether auto restoration for frequency element is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
265
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Pickup
[AUTO RESTORATION]
>Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
59.98
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Min. Volt:
0.10
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Range
Default 59.98
Step
0.01Hz
Enter the level of which the Auto Restoration of frequency element is
to pickup.
Auto Restoration must be operated when the frequency on source side
is higher than the setting value. However, all frequency elements
should not be picked up at this time.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Time Delay
[AUTO RESTORATION]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
59.98
>Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
Min. Volt:
0.10
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 30.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay for this function.
The recloser is automatically closed when the frequency on source side
remains above the pickup level during setting time.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Reset Time
[AUTO RESTORATION]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
59.98
Time Delay:
30.00
>Reset Time:
5
Min. Volt:
0.10
[1~100:1m]
Range
1~100min
Default 5
Step
1 min
Set the operation reset time of this function.
The auto restoration function does not work if the voltage does not
return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by the
frequency function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Min. Volt
0.00~1.40 xVT
[AUTO RESTORATION]
Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
59.98
Time Delay:
30.00
Reset Time:
5
>Min. Volt:
0.10
Range
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
frequency element.
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the Auto Restoration of
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
266
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.19. Power (32)
In this section, forward power elements and directional power elements will be described. And the
power setting menus are composed with 3 sub-menus as follows:
[POWER]
>1.FUNCTION
2.FORWARD POWER
3.DIRECTIONAL POWER
8.1.19.1. Common Setting for Power elements
This setting applies to all power elements of forward power and directional power elements;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / Function
[FUNCTION]
>Function:
DISABLE
BLK After RS: 5.00
DISABLE, TR, AL, TR&AL
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set the function of power elements as enable or disable.
[OFF,TR,AL,TR&AL]
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / BLK After CL
[FUNCTION]
>Function:
DISABLE
BLK After CL: 5.00
Range
0.02~600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the Block Time After Close for power elements.
[0.02~600.00:0.01s]
To prevent malfunction of power elements by inrush current incurred at
the restoration of load supply, set the time that each power element’s
operation is suppressed after the restoration of load supply. After close
opration, all function for power elements are blocked during this set
time.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
267
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.19.2. Forward Power(32FP)
ETR300R provides the two of the Forward Power (32FP) elements. If three phase active power is
kept above the pickup level for a certain time. Three phase active power is calculated as below, and
it operates only about the forward (positive) active power.
 WYE VT Connection Type
 DELTA VT Connection Type
*. Note )
OPERATION
NON-OPERATION
-P
P+
0
Figure 8-17. Forward Power(32FP) Elements Characteristic
The forward power should be enabled to followingsettings;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Pickup1
[FORWARD POWER]
>Pickup1:
0.00
Time Delay1:
5.00
Pickup2:
0.00
Time Delay2:
5.00
Range
0.00~300.00 MW
Default 0.00
Step
0.01
Set the pickup level of forward power element 1
0(OFF),0.00~300.00MW
*. NOTE ) Pickup2 setting is same as Pickup1 setting above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
268
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Time Delay1
[FORWARD POWER]
Pickup1:
0.00
>Time Delay1: 5.00
Pickup2:
0.00
Time Delay2: 5.00
Range
0.02~600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01
Set each time delay of forward power element 1.
[0.02~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.
8.1.19.3. Directional Power(32P)
ETR300-R has two directional power(32P) elements. If measured three phase power is kept above
the pickup level for a certain time and measured phasor angle of the power is located on operation
area, the element are operated.
Q
Operation
Area
Minimum
Operation
Power
Directional
Power
Torque
Angle
P
Restraint
Area
Figure 8-18. Directional Power(32P) Elements Characteristic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
269
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
The direction power should be enabled to followingsettings;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Min.Power1
[DIRECTION POWER]
>Min.Power1:
OFF
Angle1:
0.00
Time Delay1:
0.00
Min.Power2:
OFF
Angle2:
0.00
Range
0(OFF), -300.00~300.00 MW
Default 0(OFF)
Step
0.01 MW
Set the minimum power level for directional power element 1.
-300.00~+300.00:0.01
*. NOTE ) Min.Power2 setting is same as Min.Power1 setting above.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Angle 1
[DIRECTION POWER]
Min.Power1:
OFF
>Angle1:
0.00
Time Delay1:
0.00
Min.Power2:
OFF
Angle2:
0.00
Range
0.00~359.99 degree
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 degree
Set torque degree for directional power element 1.
0.00~359.99:0.01deg
*. NOTE ) Angle2 setting is same as Angle1 setting above.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER / Time Delay 1
[DIRECTION POWER]
Min.Power1:
OFF
Angle1:
0.00
>Time Delay1:
1.00
Min.Power2:
OFF
Angle2:
0.00
Range
0.02~600.00 sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set time delay for directional power element 1.
[0.02~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
270
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.20. Demand (49)
ETR300-R has five types for demand detect elements.When Demand currnet or demand power
over the detect level is maintained a constant time during the detect element activation, this element
is detected. The detect level and delay time can be set individually per phase current, ground
current, negative sequence current, active power and reactive power elements.
And the demand current menu is composed with 5 sub-menus as follows:
[DEMAND]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.NEG SEQ’
4.ACTIVE POWER
5.REACTIVE POWER
8.1.20.1. Phase Demand Current (49P)
Phase demand current element setting items are same as following;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE /Function
[PHASE]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup:
500
Time Delay:
10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether phase demand current element is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Pickup
[PHASE]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup:
500
Time Delay:
10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Range
10~1600A
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the pickup level of the phase demand current element
[10~1600:1 A]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
271
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Time Delay
[PHASE]
Pickup:
500
>Time Delay:
10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15
0.00~600.00
Range
Default 10.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the time delay of the phase demand current element
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Demand Type
THERMAL, BLOCK
[PHASE]
Pickup:
500
Time Delay:
10.00
>Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15
Range
[THERMAL/BLOCK]
element.
Default THERMAL
Step
~
Set the type of arithmetic operation for the phase demand current
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Thermal Interval
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
[PHASE]
Pickup:
500
Time Delay:
10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
>Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15
Range
[5/10/15/20/30/60m]
is seleted for arithmetic operation.
Default 15
Step
~
Set the interval of the phase demand current element when thermal type
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Block Interval
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
[PHASE]
Pickup:
500
Time Delay:
10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
>Block Interval: 15
Range
[5/10/15/20/30/60m]
is seleted for arithmetic operation.
Default 15
Step
~
Set the interval of the phase demand current element when block type
8.1.20.2. Ground Demand Current (49G)
Ground demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.
8.1.20.3. Negative Sequence Demand Current (49Q)
Negative sequence demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand
current element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
272
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.20.4. ACTIVE POWER Setup
Active demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.
8.1.20.5. REACTIVE POWER Setup
Reactive demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
273
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.21. Hotline Tag
When “HOT LINE TAG” LED is ON in the front panel, the time overcurrent elements are operated
with the setting value of this menu(However, this setting is also applied for sensitive earth faults).
Also, Lockout with 1 time trip even the reclosing function is activated. The Hot Line Tag function
is composed of phase, ground, SEF and negative sequence overcurrent elements with T-C curves
for Hot Line Tag function only.
Hotline Tag menu is composed with 4 sub-menus as follows;
[HOTLINE TAG]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ’
8.1.21.1. PHASE
In this menu, T-C curve of phase time overcurrent elememts applied in Hotline Tag function is set.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Curve
[PHASE]
>Curve:
[US-NI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
[curves: total 62]
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Default US-NI
Step
~
Set T-C curve of hot line tag function for phase time overcurrent
elements. Applicable curve ragne refers to “Table 8-2. Recloser timecurrent operation characteristic setting range”.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Time Dial
0.05 ~ 15.00
[PHASE]
Curve:
[US-NI]
>Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
Range
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
changes the slop of a curve.
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
274
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Time Add.
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
[PHASE]
Curve:
[US-NI]
Time Dial:
1.00
>Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
More delays due to this set time including its own delay time.
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Adding a time onto a set curve.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / M.R.T
[PHASE]
Curve:
[US-NI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
>M.R.T:
0.00
Reset Method: INST
[0.00~10.00:0.01 s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time,
tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be
cooperated with other protection device or fuse.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Reset Method
[PHASE]
Curve:
[US-NI]
Time Dial:
1.00
Time Add.:
0.00
M.R.T:
0.00
>Reset Method: INST
[INST/LINEAR]
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step
~
In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold
load pickup element is reset.
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
8.1.21.2. GROUND
This menu sets the T-C curve of the ground time overcurrent elememts applied in the Hotline Tag
function. The setting items are the same as the PHASE menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
275
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.21.3. SEF
This menu sets the time delay for sensitive earth fault in Hotline Tag function.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / SEF / Time Delay
[SEF]
>Time Delay:
Range
10.00
0.00~600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the time delay of sensitive earth fault in Hotline Tag function.
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
8.1.21.4. NEG SEQ’
This menu sets the T-C curve of the negative sequence time overcurrent elememts applied in the
Hotline Tag function. The setting items are the same as the PHASE menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
276
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.22. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves
The ETR300-R has a total of 62 kinds of standard curves: ANSI / IEEE curves, IEC curves, US
curves and Definite time curves, KEPCO ES curves, KERI curves, 4 user-defined curves, 3 fuse
curves, 32 non standard curves. According to Standard ANSI / IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3, tirp
operation times and reset times can be defined as follows.
The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :
US
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA
ANSI/IEEE
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA
IEC
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA
ES
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA
USER-DEFINED
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA
RESET TIME
Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2))
Table 8-3. Curve Factor
TD
Time dial
TA
Time adder
α, β, γ
Characteristic constant
M
Multiples of pickup current
Rt
Reset characteristic constant
NOTE :
“Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸,
otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
277
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.22.1. User-Defined Curves
ETR300-R은 4개의 user-defined curves를 제공한다. 본 설정을 통하여 사용자가 원하는 curves
을 구현하여 사용할 수 있다. 4종의 각 커브에 대해 앞에서 기술된 trip operation time 및 reset
time 연산식의 characteristic constant를 사용자가 정의할 수 있다.
[USER CURVE]
>1.USER CURVE1
2.USER CURVE2
3.USER CURVE3
4.USER CURVE4
1) USER CURVE1 Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a
[USER CURVE 1]
>Factor a:
59.5000
Factor b:
2.0200
Factor r:
1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Default 59.5000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor α
[0~150.9998:0.0001]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b
[USER CURVE 1]
Factor a:
59.5000
>Factor b:
2.0000
Factor r:
1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Default 2.0000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor β
[0~150.9998:0.0001]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r
[USER CURVE 1]
Factor a:
59.5000
Factor b:
2.0200
>Factor r:
1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Default 1.8000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor γ
[0~150.9998:0.0001]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
278
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt
[USER CURVE 1]
Factor a:
59.5000
Factor b:
2.0200
Factor r:
1.8000
>Factor rt: 59.5000
0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Range
Default 59.5000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor rt
[0~150.9998:0.0001]
2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 Setup
USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
279
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.22.2. Standard Curves Coefficients
Table 8-4. US Curve
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Normally Inverse
5.95
2.0
0.18
5.95
Very Inverse
3.88
2.0
0.0963
3.55
Extremely Inverse
5.67
2.0
0.0352
5.67
Short Time Inverse
0.00342
0.02
0.00262
0.323
Short Time Very Inverse
1.9925
2.0
0.0475
1.992
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Normally Inverse
0.1400
0.0200
0.0
9.700
Very Inverse
13.500
1.000
0.0
13.500
Extremely Inverse
80.000
2.000
0.0
80.000
Long Time Inverse
135.000
1.000
0.0
135.00
Short Time Inverse
0.0500
0.0400
0.0
0.500
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Normally Inverse
0.011
0.02
0.042
9.000
Very Inverse
3.985
1.95
0.1084
3.985
Extremely Inverse
2.82
2.00
0.01217
2.91
Long Time Very Inverse
15.94
1.95
0.4336
15.94
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Normally Inverse
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
Very Inverse
19.61
2.0
0.491
21.6
Extremely Inverse
28.2
2.0
0.1217
29.1
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Definite Time 1sec
0.0
-
1.0
1.0
Definite Time 10sec
0.0
-
10.0
10.0
Table 8-5. IEC Curve
Table 8-6. ES Curve
Table 8-7. ANSI/IEEE Curve
Table 8-8. Definite Time
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
280
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.22.3. Non Standard Curves
Table 8-9. Non Standard Curves
McGraw-Edison recloser curves
Phase
Ground
Old
New
Old
New
A
101
1
102
B
117
2
135
C
133
3
140
D
116
4
106
E
132
5
114
K
162
6
136
L
107
7
152
M
118
8
113
N
104
8*
111
P
115
9
131
R
105
11
141
T
161
13
142
V
137
14
119
W
138
15
112
Y
120
16
139
Z
134
18
151
Table 8-10. KEPCO(Korea) Curvers
Curves
N1, N2, N3, N4
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
281
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.22.4. Fuse Curves
1) RI Curve Trip Time
“RI” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with mechanical relay. When “RI” curve is
applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.
Trip Time 
1
I 
0.339  0.236 Is
Here, TD is set time dial,
Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.
I is actual fault current.
2) HR Curve Trip Time
“HR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “HR” curve is
applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.
Trip Time  10
I 

log 2    ( 3.832)  3.66
 Is 

1
0.1
Here, TD is set time dial,
Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.
I is actual fault current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
282
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3) FR Curve Trip Time
“FR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “FR” is applied,
inverse protection element is operated by following formula.
Trip Time  10
Trip Time  10
 I 
log   ( 7.16)  3.0
 Is 
 I 
log   ( 5.4 )  2.47
 Is 
Trip Time  10

1
0.1
, when 1.2 

1
0.1
, when 2.0 
1
0.1
, when 2.66 
 I 
log   ( 4.24) 1.98
 Is 

I
 2.0
IS
··formula (1)
I
 2.66 ·formula (2)
IS
I
IS
··formula (3)
Here, TD is set time dial,
Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.
I is actual fault current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
283
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.22.5. Curves
Table 8-11. Curve List
No
Curve
No
Curve
No
Curve
1
A(101)
22
3(140)
43
ES-NI
2
B(117)
23
4(106)
44
ES-VI
3
C(133)
24
5(114)
45
USER-1
4
D(116)
25
6(136)
46
USER-2
5
E(132)
26
7(152)
47
USER-3
6
IEC-EI
27
8(113)
48
USER-4
7
K(162)
28
8*(111)
49
DEF-1S
8
L(107)
29
9(131)
50
DEF-10S
9
M(118)
30
11(141)
51
IEEE-NI
10
N(104)
31
13(142)
52
IEEE-VI
11
IEC-NI
32
14(119)
53
IEEE-EI
12
P(115)
33
15(112)
54
US-STI
13
R(105)
34
16(139)
55
US-STVI
14
T(161)
35
18(151)
56
IEC-LTI
15
V(137)
36
N1
57
IEC-STI
16
IEC-VI
37
N2
58
ES-LTVI
17
W(138)
38
N3
59
ES-EI
18
Y(120)
39
N4
60
RI
19
Z(134)
40
US-NI
61
HR
20
1(102)
41
US -VI
62
FR
21
2(135)
42
US -EI
Table 8-12. Curve Characteristics
*. Curve time is Clearing Time.
*. Operation accuracy is +/-5% or +/-10㎳.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
284
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: US NORMALLY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
15.00
13.00
2
11.00
2
9.00
7.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
5.00
4.00
3.00
0.5
0.4
Time(Second)
0.5
0.4
2.00
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.5
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.04
0.03
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
Time(Second)
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
1) US Nermally Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-19. US Normally Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
285
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
2) US Very Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: US VERY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
15.00
13.00
11.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
9.00
7.00
0.5
5.00
0.5
0.4
4.00
0.4
0.3
3.00
0.3
0.2
2.00
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.5
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
0.01
600
0.01
500
0.02
400
0.02
300
0.03
200
0.04
0.03
100
0.04
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
2
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-20. US Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
286
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: US EXTREMELY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
15.00
13.00
0.5
0.5
11.00
0.4
0.4
9.00
0.3
0.3
7.00
0.2
Time(Second)
0.2
5.00
4.00
3.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
2.00
0.05
0.05
1.00
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.5
0.02
0.02
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
0.01
200
0.01
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
3) US Extremely Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-21. US Extremely Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
287
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: US SHORT TIME INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
15.00
13.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
11.00
9.00
7.00
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
5.00
0.3
0.3
4.00
3.00
0.2
Time(Second)
0.2
2.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
1.00
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.5
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
0.01
600
0.01
500
0.02
400
0.02
300
0.03
200
0.03
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
4) US Short Time Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-22. US Short Time Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
288
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: US SHORT TIME VERY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
15.00
13.00
11.00
0.5
0.5
9.00
0.4
0.4
7.00
0.3
Time(Second)
0.3
5.00
0.2
0.2
4.00
3.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
2.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
1.00
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.5
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
0.01
400
0.01
300
0.02
200
0.02
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
5) US Short Time Very Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-23. US Short Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
289
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: IEC NORMALLY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.5
Time(Second)
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.04
0.03
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
Time(Second)
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
6) IEC Normally Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-24. IEC Normally Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
290
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: IEC VERY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
Time(Second)
0.5
1
0.4
0.4
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.2
0.05
0.05
0.1
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.05
0.02
0.02
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
0.01
200
0.01
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
7) IEC Very Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-25. IEC Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
291
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
400
300
400
300
200
200
100
90
80
70
60
50
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
1
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.04
0.04
0.4
0.03
Time(Second)
0.03
0.3
0.02
0.02
0.2
0.1
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
0.01
200
0.01
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
8) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-26. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
292
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
400
300
400
300
200
200
100
90
80
70
60
50
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
1
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
4
3
2
4
3
2
Time(Second)
0.3
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.05
0.2
0.2
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
0.01
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.02
700
0.02
600
0.03
500
0.04
0.03
400
0.04
300
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
200
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
9) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-27. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
293
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
400
300
400
300
200
200
100
90
80
70
60
50
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
Time(Second)
0.4
1
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.3
0.2
0.04
0.04
0.1
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
0.01
200
0.01
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
10) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-28. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
294
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
11) ES Normally Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: ES NORMALLY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
3
15.00
13.00
3
2
11.00
2
9.00
7.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
5.00
4.00
3.00
0.5
Time(Second)
0.5
0.4
0.4
2.00
0.3
0.3
0.2
1.00
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.5
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.04
0.03
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
Time(Second)
4
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-29. ES Normally Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
295
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
12) ES Very Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: ES VERY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
15.00
13.00
11.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
9.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
7.00
5.00
0.5
0.5
4.00
0.4
0.4
3.00
0.3
0.3
2.00
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.5
0.05
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.01
600
0.02
500
0.02
400
0.03
300
0.04
0.03
200
0.04
100
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
2
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-30. ES Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
296
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: ES EXTREMELY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
Time(Second)
0.3
15.00
13.00
0.2
0.2
11.00
9.00
7.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
5.00
4.00
0.05
0.05
3.00
0.04
0.03
0.04
0.03
2.00
0.02
0.02
1.00
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
0.01
3k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
2k
0.5
0.01
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
13) ES Extremely Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-31. ES Extremely Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
297
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: ES LONG TIME VERY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
15.00
13.00
10
9
8
7
6
5
11.00
5
4
9.00
4
3
7.00
3
5.00
2
2
4.00
3.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
2.00
0.5
0.5
1.00
0.4
Time(Second)
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.2
0.2
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
0.01
3k
0.01
2k
0.02
800
900
1k
0.02
700
0.03
600
0.04
0.03
500
0.05
0.04
400
0.05
300
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
200
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
100
Time(Second)
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
14) ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-32. ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
298
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
15) IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: IEEE NORMALLY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
15.00
13.00
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
11.00
9.00
7.00
5
5
5.00
4
4
4.00
3
3
3.00
2
2.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1.00
0.5
Time(Second)
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
8k
9k
10k
0.01
7k
0.01
6k
0.02
5k
0.02
4k
0.03
3k
0.04
0.03
2k
0.05
0.04
800
900
1k
0.05
700
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
600
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
500
0.2
400
0.2
300
0.3
200
0.3
100
Time(Second)
2
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-33. IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
299
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
16) IEEE Very Inverse Curves
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: IEEE VERY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
15.00
13.00
11.00
5
5
9.00
4
4
7.00
3
3
5.00
4.00
2
3.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
2.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1.00
0.5
0.4
Time(Second)
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.5
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
0.01
5k
0.01
4k
0.02
3k
0.02
2k
0.03
800
900
1k
0.04
0.03
700
0.05
0.04
600
0.05
500
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
400
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
300
0.2
200
0.2
100
Time(Second)
2
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-34. IEEE Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
300
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: US EXTREMELY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
15.00
13.00
2
2
11.00
9.00
7.00
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
5.00
4.00
0.5
0.5
3.00
0.4
0.3
Time(Second)
0.4
0.3
2.00
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.5
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.04
0.03
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
Time(Second)
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
17) IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-35. IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
301
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: DEFINITE TIME 1 sec, 10 sec
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
DEF-10S
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
DEF-1S
0.01
8k
9k
10k
0.01
7k
0.02
6k
0.02
5k
0.03
4k
0.04
0.03
3k
0.05
0.04
2k
0.05
800
900
1k
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
700
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
600
0.2
500
0.2
400
0.3
300
0.4
0.3
200
0.5
0.4
100
0.5
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
18) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-36. Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
302
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
N2
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
Time(Second)
0.2
N4
N3
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
N1
0.05
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.01
600
0.02
500
0.02
400
0.03
300
0.04
0.03
200
0.04
100
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
19) KEPRI Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-37. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
303
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: A, B, C, D, E
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
Time(Second)
C
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
D
0.05
A
0.04
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
B
E
0.05
0.04
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
0.01
600
0.01
500
0.02
400
0.02
300
0.03
200
0.03
100
Time(Second)
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
20) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-38. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
304
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: KP, L, M, N
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
N
K
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
L
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
M
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.04
0.03
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
21) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-39. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
305
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: P, R, T, V
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
V
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
T
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
P
0.05
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
R
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.01
600
0.02
500
0.02
400
0.03
300
0.04
0.03
200
0.04
100
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
22) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-40. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
306
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: P, R, T, V
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
V
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
T
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
P
0.05
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
R
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.01
600
0.02
500
0.02
400
0.03
300
0.04
0.03
200
0.04
100
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
23) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-41. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
307
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
3
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
2
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
5
4
1
0.05
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
0.01
700
0.01
600
0.02
500
0.02
400
0.03
300
0.04
0.03
200
0.04
100
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
24) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-42. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
308
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
7
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
9
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
8
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
8*
0.05
0.05
6
0.04
0.04
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
0.01
600
0.01
500
0.02
400
0.02
300
0.03
200
0.03
100
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
25) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-43. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
309
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k
9k
10k
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
11
9
8
7
6
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
18
14
0.4
Time(Second)
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
13
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
17
16
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.05
15
0.04
0.04
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
0.01
600
0.01
500
0.02
400
0.02
300
0.03
200
0.03
100
Time(Second)
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
26) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-44. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
310
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100
90
80
70
60
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
27) Fuse Curves
100
90
80
70
60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
: FUSE (RI, HR, FR)
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
40
50
40
30
30
20
20
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
RI
3
2
2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.02
Time(Second)
0.02
HR
FR
8k
9k
10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800
900
1k
700
600
500
400
300
0.01
200
0.01
100
Time(Second)
3
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-45. Fuse Curves (RI, HR, FR)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
311
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.1.23. Others
8.1.23.1. Sequence Coordination
When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, ETR300-R contains
Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Backup and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination feature is activated
only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault
current.
Following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature.
The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations and
identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series.
The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series.
To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms)
should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to those of
Down-line Reclosers.
The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all Downline Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during the reclose
operation of Down-lines.
The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled as follows;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / OTHERS / Seq' Coordinate
[OTHERS]
>Seq’ Coordinate:OFF
L.O Priority:GROUND
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary
[OFF/ON]
operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are
connected in series.
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = ON, the feature is operational.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
312
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
As shown in “Figure 8-46. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence
Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution
systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements. During the count
at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line
Recloser , the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step.
Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at
the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence
Coordination function can not be operated.
Increase Trip Counter without Trip
Starting
Reset Time
Counter
Close
Back Up
EVR 1
Down line
EVR 2
Open
Close
Lockout Status
Open
Time
Faulted
Figure 8-46. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram
8.1.23.2. Other settings
GROUP # / RECLOSER / OTHERS / L.O Priority
[OTHERS]
Seq’ Coordinate:OFF
>L.O Priority:GROUND
Range
PHASE, GROUND
Default GROUND
Step
~
Set the Lockout priority
[PHASE,GROUND]
PHASE : Phase prior
GROUND: Ground prior
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
313
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.2. Sectionalizer
This menu sets the auto sectionalizer function via fault indication. If the control type of ETR-300R
is set to 'SECTIONALIZER' mode, move the functions of this menu.
Place the curser on “SECTIONALIZER” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. This menu is sub-divided as follow;
[SECTIONALIZER]
>1.PICKUP CURRENT
>2.INRUSH TIME
>3.AUTO SECTION
8.2.1. FI Pickup Current
This menu sets fault pickup current for fault indication (FI). Fault pikcup current is individually set
for Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative sequence current. If the fault current
disappears in the dead line after the current is maintained above the pickup current in the live line,
it indicates a fault indication.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
500
Ground:
250
SEF:
OFF
NEG Seq’:
OFF
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10~1600A
Default 500
Step
1
Set the minimum pickup current to detect phase fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON
for a phase fault indication (FI).
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
500
>Ground:
250
SEF:
OFF
NEG Seq’:
OFF
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10~1600A
Default 250
Step
1
Set the minimum pickup current to detect ground fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' and 'GROUND ENABLED' LEDs on
the front panel must be ON for a ground fault indication (FI).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
314
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / SEF
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
600
Ground:
250
>SEF:
OFF
>NEG Seq’:
OFF
[0(OFF),0.1~160.0A]
Range
0(OFF), 0.1~160.0A
Default 600
Step
1
Set the minimum pickup current to detect sensitive earth fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED', 'GROUND ENABLED' and 'SEF
ENABLED' LEDs on the front panel must be ON for a sensitive earth
fault indication (FI).
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq’
[PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase:
600
Ground:
250
SEF:
OFF
>NEG Seq’:
OFF
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10~1600A
Default 250
Step
1
Set the minimum pickup current to detect negative sequency fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON
for a negative sequential fault indication (FI).
8.2.2. Inrush Time
ETR300-R has inrush restraint function to prevent the malfunction by inrush current produced at
the restoration of load supply. Inrush restraint function setting can be set separately in phase,
ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence. During the inrush time after the restoration of
load supply, FI(fault indicator) about phase, residual ground, ground and negative sequence is not
detected.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / INRUSH DURATION T / Phase
[INRUSH DURATION T]
>Phase:
2.00
Ground:
2.00
SEF:
2.00
Neg Seq’:
2.00
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the block time for inrush current of phase.
*. NOTE ) Setting for Ground, SEF and Neg Seq’ are same as Phase setting above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
315
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.2.3. Auto Setction
The purpose of using Auto Section function is to keep the normal operation by isolating Fault Area
as to cooperate with Recloser or C/B when a fault has occurred. This function supports the
following two types;

Auto Sectionalizer(AS)
 AS trips due to Fault current and Line Voltage.
 When a fault has occurred in the load side of AS, C/B trips and High Voltage line becomes
Dead line Voltage(DV). Due to the number of Count, AS trips(is opened).

Tie point Switch(TS)
 TS is located at Open point and is used for bi-directional(reversed line direction) operation.
 TS is operated due to Line Voltage.
 Either Source side or Load side of TS, becomes Dead line Voltage(DV), TS operates(is
closed) depending upon the number of count.
 When the source side and Load side become Dead line Voltage(DV), TS is automatically
opened.
 TS must be cooperated with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.
 To prevent further fault, TS shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips
and disconnects a fault area.
 ETNEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source side and Load side
become Dead line Voltage(DV) and it has the automatic closing function called Looping
control function When High Voltage line becomes Live line Voltage(LV).
Please refer to “8.2.3.2. Auto Section Application” for more detail information of Auto
Sectionalizer function.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
316
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.2.3.1. Auto Sectionalizer Setup
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / Type Select
[AUTO SECTION]
>Type Select:
OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
[OFF/SEC/TIE]
OFF, SEC, TIE
Range
Default OFF
Step
~
Select whether to use this function or not.
 SEC : Select for Auto Sectionalizer.
 TIE : Select for Tie point Switch.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Operate Cnt
[AUTO SECTION]
Type Select:
OFF
>SEC Operate Cnt: 1
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
[1~5:1]
1 ~ 5 shot
Range
Default 1
Step
1 shot
Set the operation count of the Auto Sectionalizer.
 After sensing a fault current, Live line becomes Dead line
Voltage(DV), 1 is counted and sense another fault, the count
accumulate as 2.
 When the count reaches a set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is
operated.
 When the count is over the set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is
reset and not operated.
 Counter is reset by “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer or by manual closing.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Oper’ TD
[AUTO SECTION]
Type Select:
OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1
>SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
[0.00~600.00:0.01]
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 0.00
Step
0.01
Set the open operation time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.
 The timer is operated by “SEC Operate Cnt”, and after a set time,
Auto Sectionalizer is opened.
 The timer is reset if Live Line becomes LV during counting Time,
and it is also reset when the counter is over “SEC Operate Cnt”set
value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
317
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Reset TD
[AUTO SECTION]
Type Select:
OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
>SEC Reset TD: 10.00
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01
Set the reset time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.
 It is the Timer to reset a count value in “SEC Operate Cnt”.
 When Auto Sectionalizer is closed, if Source side or Load side
becomes Live Voltage (LV), Timer reset “Sec Oper’ Cnt”.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Operate Cnt
[AUTO SECTION]
Type Select:
OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00
>TIE Operate Cnt: 2
[1~5:1]
Range
1~5
Default 2
Step
1
Set the close operation count of Tie Point Switch.
 Source and Load side are Live Voltage status. When one of the sides
becomes Dead line Voltage, it counts 1, and it repeats once again, it
accumulates the count for 2.
 The counter reaches a set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is operated.
 The counter is over the set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is reset and
not operated.
 The counter is reset by “TIE Reset TD” Timer or manual trip.
 Dead line Voltage can be determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or
“TIE DL-VL TD” Timer is finished.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Close TD
[AUTO SECTION]
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
Range
0.00~600.00
Default 30.00
Step
0.01
Set the close time delay of the Tie Point Switch.
 The timer is operated due to “TIE Operate Cnt”, and after a set
time, Tie Point Switch is closed.
 During the counting, if Source and Load side become Live line
Voltage or Dead line Voltage, the timer is reset. And when the
counter is over a set value of “TIE Operate Cnt”, the timer is reset.
 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”
Timer is finished.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
318
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Open TD
[AUTO SECTION]
TIE Close TD: 30.00
>TIE Open TD: 10.00
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
Range
0.00~600.00
Default 10.00
Step
0.01
Set the open time delay of Tie Point Switch.
 The timer is operated when Source and Load sides become Dead line
Voltage, and after a set time, Tie Point Switch is opened.
 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”
Timer is finished.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Reset TD
100~600.00
[AUTO SECTION]
TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00
>TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
Range
[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]
 Timer is operated when Source side and Load side are all Live line
Default 10.00
Step
0.01
Set the reset time delay of Tie Point Switch.
 It is the timer to reset a count value in “TIE Operate Cnt”.
Voltage with Tie Point Switch opened, and it reset “TIE Operate
Cnt”.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE DL-VS TD
[AUTO SECTION]
TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
>TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
Range
0.00~600.00
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
Set deadline detection delay time of source side voltage.
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE DL-VL TD
[AUTO SECTION]
TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
>TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
Range
0.00~600.00
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
Set deadline detection delay time of load side voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
319
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Figure 8-47. Auto Sectionalizer Algorithm
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
320
VL Dead Line
http://www.entecene.co.kr
VS Dead Line
Load Side
VOLTAGE
Source Side
VOLTAGE
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
Figure 8-48. Tie Algorithm
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
321
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.2.3.2. Auto Section Application
1) Auto Sectionalizer Loop Control
Table 8-13. Auto Sectionalizer loop control
SETTING
CB1
RC1
AS1
AS2
AS3
Type Select
-
-
SEC
SEC
SEC
Sec Oper’ Cnt
-
-
3
2
3
Sec RS Delay
-
-
10.00
10.00
10.00
-
0.00
0.00
0.00
-
-
-
-
-
-
SECTIONALIZER
Sec op Delay
CB AND RECLOSER
Operate count
2 Trip
4 Trip
Lockout
Lockout
*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer)
Figure 8-49. Auto Sectionalizer loop control
PRECAUTIN 1 for SETTING
1) AS is an automatic opening equipment when Dead Line Voltage. When “SEC Oper’ TD”
time is provided, the opening time of AS shall be faster than RC1 or CB1 minimum 0.3
sec.
2) “SEC Oper’ TD” time of AS is better to set 0 second for Instantaneous Trip(Open).
3) Auto Sectionalizer Instantaneous Opening time : <80㎳
4) Entec Recloser reclose time : Minimum 0.5sec
PRECAUTION 2 for SETTING
1) “SEC Operate Cnt” setting of AS1 shall be higher than AS2 when AS1 and AS2 are in
series connection as Auto Sectionalizer.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
322
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Loop control with F1 Fault
Figure 8-50. Loop Control with F1 Fault
Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.
AS1 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.
When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F1
location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS2, AS3 is not operated because they did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS1 is opened and RC1 is closed after Reclosing 3 times.
RC1 is closed after AS1 disconnect F1 location, and keep the rest of line normal.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS1 and recover Live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
323
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Loop control with F2 Fault
Figure 8-51. Loop Control with F2 Fault
Step1 : At F2 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.
AS2 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.
When RC1 trips two times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (2).
Then F2 location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS1 is not operating because that “SEC Operate Cnt” is set for 3
AS3 is not operated because AS3 did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS2 is opened and RC1 is closed after two times of reclosing.
RC1 is closed after AS2 disconnect F2 location, and keep the rest of line normal.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS2 and recover live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
324
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Loop control with F3 Fault
Figure 8-52. Loop Control with F3 Fault
Step1 : At F3 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.
AS3 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.
When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F3
location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS1, AS2 are not operating because that they did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS3 is opened and RC1 is closed after three times of reclosing.
RC1 is closed after AS3 disconnect F3 location, and keep the rest of line normal.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS3 and recover the live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
325
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2) Tie Point Switch Loop Control
Table 8-14. Tie Point Switch Loop Control
SETTING
CB1,2
SR1,2
AS1,2
TS1
Function
-
-
SEC
TIE
Sec Oper’ Cnt
-
-
3
-
Sec RS Delay
-
-
10.00s
-
Sec op Delay
-
-
0.00s
-
Tie VRS
-
-
-
SV1 & SV2
Tie Oper’ Cnt
-
-
-
2
Tie CL Delay
-
-
-
30.00s
Tie OP Delay
-
-
-
5.00s
Tie DV1 Dly
-
-
-
1.00
Tie DV1 Dly
-
-
-
1.00
2 Trip Lockout
4 Trip Lockout
-
-
SECTIONALIZER
CB AND RECLOSER
Recloser Operate count
Figure 8-53. Tie Point Switch Loop Control
*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer), TS(Tie Point Switch)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
326
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRECAUTION for SETTING
1) TS1 must cooperate with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.
2) TS1 shall be operated when F1 is occurred in the Source side of SR, and shall be set for
not operating when F2, F3 occur in Load side.
3) To prevent further fault, TS1 shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips
and disconnects a fault area.
4) ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source and Load side
become Dead line Voltage (DV), and automatically closed when Source side and Load
side become Live line Voltage (LV).
5) The count number of SR1 and AS1 shall be larger than the count number of TS1.
6) “TIE Operate Cnt” of TS1 is set 2, AS1 shall be set 3, and SR1 shall be set 4 to cooperate
with AS1.
7) TS shall not be closed when a fault occurs between SR1 and TS1. If “TIE Operate Cnt”
of TS1 is set to 2, Close delay time shall be set to longer than 5 seconds which is 2 times
of SR1 reclosing time.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
327
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Loop control with F1 Fault
Figure 8-54. Loop Control with F1 Fault
Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing
cycle.
Step2 : SR1 counts Dead line Voltage time till a set time, then automatically opens (disconnects)
F1 location.
“TIE Operate Cnt” is set 2. When CB1 trips two times, “TIE Close TD” is run and after
30 seconds, TS1 is closed.
F1 is disconnected and the rest of live line shall be operated to the opposite direction.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1 manually (local or remote), SR1 is automatically
closed after a setting time.
Step4 : Open TS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
328
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Loop control with F2 Fault
Figure 8-55. Loop Control with F2 Fault
Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing
cycle.
If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time is ran.
While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing,
and Close delay time is reset.
If SR1 trips three times, TS1 counts 3, it is more than “TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close
delay time doesn’t run.
When SR1 trips 4 times and locked out, TS1 counts 4. Close delay time doesn’t run.
Step2 : Open SR1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
329
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Loop control with F3 Fault
Figure 8-56. Loop Control with F3 Fault
Step1 : At F3 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, SR1 trips 4 times and locked out after
conducting reclosing cycle.
If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time runs.
While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing,
and Close delay time is reset.
If SR1 trips three times, AS1 is automatically opened, TS1 counts 3, and it is more than
“TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close delay time doesn’t run.
Step2 : After AS1 disconnects with F3, SR1 is reclosed and keeps the rest of live line normal.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close AS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
330
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.3. Monitoring
Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. In this menu, it can set up monitoring function for line condition.
[MONITORING]
>1.PHASE DIFFERENCE
2.SYNCHRO’ CHECK
3.OPEN PHASE
4.LIVE LINE BLOCK
5.FAULT LOCATOR
6.LOAD CURR’ ALARM
7.POWER FACTOR
8.3.1. Phase Difference
Place the curser on “PHASE DIFFERENCE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. The ETR300-R provides a phase difference element to check whether the
source side and the load side are in the open state. If the difference in voltage magnitude, phase
difference, and frequency difference between the source side and the load side deviate from the set
value, it is determined that synchronization is inconsistent and a DIFFPT (Phase Different Timeout)
event is registered. In the PLC configuration, manual close can be blocked by local or remote
control in case of synchronization inconsistency (Manual close is blocked when default is not
matched with synchronization)
The phase difference element in following settings should be enabled.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Function
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
>Function:
DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
It decides whether to use Phase difference element.
[OFF/ON]
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Dead Line Lv
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
Function:
DISABLE
>Dead Line Lv: 0.50
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 0.50
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the dead line maximum voltage for phase difference
Used to Prevent the phase difference element for voltage below this
level.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
331
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Live Line Lv
0.10~1.40 xVT
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
Function:
DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50
>Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10
Range
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Used to activate the phase difference element for voltage over this
Default 0.80
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the live line minimum voltage for phase difference element.
level.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Volt Diff
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
Function:
DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50
Live Line Lv: 0.80
>Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
0.10~1.40 xVT
Range
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the maximum voltage difference.
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Angle Diff
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
Function:
DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
>Max Angle Diff: 10
[1~100:1 deg]
1 ~ 100 degree
Range
Default 10
Step
1 degree
Enter the maximum angle difference of the phase difference element.
An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is
within the permissible limit for phase difference element.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Freq. Diff
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
>Max Freq.Diff: 2.00
Check Phase:
ALL
Time Delay:
1.0
[0.01~5.00:0.01 Hz]
0.01 ~ 5.00 Hz
Range
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Enter the maximum frequency difference of voltages.
A frequency differential between the voltages below this value is within
the permissible limit for phase difference element.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Check Phase
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
Max Freq.Diff: 2.0
>Check Phase:
ALL
Time Delay:
1.0
[ALL/A/B/C]
ALL, A, B, C
Range
Default ALL
Step
~
Select reference voltage for phase difference element on load side.
ALL : Three phase voltages on load side are used for phase difference
element.
A/B/C : Single phase voltage on load side is used for phase difference
element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
332
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Time delay
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
>Max Freq.Diff: 2.0
Check Phase:
ALL
>Time Delay:
1.00
Range
0.0 ~ 600.0sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01sec
Set delay time for phase difference element
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
8.3.2. Synchro’ Check (25)
The ETR300-R provides a synchronism check element. The synchronism check element is used
when both the source and load side circuit are in a live state, when the phases of the two circuits are
synchronized. If it remains in the asynchronous state for the set waiting time, it will not close even
after synchronization.
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, it is determined to be as synchornization.
 The voltage of the source side and the load side must be within the synchronous detection range.
If the voltage is out of the lower limit value (Min. Volt) and the upper limit value (Max. Volt), it
is determined that the voltage of the system is not stable and it is determined as asynchronous.
 The frequency on the source side and the load side must be within ± 5 Hz of the rated value.
 The voltage difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to
the set voltage.
 The frequency difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to
the set frequency difference.
 The phase difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the
set
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
333
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
The phase difference (ΔAngle) of the two circuits means the sum of the currently measured phase
difference(∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 ) and the compensation value (∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑒 ) of the phase difference
to be generated during body turn-in time by the slip frequency. The formula for calculating the
phase difference is as follows;
∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = | ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 + ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑒 |
= | (∠𝑉𝑆 − ∠𝑉𝐿 ) + { (𝑓𝑆 − 𝑓𝐿 ) × 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑐𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑒 × 360° } |
*. NOTE) The variables used in the above equation are as follows.
− ∠𝑉𝑆 : Voltage phase at the source side
− ∠𝑉𝐿 : Voltage phase at the load side
− 𝑓𝑆 : Frequency at source, 𝑓𝐿 : Frequency at load, Sleep Frequency: 𝑓𝑆 - 𝑓𝐿
− 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑐𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑒 : Recloser closing time [s]
However, when the source side or load side circuit is diagonal, it is always closes regardless of
synchronous detection.
The synchronism check element in following settings should be enabled.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Function
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
>Function:
DISABLE
Max.Volt:
1.10
Min.Volt:
0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1:
30.0
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
It decides whether to use synchronism check element.
[DISABLE,ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Function:
DISABLE
>Max.Volt:
1.10
Min.Volt:
0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1:
30.0
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 1.10
Step
0.01 xVT
It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
334
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Min.Volt
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Function:
DISABLE
Max.Volt:
1.10
>Min.Volt:
0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1:
30.0
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 0.30
Step
0.01 xVT
It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt Diff
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Function:
DISABLE
Max.Volt:
1.10
Min.Volt:
0.30
>Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1:
30.0
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 xVT
Enter the maximum voltage difference.
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Angle Diff 1
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Function:
DISABLE
Max.Volt:
1.10
Min.Volt:
0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
>Angle Diff1:
30.0
0(OFF),20.0~80.0deg
Range
0(OFF), 20.0~80.0 degree
Default 30.0
Step
0.1 degree
Enter the maximum angle difference.
An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is
within the permissible limit for synchronism check.
*. NOTE) Angle Diff 2 is same as Angle Diff 1 above.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Slip Freq.
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Angle Diff2:
30.0
>Slip Freq.:
1.0
Sync Phase:
A
Compens’ Angle:
0
Load-V Factor: 1.00
[0.5~5.0:0.1 Hz]
Range
0.5~5.0 Hz
Default 1.0
Step
0.1 Hz
Enter the maximum slip frequency(frequency difference).
An angular differential between the frequency below this value is
within the permissible limit for synchronism check.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Sync Phase
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Angle Diff2:
30.0
Slip Freq.:
1.0
>Sync Phase:
A
Compens’ Angle:
0
Load-V Factor: 1.00
Range
A, B, C, AB, BC, CA
Default A
Step
~
Select reference voltage for synchronism check element on load side.
[A/B/C/AB/BC/CA]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
335
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Compens’ Angle
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Angle Diff2:
30.0
Slip Freq.:
1.0
Sync Phase:
A
>Compens’ Angle:
0
Load-V Factor: 1.00
[0~330:30 deg]
0~330 degree
Range
Default 0
Step
30 degree
When calculating the phase difference between the source side and the
load side, set the load side compensate angle. The load side angle is
the actual measured angle plus the set value.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Load-V Factor
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Angle Diff2:
30.0
Slip Freq.:
1.0
Sync Phase:
A
Compens’ Angle:
0
>Load-V Factor: 1.00
[0.50~2.00:0.01]
0.50~2.00
Range
Default 1.00
Step
0.01
It is the compensation factor of the load side voltage magnitude. When
calculating the voltage difference between the source side and the load
side, it will apply this value to the load side voltage multiplied by this
set value.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Closing Time
0.0~600.0 ms
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Sync Phase:
A
Compens’ Angle:
0
Load-V Factor: 1.00
>Closing Time: 50.0
CL Wait Time:
10
Range
[0.0~600.0:0.1 ms]
value can be changed according to the recloser closing time.
Default 50.0
Step
0.1 ms
It sets the time to close the rcloser. The phase difference calculation
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / CL Wait Time
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]
Sync Phase:
A
Compens’ Angle:
0
Load-V Factor: 1.00
Closing Time: 50.0
>CL Wait Time:
10
[1~600:1 s]
Range
1~600 sec
Default 10
Step
1 sec
It sets synchronous detection input wait time. If the synchronous
condition is not satisfied during this set time after manual close
command, it does not close.
The front panel “25 PHASE DIFFERENCE” LED lights up when the
manual close command is in the standby state.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
336
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.3.3. Open Phase
This function determines phase as open pahse when one or two phase voltages are more than Off
Level and determines as normal if that all three phase voltages are higher than On Level. Dead line
normal condition it does not indicate open phase.
When detecting the open phase, the corresponding LED of the open phase LED (VA / VR, VB /
VS, VC / VT) on the front panel lights up.
The setting items of OPEN PHASE element are same as below.
GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE / Function
[OPEN PHASE]
>Function:
DISABLE
On Level:
0.80
>Off Level:
0.50
Time Delay:
4.00
Range
[DISABLE,ENABLE]
not.
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether it activates open phase function to detect open phase or
GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ On Level
[OPEN PHASE]
Function:
DISABLE
>On Level:
0.80
>Off Level:
0.50
Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 0.80
Step
0.01 xVT
Set voltage level to detect open of phase.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Off Level
[OPEN PHASE]
Function:
DISABLE
On Level:
0.80
>Off Level:
0.50
Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 0.50
Step
0.01 xVT
Set voltage level to detect loss of phase.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Time Delay
[OPEN PHASE]
Function:
DISABLE
On Level:
0.80
Off Level:
0.50
>Time Delay:
4.00
Range
0.00~600.00 sec
Default 4.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set delay time to detect open phase.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
337
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.3.4. Live Line Block
It is to block reloser closing if the load side is live line.
GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE LINE BLOCK / Function
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]
>Funcktion: DISABLE
>Live Block:
BOTH
>Live Level:
0.80
Source:
BOTH
Time Delay:
0.10
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default OFF
Step
~
It decides whether to use Live line block.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Block
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]
Funcktion:
OFF
>Live Block:
BOTH
Live Level:
0.80
Source:
BOTH
Time Delay:
0.10
[RECLOSE/CLOSE/BOTH]
Range
RECLOSE, CLOSE, BOTH
Default BOTH
Step
~
Select whether to use Live load block function.
RECLOSE: When recloser closing by auto reclosing function, this
function works.
CLOSE: When local or remote closing, the function works.
BOTH: When recloser closing regardless of auto reclosing or
remote/local closing, the function works.
GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Level
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]
Funcktion:
OFF
Live Block:
BOTH
>Live Level:
0.80
Source:
BOTH
Time Delay:
0.10
Range
0.10~1.40 xVT
Default 0.80
Step
0.01 xVT
Step
~
Set pickup level of live line
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Source
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]
Funcktion:
OFF
Live Block:
BOTH
>Live Level:
0.80
>Source:
VS&VL
Time Delay:
0.10
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
Range
VS, VL, VS&VL
Default VS&VL
Set which side of voltage to detect live line.
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
 VS&VL : Recloser’s Source and Load Side Voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
338
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE/DEAD BLOCK / Time Delay
0.00~600.00 sec
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]
Funcktion:
OFF
Live Block:
BOTH
>Live Level:
0.80
Source:
VS&VL
>Time Delay:
0.10
Range
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.
Default 0.10
Step
0.01sec
Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if
8.3.5. Fault Locator
The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase
of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type (phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground),
phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault
distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.
This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are
a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors
could be introduced by several reasons (fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance
can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage.
For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data
is required at least 2 cycles.
If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily
achieved, but source impedance is not required.
Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow.
In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful.
The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.
Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-36. Faulted
distribution system circuit” for example.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
339
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
(1-m)Z
mZ
IA
IF
VA
L
O
A
D
RF
Figure 8-57. Faulted distribution system circuit
The calculated “Fault Location” information be checked on the “Fault Cycle” event menu. For
more details, refer to “9.2. Fault Event” and “9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary”.
This function is only applied when the controller type of ETR300-R is “RECLOSER” mode.
The fault locator settings are as follows;
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function
[FAULT LOCATOR]
>Function:
DISABLE
Feeder Length: 5.0
Z1 (Real):
1.00
Z1 (Imag):
1.00
Z0 (Real):
1.00
Z0 (Imag):
1.00
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
It decides whether to use Fault locator.
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length
[FAULT LOCATOR]
Function:
DISABLE
>Feeder Length: 5.0
Z1 (Real):
1.00
Z1 (Imag):
1.00
Z0 (Real):
1.00
Z0 (Imag):
1.00
[1.0~99.9:0.1km]
Range
1.0 ~ 99.9 km
Default 5.0
Step
0.1 km
Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
340
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Real)
[FAULT LOCATOR]
Function:
DISABLE
Feeder Length: 5.0
>Z1 (Real):
1.00
Z1 (Imag):
1.00
Z0 (Real):
1.00
Z0 (Imag):
1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]
Range
0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Default 1.00
Step
0.01ohm
Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Imag)
[FAULT LOCATOR]
Function:
DISABLE
Feeder Length: 0.0
Z1 (Real):
1.00
Z1 (Imag):
1.00
Z0 (Real):
1.00
Z0 (Imag):
1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]
Range
0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Default 1.00
Step
0.01ohm
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Real)
[FAULT LOCATOR]
Function:
DISABLE
Feeder Length: 0.0
Z1 (Real):
1.00
Z1 (Imag):
1.00
Z0 (Real):
1.00
Z0 (Imag):
1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]
Range
0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Default 1.00
Step
0.01ohm
Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
in actual ohms.
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Imag)
[FAULT LOCATOR]
Function:
DISABLE
Feeder Length: 0.0
Z1 (Real):
1.00
Z1 (Imag):
1.00
Z0 (Real):
1.00
Z0 (Imag):
1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]
Range
0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Default 1.00
Step
0.01ohm
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
341
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.3.6. Load Current Alarm
ETR300-R generates a Load Current Alarm event when the value over the detect level of RMS
current is maintained for a constant time. Load Current Alarm event is generated individually for
each A, B, C, N phase and Negative Sequence. Then, the peak current measurement value is
updated by each phase current and negative sequence current at which the load current alarm event
is generated. If the function is disabled, the peak current measurement value will not be updated
even if a large current flows.
For details of the Load Current Alarm event recorded by this function, refer to “9.9. Load Current
Alarm Event” and the peak current updated by this function can be checked in the “METERING/
CURRENT” menu (Please refer to“13.1. Current” ).
Load Current Alarm setting items are same as below.
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Function
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]
>Function:
DISABLE
P-Pickup:
500
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup:
250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
~
Step
Set whether to use load current alarm function.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Pickup
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]
Function:
DISABLE
>P-Pickup:
500
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup:
250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the detect current of load current alarm about phase current.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Time Delay
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]
Function:
DISABLE
P-Pickup:
500
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup:
250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the detect time of load current alarm about the phase current.
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
342
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Pickup
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]
Function:
DISABLE
P-Pickup:
500
P-Time Delay: 0.00
>G-Pickup:
250
G-Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
Default 250
Step
1A
Set the detect current of load current alarm about ground current.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Time Delay
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]
Function:
DISABLE
P-Pickup:
500
P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup:
250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the detect time of load current alarm about the ground current.
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Pickup
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]
P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup:
250
G-Time Delay: 0.00
>Q-Pickup:
OFF
Q-Time Delay: 0.00
Range
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
current.
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
Default OFF
Step
1A
Set the detect current of load current alarm about negative sequence
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Time Delay
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]
P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup:
250
G-Time Delay: 0.00
Q-Pickup:
OFF
>Q-Time Delay: 0.00
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the detect time of load current alarm about the negative sequence
current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
343
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.3.7. Power Factor (55)
ETR300-R has two power factor(55) elements. If measured power factor(lag, lead) is kept above
the pickup level for a certain time, the element are detected. Through the PLC configuration, if an
event of this function is detected, the recloser can be opened or closed.
Power factor setting items are same as below.
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Function
[POWER FACTOR]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1:
0.00
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1:
0.00
Pickup-Lag2:
0.00
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
~
Step
It decides whether to use Power factor element.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lag1
0(OFF), 0.05~0.99
[POWER FACTOR]
Function:
DISABLE
>Pickup-Lag1:
0.00
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1:
0.00
Pickup-Lag2:
0.00
Range
[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99]
If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.
Default 0.00
0.01
Step
Set pickup level of lag power factor for element1.
*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lag2 is same as Pickup-Lag1 setting above.
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lead1
[POWER FACTOR]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1:
0.00
>Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1:
0.00
Pickup-Lag2:
0.00
[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99]
Range
0(OFF), 0.05~0.99
Default 0.00
Step
0.01
Set pickup level of lead power factor for element1.
If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.
*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lead2 is same as Pickup-Lead1 setting above.
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Time Delay1
[POWER FACTOR]
>Function:
DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1:
0.00
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
>Time Delay1:
0.00
Pickup-Lag2:
0.00
Range
1.00~600.00sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01sec
Set time delay for power factor element1.
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) Setting for Time Delay2 is same as Time Delay1 setting above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
344
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / BLK After CL
[POWER FACTOR]
>Time Delay2:
0.00
BLK After CL: 0.00
Range
0.05~600.00sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01sec
Set the Block Time After Close for power factor elements.
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]
8.4. Save Setting
From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GROUP menu. The procedure for
storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
345
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9. EVENT RECORDER
Place the curser on “3.EVENT”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
ETR300-R records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as
operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All
events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all
events can be checked in interface program.
This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[EVENT]
>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM
5.SET CHANGE
6.AVER.LOAD/MIN
7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR
8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY
9.DIGNOSTIC
10.PQM
11.ALARM CURRENT
12.CLEAR SAVED DATA
9.1. Operation Event
Operation event records max. 30,000 events. When Recloser operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation
status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.
[00001/30000]
EVENT:
OPEN
CONT':PL-HMI ( OK)
08/03/2013
20:02:40 681
[00002/30000]
EVENT:
OPEN
CONT':PL-HMI ( OK)
06/28/2013
21:12:32 217
[00003/30000]
EVENT:
CLOSE
CONT':PL-HMI ( OK)
06/28/2013
20:02:11 001
[▼][▲] are used to check event. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
346
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Trigger Source

STATUS
- CLOSE(OK) or CLOSE(FAIL)
- OPEN(OK) or CLOSE(FAIL)

CONTROL
- PL-HMI : Operation through control button at the front panel
- REMOTE : Operation through remote control
- MANUAL : Recloser (or Load breaker) mechanical manual operation.
- AUTO : Automatic operation through ETR300-R
- EXT’ : Operation through external command (External command condition is available
through PLC configuration)
Trigger Time
Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.
Trigger Capacity
Stores last 30000 events.
9.2. Fault Event
Fault event records max 10,000 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault
current size and each phase fault records can be checked.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.
[00001/10000] SEQ: 1
TARGET :
TOC
TYPE
: 51
[00002/10000] SEQ: 1
TARGET :
TOC
TYPE
: 51
[00003/10000] SEQ: 1
TARGET :
TOC
TYPE
: 51
LOC: - km - Ohm
01/01/2010 00:03:03
LOC: - km - Ohm
01/01/2010 00:03:02
LOC: - km - Ohm
01/01/2010 00:03:01
ENT
ENT
ENT
[00001/10000] SEQ: 1
A : 00000 B : 00000
C : 00000 N : 00000
Q : 00000 S : 00000
[00002/10000] SEQ: 1
A : 00000 B : 00000
C : 00000 N : 00000
Q : 00000 S : 00000
[00003/10000] SEQ: 1
A : 00000 B : 00000
C : 00000 N : 00000
Q : 00000 S : 00000
01/01/2010 00:03:03
01/01/2010 00:03:02
01/01/2010 00:03:01
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
347
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
[▼][▲] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check
fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [00001/10000] is the latest
event record.
Fault Event Information
Information before a fault occurring, is recorded..
00001/10000 Shows the latest event in order and records 10000 events.
SEQ Fault sequence number
TARGET Records the fault detect phase and event trigger source.
-
A: A Phase Fault
-
B: B Phase Fault
-
C: C Phase Fault
-
N: Ground Fault
-
S: Sensitive Earth Fault
-
Q : Negative Sequence Fault
-
TOC : Time Overcurrent Fault(Applied when “RECLOSER” type)
-
IOC : Instantaneous and Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent Fault
(Applied when “RECLOSER” type)
-
FI : Fault Indication Detection(Applied when “SECTIONALIZER” type)
TYPE Records the fault type (Applied when “SECTIONALIZER” type)
-
F-PICKUP : Fault Pickup (not trip)
-
51 : Time Overcurrent Fault Trip
-
50 : Instantaneous and Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent Fault Trip
-
27 : Under Voltage Fault Trip
-
59 : Over Voltage Fault Trip
-
64 : Neutral Over Voltage Fault Trip
-
DEM : Demand Fault Trip
-
81O : Over Frequency Fault Trip
-
81U : Under Frequency Fault Trip
-
81D : Frequency Decay Fault Trip
-
32 : Forward Power and Direction Power Fault Trip
-
46 : Broken Conduct Fault Trip
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
348
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
LOC It registers Fault Location Information (location and reactance).
*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.
2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to
“8.3.5. Fault Locator”.
FAULT Max. current value is indicated when fault is occurred.
CURRENT It registers current of the each phase, ground, sensitive earth and negative
sequence.
Trigger Source
Plesae refer to “TARGET” and “TYPE”of the above mentioned Fault Event Information.
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Stores last 10000 events.
9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary
Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD.
Captured waveform can be checked in ETIMS Interface Software. However, if the ‘Wave Record’
setting in the “MAIN MENU/ GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, fault cycles will
not be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE” to confirm fault cycle summary.
[01/32] PU
A: 00000
B: 00000
C: 00000
N: 00000
Location : --.- km
Reactance: -.-- Ohm
01/01/2017 01:00:00
[02/32] TR
A: 00000
B: 00000
C: 00000
N: 00000
Location : --.- km
Reactance: -.-- Ohm
01/01/2010 02:10:00
[03/32] PU&TR
A: 00000
B: 00000
C: 00000
N: 00000
Location : --.- km
Reactance: -.-- Ohm
01/01/2010 02:00:00
[▼][▲] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
349
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Trigger Source

Fault wave captured time.
-
PU : Pick up time.
-
TR : Trip time.
-
PU&TR : Picku up & Trip time

Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, Ground

Fault Location Information
-
Fault Location [km]
-
Fault Reactance [Ohm]
*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.
2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “8.3.5. Fault
Locator”.
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Maximum 32 events are recorded.
Recoder Cycle Length
60 cycles for 64 sampling, 120 cycles for 32 sampling and 240 cycles for 16 sampling.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
350
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.4. System Event
Maximum 30000 events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM” to confirm system events.
[00001/30000]
TARGET : CPULINK
STATUS : HI/ASSERT
01/01/2010 00:00:03
[00002/30000]
TARGET : CPULINK
STATUS : HI/ASSERT
01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source

Protection element

52A Contact

Sequence status

Front panel control

AC supply

External control

Fail operation

External input status

System alarm

Sleep mode

Gas Status, etc.
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
Storage Capacity
Stores last 30000 events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
351
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.5. Set Change Event
Maximum 30000 Set change Event can be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.
[00001/30000]
TARGET :
LGLSCHG
[00002/30000]
TARGET :
LGLSCHG
01/01/2010 00:00:03
01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source


Changed set menu
-
GLOBAL SETTING (GLSCHG)
-
GROUP 1~6 SETTING (GRSCH1 ~ GRSCH6)
Change method
The first name of the target name identifies the change method.;
-
(L) LOCAL: Set change at local
-
(R) REMOTE: Sec change in remote
-
(P) PROGRAM: Set change by Interface software.
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 30000 events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
352
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.6. Load & Energy Event
ETR300-R has the function of periodically recording the load and energy measurement data. The
user can configure the data field to record in the Load & Energy event. For the data field
configuration method, please refer to “9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration” .
Load & Energy events are recorded in three ways: minute average, maximum value per hour, and
maximum value per day. However, if the ‘L&E Record’ setting in the “"MAIN MENU/
GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, Load & Energy events will not be recorded.
9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event
Average load and energy value is recorded every a period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL/
EVENT RECORDER / L&P Interval”. Maximum 27500 values, it’s about 286 days events can be
recorded based on 15 minutes(default) for the event register period.
To check the average value per minute Load & Energy events, please move to “MAIN MENU /
EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/MIN” .
[00001/27500] (1/3)
IA:
0 A
IB:
0 A
IC:
0 A
IN:
0 A
01/01/2010 00:03
[00002/27500] (1/3)
IA:
0 A
IB:
0 A
IC:
0 A
IN:
0 A
01/01/2010 00:02
ENT
[00001/27500] (2/3)
PA:
0.00 MW
PB:
0.00 MW
PC:
0.00 MW
P3:
0.00 MW
01/01/2010 00:03
ENT
[00002/27500] (2/3)
PA:
0.00 MW
PB:
0.00 MW
PC:
0.00 MW
P3:
0.00 MW
01/01/2010 00:02
ENT
[00001/27500] (3/3)
PA:
0.00 MVar
PB:
0.00 MVar
PC:
0.00 MVar
P3:
0.00 MVar
01/01/2010 00:03
ENT
[00002/27500] (3/3)
PA:
0.00 MVar
PB:
0.00 MVar
PC:
0.00 MVar
P3:
0.00 MVar
01/01/2010 00:02
*. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/min events may be revised on user’s request.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
353
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [00001/27500] is the latest
event record.
Trigger Source

Demand Current – A, B, C, N

Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)
Trigger Time
Monitors to change Trigger source status every period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT
RECORDER / L&E Interval”.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 27500 events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
354
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event
Peak load & Energy event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up
to 27500 events, it’s about 1,145 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR” to confirm Peak Load &
Energy/Hour events.
[00001/27500] (1/3)
IA:
0 A
IB:
0 A
IC:
0 A
IN:
0 A
01/01/2010 01H
[00002/27500] (1/3)
IA:
0 A
IB:
0 A
IC:
0 A
IN:
0 A
01/01/2010 00H
ENT
[00001/27500] (2/3)
PA:
0.00 MW
PB:
0.00 MW
PC:
0.00 MW
P3:
0.00 MW
01/01/2010 01H
ENT
[00002/27500] (2/3)
PA:
0.00 MW
PB:
0.00 MW
PC:
0.00 MW
P3:
0.00 MW
01/01/2010 00H
ENT
[00001/27500] (3/3)
PA:
0.00 MVar
PB:
0.00 MVar
PC:
0.00 MVar
P3:
0.00 MVar
01/01/2010 01H
ENT
[00002/27500] (3/3)
PA:
0.00 MVar
PB:
0.00 MVar
PC:
0.00 MVar
P3:
0.00 MVar
01/01/2010 00H
*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT]
again. [00001/27500] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source

Demand Current – A, B, C, N

Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
355
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 27500 events.
9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day
Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 27500
events, it’s 27500 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/DAY” to confirm Peak Load & Energy
/day events.
[00001/27500] (1/3)
IA:
0 A
IB:
0 A
IC:
0 A
IN:
0 A
01/01/2010
[00002/27500] (1/3)
IA:
0 A
IB:
0 A
IC:
0 A
IN:
0 A
01/01/2010
ENT
[00001/27500] (2/3)
PA:
0.00 MW
PB:
0.00 MW
PC:
0.00 MW
P3:
0.00 MW
01/01/2010
ENT
[00002/27500] (2/3)
PA:
0.00 MW
PB:
0.00 MW
PC:
0.00 MW
P3:
0.00 MW
01/01/2010
ENT
[00001/27500] (3/3)
PA:
0.00 MVar
PB:
0.00 MVar
PC:
0.00 MVar
P3:
0.00 MVar
01/01/2010
ENT
[00002/27500] (3/3)
PA:
0.00 MVar
PB:
0.00 MVar
PC:
0.00 MVar
P3:
0.00 MVar
01/01/2010
*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT]
again. [00001/27500] is the latest event record.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
356
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Trigger Source

Demand Current – A, B, C, N

Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф

Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 27500 events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
357
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration
Operator can easily configure fields recorded in Load & Energy Event through “Load & Energy
Field Config Edit” window of ETIMS Interface Software. Load & Energy Field Configuration
procedure is as follow:
1) Click “SETTING / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” to open ‘Load & Energy Field
Config Edit’.
Figure 9-1. Load & Energy Event Field Config Edit Window
2) In the ‘Load & Energy Field Config Edit’ window, configure fields recorded in Load & Energy
Event. The number of selected field is between 4 and 14 fields.
3) After completing the configuration, click the [Apply] button.
4) While ‘ONLINE’ communication status between Interface Software and ETR300-R, upload the
changed load profile field configuration in ETR300-R using “ONLINE / UPLOAD / LOAD &
ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
358
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.7. Diagnostic Event
Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 30,000 events.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnosticevents.
[00001/30000]
TARGET : SELFTOK
STATUS : HI/ASSERT
01/01/2010 00:00:03
[00002/30000]
TARGET : SELFTOK
STATUS : HI/ASSERT
01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source

DSP Fail

ADC Fail

RTC Fail

Memory Fail

Flash-Rom Fail

Circuit voltage Fail

Global Setting Fail

Group Setting Fail

Event Fail

Count Fail

DO Fail

Close Fail

Open Fail, etc.
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.
Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
Storage Capacity
Stores last 30,000 events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
359
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
When Diagnostis Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following.
Table 9-1. Treatment Method when Diagnostis Fail is Occurred
No.
Item
Period
Method
1
DSP
Within 200msec
Change to fault detect block
2
ADC
1/4 cycle
Change to fault detect block
3
RTC
1 hour, at booting
Change the date to January 1st, 2017
4
Memory
Restart
5
Flash-Rom
6
Circuit voltage
1 hour, at booting
At Flash-Rom reading and
writing, at booting
1/4 cycle
7
Global setting
At setting change, at booting
8
Group # setting
At setting change, at booting
9
Event
At event save and reading
Change to fault detect block
Change the Global setting value to
Default value
Change the Group # setting value to
Default value
Event initialization
10
Count
At counter writing and reading
Counter initialization
11
DO signal
50msec
Output power block
12
Close/Open
At closing and opening
Necessary to check in local
Restart
9.8. PQM Event
Power Quality Management (PQM) detect event is recorded up to 10,000 events.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM” to confirm PQM events. In this menu, PQM event
item, phase occurence, measurement value and event maintaineance time can be checked (But,
event maintenance time is recorded only when events are sag, swell, interruption). PQM events are
generated by the “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ MONITORING/ POWER
QUALITY” setting.
[00001/10000]
EVENT:
SWL&TMP
TARGET :
A
DATA: 1670v 337 Cyc
01/01/2010 00:00:03
[00002/10000]
EVENT:
SWL&TMP
TARGET :
A
DATA: 1670v 337 Cyc
01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] button is used to check the event. [00001/10000] is the latest event record.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
360
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Trigger Source

PQM detect element.

Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)

Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)

Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG)

Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH)

Current Harmonic distortion(ITH)

Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV)

Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL)

Current Unbalance(UBI)

Source side Over Voltage(OVS)

Load side Over Voltage(OVL)

Source side Under Voltage(UVS)

Load side Under Voltage(UVL)

Under Frequency(UNF)

PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase

PQM element related measured value.

PQM detect time(cycle)
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 10,000 events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
361
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.9. Load Current Alarm Event
Load current alarm event is occurred by “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP # /
MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu. Max. 10000 events of load current alarm event
can be recorded and indicated.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu to check the load current
alarm event. In this menu, you can check the alarm occurrence and the current value of each phase
and the period of occurrence.
[00001/10000]PHASE-A
VALUE
: 00000 A
DURATION:
2 sec
01/01/2010 00:00:03
[00002/10000]PHASE-B
[00002/10000]
VALUE
TARGET : 00000 A A
DURATION:
1 sec
DATA: 1670v 337
Cyc
01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] is used to check the event. [00001/10000] is the latest recorded event.
Trigger Source


Taget element
-
A: Phase A Alarm current
-
B: Phase B Alarm current
-
C: Phase C Alarm current
-
N: Ground Alarm current
Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred
Trigger Time
Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Max. 10000 events are saved.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
362
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.10. Clear Saved Data
Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved events. Passcode 3 certification is
required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.
EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA
[CLEAR SAVED DATA]
>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM
5.SET CHANGE
6.LOAD & ENERGY
7.DIGNOSTIC
8.PQM
9.PQM CYCLE
10.LOAD CURR’ ALARM
11.ABOVE ALL
Clear Saved Data
Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.
If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
message is displayed.
11. ABOVE ALL
1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.
[CLEAR EVENT]
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
363
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10. MAINTENANCE
Place the curser on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu displays Maintenance information.
This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.
[MAINTENANCE]
>1.COUNT
2.INTERRUT TIME
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.DATA RESET
5.CONTROLLER INFO
6.MECHANISM SCALE
10.1. Count
Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.
[COUNT]
>1.ETR300-R
2.FAULT
3.PQM
4.COMMUNICATION
10.1.1. ETR300-R Count
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / ETR300-R” to confirm ETR300-R count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU
[ETR300-R]
RESTART
:
DIAGNOSTIC :
OPERATION :
30
0
0
Restart Count
ETR300-R restart number is displayed.
Diagnostic Count
ETR300-R diagnostic count is displayed.
Operation Count
Recloser operation counter is displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
364
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.2. Fault Count
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count. Number of fault is
displayed. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT
[FAULT-TOTAL] 1/6
TRIP:
0
51 TOC:
0
50 IOC:
0
27 UV :
0
59 OV :
0
81 FRE:
0
[FAULT-OTHER] 6/6
81 OVER
:
0
81 UNDER :
0
81 DECAY :
0
DEMAND
:
0
[FAULT-TOC]
TARGET A :
TARGET B :
TARGET C :
TARGET N :
TARGET SEF:
TARGET NEQ:
2/6
0
0
0
0
0
0
[FAULT-OV]
TARGET A :
TARGET B :
TARGET C :
TARGET N :
5/6
0
0
0
0
[FAULT-IOC]
TARGET A :
TARGET B :
TARGET C :
TARGET N :
TARGET SEF:
TARGET NEQ:
3/6
0
0
0
0
0
0
[FAULT-UV]
TARGET A :
TARGET B :
TARGET C :
4/6
0
0
0
FAULT-TOTAL (1/6)
Displays total count of faults.
 TRIP : Displays trip operation count.
 51 TOC : Displays time overcurrent trip count.
 50 IOC : Dispalys instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent trip count.
 27 UV : Displays under voltage trip count.
 59 OV : Displays phase over voltage and neutral over voltage trip count.
 81 FRE : Displays over frequency, under frequency and frequency decay trip count.
FAULT-TOC (2/6)
Displays the time overcurrent trip count for each target.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
365
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT
FAULT-IOC (3/6)
Displays the instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent trip count for each target.
FAULT-UV (4/6)
Displays under voltage trip count for each phase.
FAULT-OV (5/6)
Displays over voltage trip count for each phase.
Target N means the neutral over voltage trip count.
FAULT-OTHER(6/6)
Displays the trip count for other faults.
 81 OVER : Displays over frequency trip count.
 81 UNDER : Displays under frequency trip count.
 81 DECAY : Displays frequency decay trip count.
 DEMAND : Displays demand trip count.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
366
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.3. PQM Count
This menu displays power quality(PQM) related counter information, it has sub-menu as below.
When a PQM event occurs, the corresponding counter is increased.
[PQM COUNT]
>1.INTERRUT
2.SAG
3.SWELL
4.HARMONICS
5.CURR UNBALANCE
6.VOLT UNBALANCE
7.UNDER VOLTAGE
8.OVER VOLTAGE
9.UNDER FREQUNCY
10.1.3.1. Interrupt
Move to “MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT” to confirm interrup count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT
[INTERRUPT] 1/2
TOTAL:
0
A :
0 B :
0
C :
0
Number of Interruption is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
INTERRUPT(1/2)
Total number of Interruption and total number of interruption per
[INTERRUPT] 2/2
MOMENTARY :
0
TEMPORARY :
0
SUSTAINED :
0
phase are displayed.
INTERRUPT(2/2)
Number of fault per type is displayed on Interruption.
10.1.3.2. Sag
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG
A :
C :
[SAG]
TOTAL:
0 B :
0
1/2
0
0
Number of Sag is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and
use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.
SAG(1/2)
Total number of Sag occurred and total number of Sag per phase are
INS:
TMP:
[SAG]
2/2
0 MOM:
0
0
displayed.
SAG(2/2)
Number of Sag per type is displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
367
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.3.3. Swell
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL” to confirm swell count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL
A :
C :
[ SWELL ] 1/2
TOTAL :
0
0 B
:
0
0
Number of Swell occurred is displayed. This COUNT menu consists
of 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
SWELL(1/2)
Total number of Swell and number of Swell per phase are displayed.
[ SWELL ] 2/2
INS:
0 MOM:
0
TMP:
0
SWELL(2/2)
Number of Swell per type is displayed.
10.1.3.4. Harmonics
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC
A :
C :
[VTHD]
TOTAL:
0 B :
0
1/2
0
0
Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu
consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.
VTHD(1/2)
Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage
A :
C :
[ITHD]
TOTAL:
0 B :
0
2/2
0
0
harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
ITHD(2/2)
Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current
harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
10.1.3.5. Current Unbalance
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE” to confirm current
unbalance count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE
[CURRENT UNBALANCE]
COUNT :
Number of Current Unbalance occurred is displayed.
0
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
368
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.3.6. Voltage Unbalance
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” to confirm voltage
unbalance count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
[VOLTAGE UNBALANCE]
SOURCE SIDE :
0
LOAD SIDE
:
0
Number of voltage unbalance occurred is displayed.
SOURSE SIDE
Number of voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.
LOAD SIDE
Number of voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.
10.1.3.7. Under Voltage
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE” to confirm under voltage
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE
[VS-UNDER VOLT] 1/2
dddddddTOTAL :
0
A :
0 B :
0
C :
0
Number of under-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
VS-UNDER VOLT(1/2)
[VL-UNDER VOLT] 2/2
dddddddTOTAL :
0
A :
0 B :
0
C :
0
Total number of undervoltage at source side and number of
undervoltage per phase are displayed.
VL-UNDER VOLT (2/2)
Total number of undervoltage at load side and number of undervoltage
at load side per phase are displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
369
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.3.8. Over Voltage
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE” to confirm over voltage
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE
[VS-OVER VOLT] 1/2
dddddddTOTAL :
0
A :
0 B :
0
C :
0
Number of over-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
VS-OVER VOLT(1/2)
[VL-OVER VOLT] 2/2
dddddddTOTAL :
0
A :
0 B :
0
C :
0
Total number of overvoltage at source side and number of
undervoltage per phase are displayed.
VL-OVER VOLT (2/2)
Total number of overvoltage at load side and number of overvoltage at
load side per phase are displayed.
10.1.3.9. Under Frequency
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / Under Frequency” to confirm under frequency
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY
[UNDER FREQUENCY]
COUNT :
Number of underfrequency is displayed.
0
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
370
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.4. Communication Count
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION
[COMM-S1]
Rx Message:
Tx Message:
Unsol Tx :
1/8
0
0
0
[COMM-S2]
DI Evt buf:
AI Evt buf:
CI Evt buf:
8/8
0
0
0
[COMM-S1]
Rx CRC Err:
Tx RETRY :
SBO TO
:
2/8
0
0
0
[COMM-S2]
D Conf TO :
A Conf TO :
7/8
0
0
[COMM-S1]
D Conf TO :
A Conf TO :
3/8
0
0
[COMM-S2]
Rx CRC Err:
Tx RETRY :
SBO TO
:
6/8
0
0
0
[COMM-S1]
DI Evt buf:
AI Evt buf:
CI Evt buf:
4/8
0
0
0
[COMM-S2]
Rx Message:
Tx Message:
Unsol Tx :
5/8
0
0
0
Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use
[▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
COMM-S1(1/8)
 Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
COMM-S1(2/8)
 Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
371
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION
COMM-S1(3/8)
 D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
COMM-S1(4/8)
 DI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted DI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 AI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmiteed AI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 CI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted CI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
COMM-S2(5~8/8)
Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The composition counter is same as
DNP3.0 Slave 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
372
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.5. User Count
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT” to confirm user count.
The ETR300-R provides eight(8) user counts. The user count can define the counter to be managed
by the user through the PLC configuration. When input condition set in CLSET # (User Counter
Set Condition) of PLC is occured, the corresponding user count is increased by 1. When the input
condition set in CLRST # (User Counter Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding user count is
cleared to 0. When you set CLST (close status) on CLSET01, user count 1 is increased by 1,
whenever the recloser is closed. User count can be monitored by Pulse Count logic of PLC
function. For details, refer to “7.1.5.3. PULSE COUNTER”.
Figure 10-1. PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
373
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT
[USER]
USER COUNT1:
USER COUNT2:
USER COUNT3:
USER COUNT4:
1/2
0
0
0
0
[USER]
USER COUNT5:
USER COUNT6:
USER COUNT7:
USER COUNT8:
2/2
0
0
0
0
Displays the user count defined by the PLC configuration (CLSET01
~ CLSET08).
This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to
move into sub-menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
374
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.2. Interrupt Time
Move to “MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME” to confirm interrupt time.
MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME
[INTERRUP TIME] 1/2
TOTAL:
0
A :
0 B :
0
C :
0 N :
0
Accumulated interrupt time is displayed. This COUNT menu consists
2 page and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
INTERRUPT TIME(1/2)
Total accumulated time and accumulated time per phase are displayed.
[INTERRUP TIME] 2/2
MOMENTARY :
0
TEMPORARY :
0
SUSTAINED :
0
Time unit is Cycle.
INTERRUPT TIME(2/2)
Accumulated time per interrupt type is displayed, time unit is cycle.
10.3. Contact Wear
Move to “MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” to confirm contact wear.
MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR
[CONTACT WEAR-%]
A : 100.00
B : 100.00
C : 100.00
Display recloser contact wear in percentage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
375
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.4. Data Reset
Move to “MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data.
Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.
MAINTENACE / DATA RESET
[DATA RESET]
>1.ETR300-R COUNT
2.OPERATION COUNT
3.FAULT COUNT
4.PQM COUNT
5.COM’ COUNT
6.COUNT ALL
7.INTERRUPT TIME
>8.BATT. CAPACITY
9.CONTACT WEAR
10.ENERGY
11.MAX DEMAND
12.PEAK CURRENT
13.COMM BUFF
14.USER COUNT
15.ABOVE ALL
Saved Data Reset
Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.
If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
message is displayed.
*. NOTE )
1. ‘OPERATION COUNT’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN
MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION
COUNT”.
[CLEAR EVENT]
2. ‘CONTACT WEAR’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS
GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR”.
3. ‘BATT. CATPACITY’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/
GLOBLA
SETTING/
MONITERING/
BATT
MANAGEMENT”.
4. Except ‘OPERATION COUNT’, ‘CONTACT WEAR’ and
‘BATT CATPACITY’, all data is reset for 0.
15. ABOVE ALL
All count data of 1 ~ 14 menus are reset at once.
10.5. Controller Information
Move to “MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO” to confirm ETR300-R controller information.
In this menu, information such as option, version and serial number of current ETR300-R is
displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
376
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.6. Mechanism Scale
Move to “MAINTENANCE / MECHANISM SCALE” to confirm CT and VT mechanism
calibration scale. When replacing the ETR300-R controller, the manufacturer shall notify the
manufacturer of the mechanism calibration scale indicated on the ETR300-R before replacement.
MAINTENACE / MECHANISM SCALE
[MECHANISM SCALE]
VA:1.0000 IA:1.0000
VB:1.0000 IB:1.0000
VC:1.0000 IC:1.0000
VR:1.0000 IN:1.0000
VS:1.0000 IS:1.0000
VT:1.0000
VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT
The mechanism calibration scale of each phase VT is displayed.
IA, IB, IC, IN, IS
The mechanism calibration scale of CT and ZCT of each phase is
displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
377
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
11. TIME
Place the curser on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
TIME
[CURRENT TIME]
2006/11/05 21:02:38
PRESS <ENT> TO SET
[SETTING TIME]
2006/11/05 21:02:38
USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER]
PRESS <FUNC> : ABORT
In this menu, you can check and set the current data and time. This
menu applies local time and UTC time is managed internally
depending on the time zone setting.
Here's how to change the present date and time;
1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting.
2) To change a number, use [▲][▼] button and to move next item,
press [ENT] button.
[SAVE TIME]
2006/11/06 15;01:50
3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT].
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
378
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12. STATUS
Place the curser on “STATUS” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This
menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[STATUS]
>1.RECLOSER
2.INPUT PORTS
3.OUTPUT PORTS
4.GOOSE S-IN
5.GOOSE D-IN
6.GOOSE OUT
7.FAULT
8.DIAGONOSTIC
12.1. Recloser
Move to “MAINTENANCE / STATUS / RECLSER” to confirm tank and ETR300-R status.
STATUS/ RECLOSER
[RECLOSER]
>RECLOSER
: CLOSE
>PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK
>CONTROL
: LOCAL
>RECLOSE
:
OFF
>PHA-PROTECT:
OFF
>GND-PROTECT:
OFF
>LOCKOUT
:LOCKOUT
>AC POW FAIL:
ON
>BATTERY
: NORMAL
>BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL
>DOOR OPEN :
ON
>HANDLE LOCK:
OFF
>GAS
: NORMAL
Present recloser and ETR300-R status are displayed.
Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
RECLOSER
Displays Circuit Breaker status.(OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE)
PANEL LOCK
Displays panel lock status.(LOCK, UNLOCK)
CONTROL
Operation control select is displayed.(REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE)
RECLOSE
Display whether to use reclosing function. (ON, OFF)
PHA-PROTECT
Phase protection function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
379
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
STATUS/ RECLOSER
[RECLOSER]
>RECLOSER
: CLOSE
>PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK
>CONTROL
: LOCAL
>RECLOSE
:
OFF
>PHA-PROTECT:
OFF
>GND-PROTECT:
OFF
>LOCKOUT
:LOCKOUT
>AC POW FAIL:
ON
>BATTERY
: NORMAL
>BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL
>DOOR OPEN :
ON
>HANDLE LOCK:
OFF
>GAS
: NORMAL
GND-PROTECT
Ground protection function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)
LOCKOUT
Lockout of reclosing status is displayed(ON, OFF)
AC POW FAIL
External power supply status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)
BATTERY
Battery status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)
BAT’ CHARGER
Battery charger status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)
DOOR OPEN
Door open status is displayed(ON, OFF)
GAS
Circuit breaker gas pressure status is displayed. (NORMAL, LOW)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
380
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.2. Input Ports
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS” to confirm input ports’s status.
STATUS/ INPUT PORTS
[INPUT PORTS]
IN 101 :
OFF
IN 102 :
OFF
IN 103 :
OFF
IN 104 :
OFF
IN 105 :
OFF
：
：
：
IN 308 :
OFF
Displays 34 input terminals’ status.
 IN101 ~ IN112 : Displays the status of SCADA input ports (But,
when ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked “OFF”
 IN201 ~ IN214 : Displays the status of recloser status input ports.
 IN301 ~ IN308 : Displays external input ports of External I/O Unit
ETIO10 (But, when ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is
marked “OFF”).
Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.
12.3. Output Ports
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS” to confirm output ports’s status.
STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS
[OUTPUT PORTS]
OUT 101:
OFF
OUT 102:
OFF
OUT 103:
OFF
OUT 104:
OFF
OUT 105:
OFF
：
：
：
OUT 308:
OFF
Displays 20 output terminals’ status.
 OUT101 ~ OUT108 : Displays the status of the SCADA output ports
(But, when the ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked
“OFF”).
 OUT201 ~ OUT214 : Displays the status of the recloser control
output ports.
 OUT301 ~ OUT308 : Displays external output ports’s status of
External I / O Unit ETIO10. (But, when ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting is
OFF, it always is marked “OFF”).
Depending on output signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all outpu terminal status.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
381
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.4. GOOSE Single Input
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE S-IN” to confirm goode single inputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN
[GOOSE S-IN]
>GSIN01 ST :
ON
>GSIN01 FAIL:
OFF
>GSIN02 ST :
ON
>GSIN02 FAIL:
OFF
>GSIN03 ST :
ON
>GSIN03 FAIL:
OFF
：
：
>GSIN16 ST :
ON
>GSIN16 FAIL:
OFF
The ETR300-R provides 16 goose single inputs of IEC 61850
communication protocol. This menu displays the goose single input's
status provided by the ETR300-R.
 GSIN## ST : Displays goose single input’s current status
 GSIN## FAIL : Displays goose single input’s fail status.
Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.
12.5. GOOSE Double Input
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE D-IN” to confirm goode double inputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE D-IN
[GOOSE D-IN]
>GDIN010 Bit0:
ON
>GDIN011 Bit1:
OFF
>GDIN01F Fail:
OFF
>GDIN020 Bit0:
ON
>GDIN021 Bit1:
OFF
>GDIN02F Fail:
OFF
：
：
>GDIN160 Bit0:
ON
>GDIN161 Bit1:
OFF
>GDIN16F Fail:
OFF
The ETR300-R provides 16 goose double inputs of the IEC 61850
communication protocol. This menu displays the goose double input's
status provided by the ETR300-R.
 GSIN##0 Bit0 : goose double input – displays the current status of
first bit(bit 0).
 GSIN##1 Bit1 : goose double input – displays the current status of
the second bit(bit 1).
 GSIN##F Fail : Displays goose double input’s fail status.
Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
382
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.6. GOOSE Output
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE OUT” to confirm goode outputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN
[GOOSE OUT]
>GOUT01:
>GOUT02:
GOUT03:
：
：
>GOUT16:
The ETR300-R provides 16 goose outputs of the IEC 61850
OFF
OFF
OFF
communication protocol. This menu displays the goose output's status
provided by the ETR300-R.
OFF
Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.
12.7. Fault
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / FAULT”.
STATUS/ FAULT
[FAULT]
>FAULT TRIP:
27P1T
:
27P1AL
:
27P2T
:
27P2AL
:
27RSI
:
27RSCL
:
59P1T
:
59P1AL
:
59P2T
:
59P2AL
:
59RSI
:
59RSCL
:
81U1T
:
81U2T
:
81O1T
:
81O2T
:
81D1T
:
81D2T
:
81RSI
:
81RSCL
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
This menu displays the fault conditions that can not be indicated on the
front panel LEDs.
Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
FTRIP : Fault Trip Operation status.
27P1T : Under Voltage 1 Trip status
27P1A : Under Voltage 1 Alarm status
27P2T : Under Voltage 2 Trip status
27P2A : Under Voltage 2 Alarm status
27RSI : Under Voltage Auto Restoration Running status
27RSCL : Under Voltage Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts
59P1T : Over Voltage 1 Trip status
59P1A : Over Voltage 1 Alarm status
59P2T : Over Voltage 2 Trip status
59P2A : Over Voltage 2 Alarm status
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
383
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
STATUS/ FAULT
59RSI : Over Voltage Auto Restoration Running status
59RSCL : Over Voltage Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts
81U1T : Under Frequency 1 Trip status
81U2T : Under Frequency 2 Trip status
81O1T : Over Frequency 1 Trip status
81O2T : Over Frequency 2 Trip status
81D1T : Frequency Decay 1 Trip status
81D2T : Frequency Decay 2 Trip status
81RSI : Frequency Auto Restoration Running status
81RSCL : Frequency Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts
12.8. Diagonosic
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / DIGNOSTIC”
STATUS/ DIGNOSTIC
[DIGNOSTIC]
>DIGALM :
>DIGERR :
DIGIGBT:
>DIGRTC :
DIGCLC :
DIGOPOW:
>ACFAIL :
>BATBAD :
NOBATT :
>CHGBAD :
PWDOWN :
Dignostic status of ETR300-R and System are displayed. When a
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
diagnostic event occurs, the related status is displayed on “ON”. After
the diagnostic event disappears, the status changes to “OFF” status.
Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
DIGALM : ETR300-R on the alarm status.
DIGERR : ETR300-R has one error or more. When this status is
“ON, it means that there are critical errors on the system.
Thus, it makes to block all protection functions.
DIGRTC : Unusual condtion on Real Time Clock(RTC)
DIGCLC : Unusual condtion on Close Coil
DIGSPOW : Unusual condtion on System Power
ACFAIL: External AC Power Fail status
BATBAD : Battery Voltage Bad status
NOBATT : Battery Voltage Low status
CHGBAD : Charger Voltage Fail status
PWDOWN : Power Down status (AC Fail & No Battery)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
384
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13. METERING
Place the curser on “METERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This
menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
The accuracy of the measurement value displayed in this menu is “2.3. Metering Accuracy”.
[METERING]
>1.CURRENT
2.VOLTAGE
3.FREQUENCY
4.POWER
5.ENERGY
6.DEMAND
7.UNBALANCE
8.HARMONICS
9.TRUE R.M.S
10.TD
11.CONTROLLER REF
13.1. Current
Following values are contained in the current metering.

IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)

IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)

IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)

IN : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)

SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)

I1 : Indicates the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg°)

I2: Indicates the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)

3I0: Indicates the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)

Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A)

Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A)

Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A)

Peak IN : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A)

Peak IQ : Displays the measured negative sequence Peak current (A)
NOTE
The peak current is updated by the recorded load current value when the load current alarm
event occurs. If the load current alarm function is DISABLE, the peak current is not
updated. The load current alarm function is described in “8.3.6. Load Current Alarm”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
385
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”
MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT
Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed.
Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.
IA :
IB :
IC :
IN :
ISEF:
[R.M.S]
0A/
0A/
0A/
0A/
0A/
0D
0D
0D
0D
0D
[SEQUENCE＇I＇]
I1 :
0A/
0D
I2 :
0A/
0D
3I0 :
0A/
0D
[PEAK ＇I＇]
IA :
0A IB :
IC :
0A IN :
IQ :
0A
0A
0A
13.2. Voltage
Following values are contained in the voltage metering.

VS-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at source side, are displayed(㎸, deg°).

VS-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(㎸, deg°).

VS-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(㎸,
deg°).

VL-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at load side, are displayed (㎸, deg°).

VL-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (㎸, deg°).

VL-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (㎸,
deg°).
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE”
MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE
[VS-PN]
: 0.00 kV ∠
: 0.00 kV ∠
: 0.00 kV ∠
0°
0°
0°
[VS-PP]
AB : 0.00 kV ∠
BC : 0.00 kV ∠
CA : 0.00 kV ∠
0°
0°
0°
[VS-SEQ]
V1 : 0.00 kV ∠
V2 : 0.00 kV ∠
3V0: 0.00 kV ∠
0°
0°
0°
[VL-SEQ]
V1 : 0.00 kV ∠
V2 : 0.00 kV ∠
3V0: 0.00 kV ∠
0°
0°
0°
[VL-PP]
AB : 0.00 kV ∠
BC : 0.00 kV ∠
CA : 0.00 kV ∠
0°
0°
0°
A
B
C
[VL-PN]
: 0.00 kV ∠
: 0.00 kV ∠
: 0.00 kV ∠
0°
0°
0°
A
B
C
Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check it.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
386
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.3. Frequency
Following values are contained in the frequency metering.

Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated.

Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.

Slip
: Frequency difference between the power source side and the load side is indicated.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”
MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
[FREQUENCY]
Source:
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz/s
Load :
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz/s
Slip :
0.00 Hz
0.00 D
Frequency Display
 Source
- Frequency in source side (Hz)
- Frequency decay rate in source side (Hz/sec)
 Load
- Frequency in load side (Hz)
- Frequency decay rate in load side (Hz/sec)
 Slip
- Frequency difference between source and load sides: Slip
frequency (Hz)
- Phase difference between sour and load sides : Slip angle (deg°)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
387
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.4. Power
Following values are contained in the power metering.

ACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s active power displayed.

REACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s reactive power displayed.

APPARENT POWER: Each phase and three phase’s apparent power displayed.

POWER FACTOR: Each phase and three phase’s power factor per phase is displayed.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”
MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER
Per phase, power and power factor are displayed.
Use [▼][▲] button to check the power metering information.
[ACTIVE POWER]
0 kW
0 kW
0 kW
0 kW
[POWER FACTOR]
A:
0.0 %
B:
0.0 %
C:
0.0 %
3P:
0.0 %
[REACTIVE POWER]
A:
0 kVar
B:
0 kVar
C:
0 kVar
3P:
0 kVar
[APPARENT POWER]
A:
0 kVA
B:
0 kVA
C:
0 kVA
3P:
0 kVA
A:
B:
C:
3P:
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
388
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.5. Energy
Following values are contained in the energy metering.

POS’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction are
indicated.

POS’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction are
indicated.

NEG’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction are
indicated.

NEG’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction are
indicated.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”
MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY
Energy is displayed Use [▼][▲] button to check the energy metering
[POS＇ W/H(kWh)]
Pa:
0
Pb:
0
Pc:
0
P3:
0
S:01/01/01/11:00:10
information.
The last line “S” of each page indicates the time that have started the
present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in
0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA
[POS＇ V/H(kVar)]
Pa:
0
Pb:
0
Pc:
0
P3:
0
S:01/01/01/11:00:10
RESET/ ENERGY” menu.
[NEG＇ V/H(kWh)]
Pa:
0
Pb:
0
Pc:
0
P3:
0
S:01/01/01/11:00:10
[NEG＇ V/H(kVar)]
Pa:
0
Pb:
0
Pc:
0
P3:
0
S:01/01/01/11:00:10
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
389
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.6. Demand Current and Power
ETR300-R measures and indicates following Demand current and power items;

DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase
sequence Demand current.

PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current
maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value.

PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current
maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value.

PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current
maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value.

PHASE N CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase N, Demand current
maximum value of phase N and the time that have measured the maximum value.

PHASE I2 CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence,
Demand current maximum valueof negative phase sequence and the time that have measured
the maximum value.

POSITIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase A direction and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.

POSITIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the
maximum value for forward direction.

POSITIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the
maximum value for forward direction.

POSITIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase,
Demand active power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured the
maximum value for forward direction.

NEGATIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase A direction and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.

NEGATIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the
maximum value for reverse direction.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
390
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

http://www.entecene.co.kr
NEGATIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the
maximum value for reverse direction.

NEGATIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present threephase, Demand active power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.

POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.

POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.

POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase C, Demand reactive power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.

POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have
measured the maximum value for forward direction.

NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.

NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.

NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase C, Demand reactive power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.

NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have
measured the maximum value for reverse direction.
*. NOTE ) The aboive Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be reset
by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND” menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
391
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”
MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND
[DEMAND CURRENT]
0 A B:
0 A
0 A N:
0 A
NEG:
0 A
[PHASE I2 CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX
:
0 A
01/01/0000 11:00:10
[PHASE A CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX
:
0 A
01/01/0000 11:00:10
[PHASE N CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX
:
0 A
01/01/0000 11:00:10
A:
C:
[PHASE B CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX
:
0 A
01/01/0000 11:00:10
[PHASE C CURRENT]
DEMAND:
0 A
MAX
:
0 A
01/01/0000 11:00:10
[PHASE A REAL POWER]
DEMAND:
0 kW
(+)MAX:
0 kW
01/01/0000 11:00:10
(-)MAX:
0 kW
01/01/0000 11:00:10
[3P REACTIVE POWER]
DEMAND:
0 kVar
(+)MAX:
0 kVar
01/01/0000 11:00:10
(-)MAX:
0 kVar
01/01/0000 11:00:10
[3P REAL POWER(kW)]
DEMAND:
0 kW
(+)MAX:
0 kW
01/01/0000 11:00:10
(-)MAX:
0 kW
01/01/0000 11:00:10
[P-A REACTIVE POWER]
DEMAND:
0 kVar
(+)MAX:
0 kVar
01/01/0000 11:00:10
(-)MAX:
0 kVar
01/01/0000 11:00:10
Demand current and power is indicated. Use [▼][▲] key to check the Demand metering
information.
13.7. Unbalance
Following values are contained in the unbalance metering.

SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.

LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.

CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE”
MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE
[UNBALANCE- %]
SOURCE-VOLT:
0.00
LOAD-VOLT:
0.00
CURRENT:
0.00
Unbalance metering information is displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
392
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.8. Harmonics
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS”
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS
[%V-Harm. A/B/C]
THD : 0.0 0.0 0.0
02H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
03H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
[%V-Harm. A/B/C]
04H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
05H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
06H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
[%V-Harm. A/B/C]
31H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
[%I-Harm. 31H]
A : 0.0 B : 0.0
C : 0.0 N : 0.0
[%I-Harm. 02H]
A : 0.0 B : 0.0
C : 0.0 N : 0.0
[%I-Harm. THD]
A : 0.0 B : 0.0
C : 0.0 N : 0.0
Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check harmonic rate
information.
13.9. True R.M.S
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S
[VOLTAGE-TURE R.M.S]
A :
000 V
B :
000 V
C :
000 V
TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use
[▼][▲] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.
[ CURRENT- TURE R.M.S]
A : 0.0A B : 0.0 A
C : 0.0A N : 0.0 A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
393
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.10. TD Monitoring
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / TD”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING
[TD MONITERRING]
TD1: 0.0 ETD1: 0.0
TD2: 0.0 ETD2: 0.0
TD3: 0.0 ETD3: 0.0
TD4: 0.0 ETD4: 0.0
TD input value is displayed.
 TD1 ~ TD4 : Displays the input value of the DC input channel on
the front panel (But, when the 'TD Input Use' setting is OFF, it
always is marked 0).
 ETD1 ~ ETD4 : Displays input value of external DC input channel
of External I/O ETIO10 (But, when ‘EXT.I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it
always is marked 0)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
394
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.11. Controller Reference
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLLER REF”
MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLL REF
[REF. VALUE (1/2)]
BATTERY VOLT: 00.00V
CHARGER VOLT: 00.00V
CHARGER I(+): 0.00A
BATTERY CAP.:100.00%
TEMPER.(IN) :
00D
TEMPER.(OUT):
00D
In this menu, the reference measurement value for checking the
condition of ETR300-R is displayed. This menu consists of 2 pages
and use [▼] [▲] button to move into sub-menu.
 BATTERY VOLT : Display the battery voltage.
 CHARGER VOLT : Display the voltage of charge circuit.
 CHARGER I : Displays charge current. When the measurement
[REF. VALUE (2/2)]
+12V
: 12.00V
-12V
:-12.00V
REF. VOLT
: 2.50A
GAS PRE(bar): 00.00b
GAS PRE(VOL): 00.00V
value is positive, it’s charge current. On the other side, the
measurement value is negavitve, it’s discharge current.
 BATTERY CAP.: Displays battery capacity by ‘Battery
Management’.
 TEMPER.(IN) : Displays internal temperature of ETR300-R.
 TEMPER.(OUT) : Displays external temperature of ETR300-R
(control box internal temperature)(But, ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ is
OFF, it doesn’t indicate that item).
 +12V : Displays +12V system power measurement value.
 -12V : Displays -12V system power measurement value.
 REF. VOLT : Displays reference voltage 2.5V measurement
value.
 GAS PRE(bar) : Displays gas pressure(But, when ‘GAS
Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t indicate that item).
 GAS PRE(VOL) : Displays input voltage value configured on
gas pressure input port. It calculates gas pressure using that
voltage value. (But, when ‘GAS Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t
indicate that item).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
395
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14. INSTALLATION
14.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
ETR300-R
1
2
3
4
5
6
51 TOC
50 IOC
50 IOCL
A
ESC
FUN
B
C
G
ENT
SEF
27 UV
59 OV
25 SYNCHRONISM
81 UF/OF/RF
VA / VR
VB / VS
VC / VT
NPQ TRIP
NPQ ALARM
MANUAL CLOSING
VOLTAGE ALARM
GAS ALARM
MACANISM LOCK
CLOSE BLOCK
TYPE :
SERIAL No :
DATE : 20
.
.
POWER SUPPLY :
WEIGHT :
VAC
kg
Figure 14-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
User Interface Door
User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull the
handle.
Control Power Switch
After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power,
right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control.
AC Power Outlet
For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for
safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 14-4. Inner Structure”.
Air Vent
To prevent from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are covered with left and right side.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
396
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
443
0
?3
? 17
291.5
321.5
901.5
826.5
? 34
86
Figure 14-2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
The top of the control box where the solar radiation is directly applied consists of a double
structure. The inside of the door is insulated with 5t insulator on the front side of the door so that it
can withstand rapid temperature changes. An air vent is installed at the top and bottom of the
control box to remove moisture from inside and it is also satisfying IP54 that can withstand dust /
moisture.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
397
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
The control box is able to withstand the external environment and temperature changes for a long
time, and STS304 material is used to prevent rust. In addition, it is spray painted with Munsell No.
N5Y 7/1 (gray line), for durability of painting.
All metal parts of the control box are earthed to the enclosure and an earthing terminal for the
ground cable is provided on the outside of the enclosure. The ground terminal can be connected up
to 113mm of cable without separate auxiliary devices.
At the bottom of the control box, there are an antenna hole for remote communication and three
spare holes(Φ21) for user convenience in preparation for future improvement.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
398
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.3. Earth Wiring Diagram
Figure 14-3. Earth Wiring Diagram
After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.
Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0.470") diameter.
Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from ETR300-R Earth Terminal must be connected to the
ground.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
399
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.4. Inner Structure
SERIAL No :
DATE : 20
.
RAIL HOLDER
RAIL HOLDER
TYPE :
.
POWER SUPPLY :
WEIGHT :
VAC
kg
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
USL-5SR4
END COVER
PW
T
T
Amplifier
S
S
Phase Angle
R
R
C
C
B
B
A
A
POWER
CN1
OUTPUT
CN3
INPUT
CN2
Figure 14-4. Inner Structure
Controller Power MCB (Miniature Circuit Breaker)
Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac.
Heater
Optional Heater is 40W
Battery
Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (＋) screwdriver for replacement.
Fuse
Fuse is for circuit protection
Terminal Block
Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user.
User Available Space
Space for additional hardware connection.
AC Power Outlet(Option)
AC Power Outlet is helpful for local operator as such getting AC Power using laptop.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
400
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.5. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Figure 14-5. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.
On Base plate, 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.
Available space for height of base plate is 100㎜
14.6. User-Available DC Power
Table 14-1. User-Available DC Power
Voltage Rating
Voltage Range
Maximum Power output
24Vdc
20∼25Vdc
40W Continuous
12Vdc
11.0∼12.5Vdc
60W 60second
Positions
Standard Voltage : 24Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating
60W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 60W, additional power should
be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer.
Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315＂). With using (＋) PTR J
connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to AWG12.
When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there is a
fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
401
C
B
S
A
R
LOAD SIDE
T
SOURCE SIDE
PROTECTION C.T
VD
VD
69
12
11
10
P2
9
8
7
CC
TC
+
+
52a
52b
Shield Cable
8M(standard)
V
s
R
s
R
r
k
n
r
k
n
m
p
m
p
f
g
f
g
h
j
d
e
d
e
h
j
b
c
Z
a
b
c
X
Z
a
W
X
V
W
52a
U
U
52b
T
S
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
T
S
4
N
P
12
1
5
M
11
P1
L
K
10
VR
15
2
J
6
VS
14
H
3
VT
F
P3 13
E
G
VB
VA
18
9
D
IG
C
IA
VC
B
IB
17
A
IC
16
Protection B/D
(CT & VD circuit protection)
Receptacle(male)
(SVG02B1:28-21)
IG
IA
IB
IC
BAT1
Receptacle(female)
(SVG02B1:28-21)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
AC
outlet
AC240V
AC110V
C1
Capacitor Bank
CN32
4
8
8
CN31
401
313
(Option)
6
7
5
7
5
6
4
3
2
2
3
P2
1
P1
1
2
P7
1
CN2
CN12
401
313
(MODEM POWER)
DOOR S/W
Control Cabinet
-
VR
VS
VT
VA
VB
VC
DC24V
VOLTAGE
Power input
BATTERY
OUT207
OUT206
OUT205
IN05
IN06
IN07
IN08
COM
CAP-
CLOSE
TRIP
COM
CAP+
COM
IN201
IN202
IN203
IN204
IN205
IN206
IN207
IN208
Power output
24VAC
BATT.
IGBT
- DC12V or
-
SEF
IG
IC
IB
IA
PS(V+)
PS(GND)
PS(MONI')
MOV2
MOV1
Controller Module
ETR300-R(600)
H04
H03 +
H02
H01 +
G04 N
G03 P
G02
G01 +
I01
I02
I03
I04
I05
I06
1
2
3
4
5
J05
J01
J02
J03
J04
K10
K09
K01
K02
K03
K04
K05
K06
K07
K08
L01
L02
L03
E05
E06
E07
E08
E01
E02
E03
E04
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
CURRENT
INPUTS
TRIP & CLOSE
INPUTS
Recloser
PORTF
IRIG-B
RS232-2
RS232-1
RS485
(TP / FX)
Eth 2
(TP / FX)
Eth 1
USB-B
2
2
1
3
1
SG
485+
485-
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.7. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram
Figure 14-6. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram (Standard type)
402
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.8. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
Current IG is connected with Side Panel
IN(F07, F08) in Earthing System.
SEF(F09, F10) should be connected, so
IC
8
Non Earthing System.
IN(F07,F08) should be connected to each
SEF
9
IN
7
SEF(F09, F10) of Side Panel in.
10
6
Current IN should be connected with
5
4
IB
3
2
IA
F01
called “JUMPER”
CT
10
SEF
9
8
IN
7
6
IC
5
4
IB
3
2
IA
F01
other.
CT
Figure 14-7. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation”
CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
403
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.9. VD Wiring Diagram

VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) measures Voltage
with using Capacitor or Resistance installed in each Bushing of Recloser.

VD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.

Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase
rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.
Option CVD 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ Class

Option RVD 15㎸, 27㎸ Class
8
VN
7
VT
6
VS
5
VR
4
VN
3
VC
2
VB
VA
E01

PT
Figure 14-8. VD Wiring Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
404
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.10. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation
Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation
For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.
“Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and Recloser.
If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and VD wiring in side
panel to be matched.
ETR300-R Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
405
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.11. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Table 14-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
A
C.T Phase C
a
52 common(Auxiliary)
B
C.T Phase B
b
52b(Auxiliary)
C
C.T Phase A
c
52a(Auxiliary)
D
C.T Common(G)
d
Close and Trip Coil Common
E
VD Source Phase C
e
Close and Trip Coil Common
F
VD Source Phase B
f
Close and Trip Coil Common
G
VD Source Phase A
g
Close Coil
H
Ground(VD Load side Phase T)
h
Close Coil
J
Ground(VD Load side Phase S)
j
Close Coil
K
VD Load side Phase R
k
not connected
L
Pressure Sensor Output(controller input)
m
Trip Coil
M
not connected
n
not connected
N
Pressure Sensor Power AGND
p
Trip Coil
P
Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
r
Trip Coil
R
Cable shield and Ground
s
not connected
S
not connected
T
Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)
U
Recloser Status Common(24Vdc)
V
Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip)
W
Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)
X
not connected
Z
not connected

Control ETR300-R Receptacle : VG95234 28-21S (Female)

Recloser Receptacle : VG95234 28-21P (Male)

Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”)

Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
406
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Figure 14-10. Control Receptacle
“Figure 14-10. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control ETR300-R.
14.12. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling
Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling.
For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.
Following notices are suggested.
Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing.
Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this to
complete connection.
Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control Cable
assembling
Figure 14-11. Recloser Receptacle
Figure 14-12. Control Cable
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
407
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.13. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Table 14-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function
A
AC Power Input
B
AC Power Input (Neutral)
C
EARTH
Standard Input Voltage of Control ETR300-R
is 220Vac.
Figure 14-13. Power Receptacle
14.14. AC Power Cable
TYPE : VG22-2S(Female)
Cable Length : 2C-3.5㎟ 6meter(236")
A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase)
B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral)
C PIN : Earth
14.15. Fuses
Table 14-4. Fuses
Positions
Terminal Block TF1
Inside Relay Module F1
(Power board)
Rating /
External AC - Power Input
10A
5A
Dimensions
Purpose
0.25"×1.25"
AC Power outlet and Heater
(6.385×31.75)㎜
User Available AC Power
0.197"×0.787"
(5×20)㎜
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
User-Available DC Power
408
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.16. Battery and Control run time
Table 14-5. Battery Specs
Maker
CSB
Battery Type
GP 12170
Nominal Voltage
12V
Nominal capacity
17 amp-hours
Dimension
181×76×167㎜
Self-discharge Versus Time
14 month at +25℃, 5 month at +40℃
Service life Time
8 years at +25℃, 1 .5years at +50℃
Battery Connector(CN11)
Molex Connector 3191-2R
Controller run time
24 hours at -5℃, 32 hours at 25℃
Recharge Time
15 hours at +25℃
Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in
series.
2
1
Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is
connected to battery switch NFB1. In order to store
Battery for a long time, turn NFB1 “OFF” without
disconnecting Harness connector.
The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3%
per month when batteries are stored at an ambient
temperature of +20℃(+68℉). The self-discharge rate
varies with ambient temperature.
The approximate depth of discharge or remaining
capacity of an battery can be empirically determined
from “Figure 14-15. Open Circuit Voltage”.
Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits.
Remove Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure
the battery voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual
capacity is 0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires
maintenance.
24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and SMPS-C
Module through NFB1(Battery Switch).
Relay Module supplies through PTR G Connector in Side
Panel and SMPS-C Module supplies through PTR J
Connector of SMPS-C Module.
Figure 14-14. Battery
Figure 14-15. Open Circuit Voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
409
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.17. Charge Circuit
Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to
prevent over-recharge. Charge power supply is 24Vac, equal with Relay Module. Charging device
charges up to 80 percent of battery with constant current, from 80 to 100 percent of battery with
constant voltage, it makes that there’s any danger of overcharging. To measure temperature in
charging circuit, it helps to compensate with charging voltage, 26.4V to 28.2V. When measured
temperature is 5~35℃, charging voltage is 27.3V. Below 5℃ and higher than 35℃ are measured,
charging voltages are 28.2V and 26.4V, respectively.
Charge Voltage : 27.3Vdc(26.4V~28.2V)
Charge Current : 1.2Adc
14.18. Battery Change
Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and is
connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver.
For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and
black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake.
For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire
later. Refer to “14.16. Battery and Control run time”
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
410
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.19. Communication Cables
1) Cable USB-B to USB-A: Connect to Computer
ETR300-R Controller
Computer
Figure 14-16. Cable USB-B to USB-A (connect to computer)
2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
ETR300-R Controller
Modem, etc.
Figure 14-17. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)
3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
ETR300-R Controller
Modem, etc.
Figure 14-18. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
411
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.20. Hardware Block Diagram
RECLOSER
CONTROL
TRM
Human-Machine Interface Module
(TRANSFORMER
MODULE)
PROTECTION
CT
4 CT INPUTS
1 CT SENSITIVE
VOLTAGE
DIVIDER
6 VD
INPUTS
20 X 8 Line LCD
METER
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY
BATTERY
USB-B TYPE
Main Process Module
(ETR300-R(600))
Ethernet 1
TP or FX (Option)
Protocol
PSM
DNP 3.0
( Power Supply
MODBUS
Module)
Ethernet 2
TP or FX (Option)
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-104
RS232-1
IEC 61850 (Option)
52 CONTACT
69 CONTACT
MONITORED
RS232-2
CLOSE/TRIP
RS485
MAGNETIC
CONTROL
ACTUATOR
Capacitor
SMPS-C
(Capacitor
Charger)
IRIG-B
120Vdc
SCADA Option
BATTERY
24Vdc
AC EXTERNAL
POWER INPUT
Transformer
DIGITAL INPUTS 12
DIGITAL OUTPUT 8
24Vac
DC Power Output
(DC12V or DC24V)
Figure 14-19. Hardware Block Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
412
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.21. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
CC
Close Coil
TC
Trip Coil
C
Capacitor for Trip & Close
IGBT
IGBT Contact for Trip & Close Control
Figure 14-20. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
SMPS-C is a module that receives AC 24V and BATT '(DC24V) input and charges the capacitor
for trip & close in CC (continuous current) mode.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
413
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr

SMPS ON INPUT: ON/OFF input terminal of SMPS module and operates ON when short

DC120V OUTPUT: DC120V output terminal for charging capacitor

LD1: Lights up when SMPS module operates

LD3: Lights up when capacitor charging is complete

ALARM OUTPUT: Capacitor charge completion signal contact
When the IGBT is "ON", the charged capacitor's power turns on the trip/close coil, resulting in
recloser operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
414
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.22. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close
Figure 14-21. SMPS-C Module Block Diagram
SMPS-C Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc.
Trip and Close capacitor are charged at the same time but during trip and close, it does not affect to
each other.
SMPS-C module operates with 24Vac power or spare battery.
Transformer in ETR300-R connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac.
Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs over
20Vdc.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
415
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.23. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
124
125
126
127
Figure 14-22. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram

CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.

The capacity of VD is 20㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
416
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.24. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
INTERUPTERS
VACUUM
Protection Module
16
4
1
5
P1
2
6
3
17
18
13
P3
7
8
9
69
52b
52a
52b
52a
+
+
TC
CC
14
15
10
P2
10
11
12
9
1112
1111
1110
1109
1108
1107
1106
1105
1104
1103
1102
1101
11
12
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TB1
Receptacle(MS28-21P)
1305
1303
1301
1302
1312
1311
1310
1318
1316
1314
1112
1111
1109
1108
1107
1106
1105
1104
1102
1101
IC
IB
IA
IG
VC
VB
VA
VT
VS
VR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
N
P
T
U
V
W
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
j
m
p
r
R
RE1
Figure 14-23. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram

CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.

The resistance of VD is 100MΩ, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
417
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.25. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)
Table 14-6. Current Transformer (CT)
Description
Pin
Function
A
C.T Phase C
CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard)
B
C.T Phase B
CT Resistance < 5
C
C.T Phase A
D
C.T Common(G)
14.26. CT Protection Circuit
A circuit which prevent from increasing voltage of secondary CT when Open Circuit, is built. This
circuit use TRIAC components and it is operated when the secondary voltage is 27 ~ 35V.
Figure 14-1. CT Protection Circuit

D is Diac component and bi-directional and it works when 27~35V is applied.

Q is Triac component and bi-directional and it works when the Voltage is applied at GATE.

When CT secondary circuit is OPEN, the voltage is raised and D voltage is within 27~35V, D is
activated and operates Q in order to prevent a voltage increasing at both side of CT. Therefore,
the secondary voltage of CT is not increased over D voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
418
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.27. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD)
Table 14-7. Voltage Divider (VD)
Description
Pin
Function
E
VD Source Phase C
Pin R is connected to Ground.
F
VD Source Phase B
VD Capacitance : 20㎊
G
VD Source Phase A
H
VD Load side Phase T
J
VD Load side Phase S
K
VD Load side Phase R
R
Cable shield and Ground
E
VD Source Phase C
F
VD Source Phase B
G
VD Source Phase A
K
VD Load side Phase R
R
Cable shield and Ground
EVR RECLOSER
For VD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase
and Ground.
Figure 14-24. VD Wiring Diagram of EVR
EPR RECLOSER
Pin R is connected to Ground.
VD Capacitance of Source Phase : 100MΩ
VD Capacitance of Load side Phase : 100MΩ
For VD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase
and Ground.
For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC
Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.
Figure 14-25. VD Wiring Diagram
Voltage Measuring Method 1
of EPR
measure MOV voltage.
(measure a voltage between MOV arms)
Voltage Measuring Method 2
Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and
measure MOV voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
419
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.28. Voltage Transducer
Figure 14-26. Voltage Transducer

Voltage sensing device measures a voltage by using capacity of capacitor built or capacity of
resistance built in bushing of switch. Capacity of capacitor is 26㎊(±%), resistanc 100㏁.

Voltage sensing device divides a voltage by using Voltage Divider(VD) and secondary
capacitor or resistance, and then divided voltage is supplied to RTU through Amplifer(AMP)
circuit and Transformer.

MOV(TNR15G820K) is used to protect surge of control.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
420
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)
Table 14-8. ETR300-R Pressure Sensor
Description
Pin
Function
L
Pressure Sensor Output
Sensor Power is delivered from
N
Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-)
P
Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
5.0
4.5
Output voltage(Vdc)
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
-0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Pressure (bar)
Figure 14-27. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
421
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact
Table 14-9. 52 contact and 69 contact
Description
69 is b Contact when unlocked.
Pin
Function
T
69b(Monitored locked)
U
Common(52 and 69)
V
52b(Monitored Trip)
W
52a(Monitored Close)
a
52 common(Auxiliary)
b
52b(Auxiliary)
c
52a(Auxiliary)
14.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil
Table 14-10. Trip and Close Coil
Description
Pin
Function
d
Close and Trip Coil Common
e
Close and Trip Coil Common
Pin d, e and f are combined as one line.
f
Close and Trip Coil Common
Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one line
g
Close Coil
Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one line.
h
Close Coil
Close Coil Resistance : < 5
j
Close Coil
Trip Coil Resistance : < 2
m
Trip Coil
p
Trip Coil
r
Trip Coil
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
422
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.32. Recloser Test Kit
RTS 2010 Model tests ETR300-R by Fault Simulation.
RTS 2010 can display Full Sequence of Trip time, Trip current, Interval on LCD screen and also
can variously test Calibration Mode, OCR Mode, External Mode, Manual Mode.
Figure 14-28. Recloser Test Kit
Standard Ratings and Features
Table 14-11. Standard Ratings and Features
Classification
Current output
Rating and Characteristic
1.5Arms ×3ch (Burden below 1Ω)
4.5Arms×1ch (3ch Parallel)
Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.1mA)
Voltage output
7Vrms ×4ch (Burden over 1㏀)
Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.002V)
Binary input
BI01~02: DC12~150V or Dry contact(User select)
BI03~04: DC12~150V(Pulse below 1sec)
Binary output
BO01~04
130mA/350V, ON Resistance (below 35 Ω)
Time Accuracy
±5ms
Weight
6kg(RTS2010), 1.2kg(cable), 6kg AL Case
Dimensions
325×150×270 (RTS2010)
521×258×348 (AL CASE)
Control Interface Cable
2M
Operating Temperature
-20℃ ~ +50℃
Power input
AC180~264 @ Select AC220V
AC 90~132 @ Select AC110V
Max. 150W
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
423
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
15. MAINTANANCE
15.1. Warning Events
ETR300-R possesses self-test and self-diagnostic function. If any abnormal behavior is detected in
the system, it records the corresponding events in the Diagnostic Event or System Event and
transmits it to SCADA system via remote.
“Table 15-1. Warning Events” is the list of self-diagnosis conditions managed by ETR300-R
system processing method and user’s recommended actions.. Users are requested to refer to “Table
15-1. Warning Events” in case of any abnormality in the system.
Table 15-1. Warning Events(1/3)
EVENT
EVENT TEXT
(LCD)
ACFAIL
External power FAIL
CHGBAD
Battery charge circuit FAIL
; CHGLOW or CHGHIGH
1) CHGLOW
Battery charge circuit volt
LOW (Value 25V)
2) CHGHIGH
Battery charge circuit volt
HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)
BATBAD
Battery BAD
; BATLOW, BATHIG,
NOBAT or
Batt Cap’ Alarm Level
when BATT Manageement
is ENABLED.
SYSTEM POWER
POWER
MODE
DOWN
GAS STATUS
*. applied only gas
insulation type
(EVR)
SYSTEM
RESTART
ETR300-R
ACTION
USER’ RECOMMENDED
ACTION
‘AC SUPPLY’
LED OFF
1. Check AC Power NFB
2. Check AC Power fuse
3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected
‘CHARGER’
LED OFF
1. Check AC supply
2. Check Battery charge Voltage
(range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)
3. Replace Analog Module
‘BATTERY’
LED OFF
1. Check AC Power NFB
2. Check AC Power fuse
3. Check AC supply, ensure AC
connector is securely connected
4. Replace Battery charge T.R
5. Check battery NFB
6. Check battery connection
EXPLANATION
1) BATLOW
Battery volt LOW
(15V < Value 21V)
2) BATHIGH
Battery charge circuit volt
HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)
3) NOBATT
NO Battery (Value < 15V)
PWDOWN
Power down mode
(Value < 21V and ACFAIL)
Controller
power turn off
No problem
1. Check AC supply
2. Check battery
GASLOW
Gas pressure LOW
(Value 0.1 bar)
GASHIGH
Gas pressure HIGH
(Value ≥ 1.5V)
CLOSE block
When ‘Opr’ Block
GPF’ setting is
ON
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
connected
2. Check Control cable fault
3. Replace Main Processing Module
4. Replace Recloser.
SYSRST
System restarted
-
No problem
CLDRST
Cold Restarted
-
No problem
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
424
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 15-1. Warning Events(2/3)
ETR300-R
ACTION
EVENT
EVENT TEXT
(LCD)
SETTING
(Refer to SET
CHANGE
Event)
GLSCHG
(Global setting)
and GRSCH1~
GRSCH6(Group
setting)
Setting Changed
-
CF
Close fail
-
TRF
Trip fail
-
DIGOPOW
Capacitor charger power
supply error
-
1.Ensure status input connector cable is
securely connected
2. Check SMPS-C module
3. Check IN210 stauts
DIGIGBT
IGBT error
-
1.Ensure status input cable is securely
connected
2. Check IN210 and IN211stauts
TRIP
& CLOSE
EXPLANATION
USER’ RECOMMENDED
ACTION
No problem
* But somebody modified the setting
data.
1. Check the close/trip module
2. Check the receptacle pin
3.Ensure Control cable is securely
connected
4.Check SMPS-C module
5.Check close/open magnetic contactor
(MC)
DIGCLC
Close coil error
-
1.Ensure status input cable is securely
connected
2. Check IN210, IN212, IN213 and
IN214 stauts
DIGTRC
Trip coil error
-
1.Ensure status input cable is securely
connected
2. Check IN210 and IN213stauts
SELFTER
System error
while booting
DIGGLSET
Detail message are
recorded in diagnostic
event
1.Check the diagnostic event
2.Refer to EVENT TEXT
Global setting error
Restored default setting
by itself
1. Execute System Restart
2. Execute default setting
3. Replace Main Processing Module
DIGGRSET
Group setting error
Restored default setting
by itself
1. Execute System Restart
2. Execute default setting
3. Replace Main Processing Module
DIGSPU
DSP moule error or
ADC processer error
Correct measurement
and protection does not
work
1. Execute System Restart
2. Replace DSP Module
3. Replace Main Processing Module
DIGADC
A/D conversion error
Correct measurement
and protection does not
work
1. Execute System Restart
2. Replace DSP Module
3. Replace Main Processing Module
DIGEVT
Recorded events format
error
Cleared events by itself
1. Execute All Clear Event
2. Execute System Restart
3. Replace Main Processing Module
DIGCNT
Registered
error
Cleared count by itself
1. Execute All Clear Data
2. Execute System Restart
3. Replace Main Processing Module
Cleared
data(energy,
max. demand, contact
wear
and
battery
capacity) by itself
1. Execute All Clear Data
2. Execute System Restart
3. Replace Main Processing Module
detected
SELF TEST
DIGMEM
count
Registered data error
data
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
425
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 15-1. Warning Events(3/3)
EVENT
SELF TEST
EXPLANATION
ETR300-R
ACTION
DIGGPS
IRIG/GPS module error
-
DIGGPSLK
IRIG/GPS link fail
-
DIGEXIO
External I/O Unit
ETIO10 error
Cleared external TD
metering value, external
input status and external
output status
DIGWIFI
Wifi module error
-
DIGWIFILK
Wifi link eerror
-
EVENT TEXT
(LCD)
DISTHM
External thermistor error
-
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
USER’ RECOMMENDED
ACTION
1.Ensure IRIG connector connector
cable is securely connected
2. Check IRIG module
3. Check ‘IRIG Use’ setting
1.Ensure ETIO10 connector connector
cable is securely connected
2. Check ETIO10 module
3. Check ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting
1.Ensure Wifi connector connector
cable is securely connected
2. Check Wifi module
3. Check ‘Wifi Use’ setting
4. Check Wifi communication setting
1.Ensure external thermistor connector
cable is securely connected
2. Check external thermistor module
3. Check ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ setting
426
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
16. PLC function
ETR300-R has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to
control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During
ETR300-R running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet user’s need.
PLC is programmed in “ETIMS Interface Software”.
Figure 16-1. PLC Edit Window (Example)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
427
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
17. Function of File Transfer Protocol
Without connecting ETIMS interface software, ETR300-R is possible to patch upgrade firmware
and to change ETR300-R settings and CSV(Comma Separated Value) format files through
FTP(File Transfer Protocol). Also it supports to download COMFEDE(COMmon Format for Event
Data Exchange) and COMTRADE(COMmon Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files on
operator PC. For this function is used, it is essential to use TLS(Transport Layer Security) that
universial FTP utility is installed on PC. By recommendation of universial FTP utility, there are
FileZilla, WinSCP.
17.1. Patching firmware to upgrade
Process of firmware patch is as follows;
1) Connect between PC and ETR300-R
Connect between PC and ETR300-R using Ethernet cable. The Ethernet cable should be wired at
ethernet port(EN1 or EN2) for Ethernet on side panel of ETR300-R.
2) Access ETR300-R through FTP utility
After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETR300-R required to patch firmware and No. 21 for
the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. IP address of ETR300-R refers to setting values
on “GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / PORT4/ IP Addr Oct1~ 4”.
Password refers to ‘Admin PW’ setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTPSSL / Admin PW”. Access “/home/entec_system/PACKAGE” on the FTP utility.
3) Firmware Upgrade through ETIMS Interface Software
Upload a file named ‘UPDATE.fw’ on directory. DOES NOT REVISE the file name. If the file
name does not correspond, patching firmware is not supported. After completed to upload the file
on the directory, patching firmware starts automatically. Changed firmware version is checked on
device or through interface ETIMS interface software after patch process is sucessfully finished.
For reference this function supports on ETIMS interface software, too.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
428
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
17.2. Import/Export CSV files
Process to import and export CSV file is as follows;
17.2.1. Access ETR300-R to import and export CSV files
After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETR300-R required to patch firmware and No. 21
for the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. Password refers to ‘Admin PW’ setting on
“GLOBAL
SETTING
/
COMMUNICATION
/
FTP-SSL
/
Admin
PW”.
Access
“/home/entec_system/CSV” on the FTP utility.
17.2.2. Export CSV files
It is possible to export CSV file that global and group settings, PLC(Programmable Logic Control)
configuration and communication map configuration applied on ETR300-R. A file named
‘eSetting.csv’ is related to global and group settings another file named ‘ePLC.csv’ is related to
PLC information and the other file named ‘eDBMap.csv’ is related to communication map
configuration. When setting is revised and device restarts, export function operates automatically.
17.2.3. Import CSV files
It is possible to import CSV file for passcord related on passcord 1, global and group settings,
PLC(Programmable Logic Control) configuration and communication map configuration applied
on ETR300-R. To revise importing CSV file, edit CSV file on Excel or text editor. Refer to CSV
description for searching items wanted to change. Name of CSV file must be ‘iPassword.csv’ for
passcord 1, iSetting.csv for global and group setting, iPLC.csv for PLC and iDBMap.csv
communication map configuration which will be applied on ETR300-R. And then, upload the file
on directory “/home/entec_system/CSV”.


CSV format of password
Example of CSV format for password
G,current passcord, new passcord
G,0000,1234
ENTEC (END Tag)
ENTEC
NOTE
Refer to ‘iResult.log’ file which is a generated error history of ETR300-R’. After it is
completed to import CSV files, the files will be removed. If any error generates, prefix
"Done_" adds name of the file generated error. Except on items generated error, import
function can continues to process. If error is generated, the error is logged on ‘iResult.log’
caused that any value gets out of a range and cannot be set.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
429
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
17.3. COMFEDE
ETR300-R can download COMFEDE(Common Format for Event Data Exchange) format files
related on EVENT. After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETR300-R required to patch
firmware and No. 21 for the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. Password refers to
‘User1 PW’ setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTP-SSL / User1 PW”.
Access “/home/ entec_user/COMFEDE” on the FTP utility.
Saved event information contains as follows; Fault indicator, Operation, System, Diagnostic,
Setting changed, Load & Energy (Load profile). Initial one hundred logs of each type of ETR300-R
events. Initial fifty event logs of each type of Load & Energy events. Generated more than one
hundred event logs, the events are saved on flash memory or micro SD card.
In case that micro SD card is inserted, micro SD card stores every 1000 events separately. Using
date and time when every 1000th event is generated, name of file is created, for example,
FI_20171010_235043.xml. So the events can be separated using the name of xml format files.
However, storing event logs is limited according to storage capacity of micro SD Card inserted. If
there is no storage capacity of SD Card, it will be removed in old order. Note that formatting
FAT32 is required for micro SD card which allocation unit is 32KB. If micro SD card is not
inserted, events saved on flash drive be possible to store 1000 events., Per type of events, two files
grouped each 1000 events(up to 2000 events) can be managed. And the files can be distinguished
using the file names. For example, names of xml files are ‘FI_EVENT.xml’ saved recently and
‘OLD_FI_EVENT.xml’ saved in the past.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
430
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R
http://www.entecene.co.kr
17.4. COMTRADE
ETR-300R supports COMTRADE(Common Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files of
fault waveforms recorded on fault event log. After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of
ETR300-R required to patch firmware and No.21 for the number of ports on TLS settings of FTP
utility. Password refers to 'User 1 PW' setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION /
FTP-SSL / User1 PW”. Access “/home/ entec_user/COMTRADE” on the FTP utility.
17.4.1. File format and Name
ETR300-R generates binary type COMTRADE files, only. Example of generated COMTRADE
file name are 'W2C_##.CFG' and
'W2C_##.DAT'’ Here, ## is the order in which they are
generated.
17.4.2. Releated Setting Items
COMFEDE file relates following settings;
Table 17-1. Setting Items
Menu Location
Description
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>
COMTRADE file is generated or not (ON/OFF)
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Record
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>
Select COMTRADE standard's revision version which
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rev.
be applied (1999/2013)
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>
Select
Analog
channel
wanted
to
generate
nd
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE P/S
COMTRADE file (Primary :1st, Secondary: 2 )
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>
Enter the rate of COMTRADE waveform wanted to
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rate
generate(1~10:1)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
431